manualshive.com logo in svg

Avaya Definity SI, Maintenance Manual, Page: 1825 / 2968

Share
Download
Avaya Definity SI Maintenance Manual Download Page 1825

MAPD-BD (MAPD Interface Circuit Pack TN802)

Issue 4  May 2002

10-1039

555-233-123

Backing up to the PCMCIA disk

Table 10-377

 details how to back up administration data for the IP trunk 

application to and restored from the local PCMCIA disk and the Ethernet port. 
Before backing up, be sure to shut down the application running on the circuit 
pack, following the procedures in the 

‘‘Shutting down NT on the TN802’’

 section.

DCS

Know limitations:

■

Auto Callback

Coordinate specific administration 
and between the IP trunk and Avaya 
DEFINITY Server for any DCS 
functionality. Some limitations on 
routing flexibility may apply.

ISDN

IP trunking has no 
signalling capability.

ISDN not supported. This includes:

■

10-digit number display

■

QSIG

■

Path replacement

Voice mail

Calls that have terminated 
at one location and then 
cover to a second site for 
voice mail coverage can 
have voice quality 
degradation.

Centralized voice mail through an IP 
network is not recommended.

Table 10-376.

Avaya DEFINITY Server IP trunk feature/performance limitations

 — Continued  

Feature/
Performance Description

Recommendation 

Continued on next page

Summary of Contents for Definity SI

Page 1: ...0DLQWHQDQFH IRU YD D 1 7 6HUYHU 6 Volumes 1 2 and 3 555 233 123 Issue 4 May 2002...

Page 2: ...labor costs and or legal costs Responsibility for Your Company s Telecommunications Security The final responsibility for securing both this system and its net worked equipment rests with you Avaya s...

Page 3: ...CC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices...

Page 4: ...mpliant with FCC Part 68 but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process was available A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at http www part68 org by conducting a se...

Page 5: ...xxxii Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards xxxiii Trademarks and Service Marks xxxiv How to Order Documentation xxxv How to Comment on This Document xxxv Where to Call for Technical Support xxxvi 1...

Page 6: ...ased Bulletin Board 3 22 DEC VT220 Terminal 3 25 4 Initialization and Recovery 4 1 Reset commands 4 1 Procedure for SPE Down Mode 4 8 Procedure for Duplication Interface Processing Element Communicati...

Page 7: ...System Technician Commands for High and Critical Reliability Systems 6 15 Processor Complex Circuit Pack LED Strategies 6 19 Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability 6 21 Procedure for Inst...

Page 8: ...3 busyout port 8 15 busyout pri endpoint 8 16 busyout sp link 8 17 busyout spe standby 8 18 busyout station 8 19 busyout tdm 8 21 busyout tone clock 8 22 busyout trunk 8 23 cancel hardware group 8 25...

Page 9: ...communication interface processor channel 8 74 display disabled tests 8 76 display errors 8 77 display events 8 82 display failed ip network region 8 97 display firmware download 8 97 display initcaus...

Page 10: ...list measurements clan ppp 8 158 list measurements clan sockets 8 160 list measurements ds 1 8 163 list measurements ip codec 8 167 list measurements ip dsp resource 8 171 list measurements ip signal...

Page 11: ...lease packet control 8 259 release pms link 8 260 release port 8 261 release pri endpoint 8 262 release sp link 8 263 release spe standby 8 264 release station 8 265 release tdm 8 266 release tone clo...

Page 12: ...us administered connection 8 301 status attendant 8 302 status audits 8 303 status bri port 8 311 status card mem 8 318 status cdr link 8 321 status clan port 8 322 status cleared alarm notif 8 322 st...

Page 13: ...endpoint 8 411 test alarms 8 412 test analog testcall 8 417 test board 8 420 test card mem 8 422 test cdr link 8 425 test customer alarm 8 426 test data module 8 428 test ds1 loop 8 430 test duplicati...

Page 14: ...est synchronization 8 487 test tdm 8 489 test tone clock 8 491 test trunk 8 493 test tsc administered 8 495 traceroute 8 496 upgrade software 8 499 9 Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction 9 1 Gene...

Page 15: ...PT AUDIX Analog Line Control Link 10 34 ALARM PT ALARM PORT 10 43 ANL 24 L 24 Port Analog Line 10 44 ANL 16 L 16 Port Neon Analog Line 10 63 ANL BD Analog Line Circuit Pack 10 85 ANL LINE 8 Port Analo...

Page 16: ...wered Systems 10 360 CARR POW Carrier Port Power Unit for DC Powered Systems 10 377 CLAN BD Control LAN Circuit Pack 10 393 CLSFY BD Call Classifier Circuit Pack 10 411 CLSFY PT Call Classifier Port 1...

Page 17: ...al Line 10 722 EMG XFER 10 733 EPN SNTY EPN Sanity Audit 10 737 ERR LOG Error Log 10 739 ETH PT Control LAN Ethernet 10 740 ETR PT Enhanced Tone Receiver Port 10 752 EXP INTF Expansion Interface Circu...

Page 18: ...RES TN802 reserve slot 10 1068 MEDPRO Media Processor MAPD Circuit Pack 10 1069 MEDPROPT TN802 TN2302 MED PRO DSP PORT 10 1081 MEM BD Memory 10 1089 MEMORY 10 1095 MIS Management Information System 1...

Page 19: ...PPP PT Control LAN Packet Port 10 1352 PR MAINT Maintenance Processor TN2404 TN790 RISC Systems 10 1366 PR MAINT Maintenance Processor 10 1385 PR MEM TN2404 TN790 RISC Memory 10 1400 PRI CDR SEC CDR...

Page 20: ...TN2185 ISDN Trunk Side BRI 10 1686 TDMODULE Trunk Data Module 10 1698 TDM BUS TDM Bus 10 1699 TDM CLK TDM Bus Clock 10 1721 TIE BD Tie Trunk Circuit Pack 10 1736 TIE DS1 DS1 Tie Trunk 10 1737 TIE TRK...

Page 21: ...A 2 busyout cdr link A 3 busyout data module A 4 busyout journal printer A 5 busyout link A 5 busyout mis A 6 busyout modem pool A 7 busyout packet control A 8 busyout pms link A 8 busyout port A 9 bu...

Page 22: ...isplay errors A 39 display initcauses A 43 display memory configuration A 43 display port A 44 display synchronization A 44 display system parameters maintenance A 45 display time A 45 download update...

Page 23: ...e journal printer A 64 release link A 65 release mis A 65 release modem pool A 66 release packet control A 67 release pms link A 68 release port A 68 release pri endpoint A 69 release sp link A 70 rel...

Page 24: ...s card mem A 96 status cdr link A 97 status cleared alarm notif A 98 status data module A 98 status hardware group A 99 status health A 99 status interface A 100 status isdn testcall A 101 status jour...

Page 25: ...t duplication interface A 123 test environment A 124 test hardware group A 124 test inads link A 127 test interface A 127 test isdn testcall A 129 test journal printer A 130 test led A 131 test link A...

Page 26: ...233 123 xxvi Issue 4 May 2002 test station A 145 test synchronization A 146 test tdm A 147 test tone clock A 148 test trunk A 149 test tsc administered A 150 traceroute A 151 upgrade software A 153 I...

Page 27: ...raditional methods include terminal substitution visual inspections continuity checks and clarification of operating procedures with users The information in this book is intended for use by a mainten...

Page 28: ...All physical dimensions in this book are in English Foot Pound Second FPS followed by the metric Centimeter Grams Second CGS in parenthesis Wire gauge measurements are in AWG followed by the diameter...

Page 29: ...set up the terminals Chapter 4 Initialization and Recovery describes the various reset and reboot processes and discusses how these processes are used to perform maintenance and to recover systems or...

Page 30: ...or Common Port Circuit Pack maintenance which is XXX BD The XXX BD section contains a set of common tests used by certain circuit packs listed in the section The common portion of these circuit packs...

Page 31: ...the system Class 1 Laser Device The Avaya DEFINITY Server SI contains a Class 1 Laser device if single mode fiber optic cable is connected to a remote Expansion Port Network EPN The LASER device oper...

Page 32: ...his document complies with the following as appropriate ITU T Formerly CCITT ECMA ETSI IPNS DPNSS National ISDN 1 National ISDN 2 ISO 9000 ANSI FCC Part 15 and Part 68 EN55022 EN50081 EN50082 CISPR22...

Page 33: ...ce The system conforms to the following Electromagnetic compatibility General Immunity Standard part 1 residential commercial light industry EN50082 1 CENELEC 1991 Issue 1 1984 and Issue 2 1992 Electr...

Page 34: ...h 25 Hz ring generator AC powered Compact Single Carrier Cabinet CSCC with 25 Hz ring generator Enhanced DC Power System Trademarks and Service Marks The following are trademarks or registered tradema...

Page 35: ...of PictureTel Corporation ProShare registered trademark of Intel Corporation UNIX trademark of X Open Corporation Zydacron registration pending for Zydacron Corporation How to Order Documentation In...

Page 36: ...Fraud Intervention 1 800 643 2353 Avaya Technical Service Center maintenance repair 1 800 242 2121 Avaya Corporate Security 1 800 822 9009 1 925 224 3401 North America 1 800 248 1111 Central Latin Ame...

Page 37: ...ation on the system s overall functions For detailed descriptions of components and subsystems refer to related topics in Chapter 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures How to use the Maintenance boo...

Page 38: ...vel Description Reported to INADS Reported to console What action to take MAJOR Critical service degradation Y Yes after 4 attempts to call INADS Immediate attention MINOR Some service degradation but...

Page 39: ...e alarmed port address 5 Type display errors and press Enter A query screen appears where you can chose to see all the errors or restrict the list to certain kinds of errors Except for warning levels...

Page 40: ...een 13 Find the Port Diagnostic Test 35 from Test No in the DID TRK section of the Maintenance book Note the Error Code 61472 MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the unive...

Page 41: ...FAIL Battery feed test failed A problem with the incoming CO line was detected 1 Check the incoming CO line for proper operation If warranted refer the problem to the CO 2 If the CO line checks out O...

Page 42: ...al sensors represent larger subsystems or sets of monitors Finally some MOs such as SYNChronization represent processes or a combination of processes and hardware Maintenance names are recorded in the...

Page 43: ...t error When an error counter is active greater than zero there is a maintenance record for the MO Alarms are classified as MAJOR MINOR or WARNING depending on the effect on system operation They are...

Page 44: ...hours so as not to interfere with calls Fixed interval Background tests performed by software maintenance at regular time intervals these intervals cannot be administered These tests run concurrently...

Page 45: ...ommunications contains seven layers each with a specific function Communications to and through the system concern themselves only with layers 1 and 2 of the model Layer 1 or the physical layer covers...

Page 46: ...A MODULE DATA MODULE DATA MODULE DTE DTE DATA MODULE DS1 PORT 1 D I G I T A L P O R T RAW BITS RS232C DS1 FORMAT DCP DMI ASCII 2 P O R T D S 1 DTE T R U N K P O R T A N A L O G ADU ADU DTE E I A P O R...

Page 47: ...pped at the port The DS1 protocol can be inserted at the originating outgoing trunk port and stripped at the destination port Digital Communications Protocol DCP A standard for a 3 channel link This p...

Page 48: ...on appears in one of two forms 1 Raw digital data where the physical layer protocols like DCP are stripped at the incoming port and reinserted at the outgoing port 2 Pulse Code Modulation PCM encoded...

Page 49: ...ge 1 14 Table 1 4 Protocol States for Data Communication Transmis sion Type Incoming DTE to DCE OSI Layer Protocols DTE to DCE DCE to System Port Inside System Analog Modem 1 RS 232 RS 449 or V 35 ana...

Page 50: ...ystem port data is identical to digital line data Data entering the system at a DCP line port can exit at an EIA port Conversely data entering the system at an EIA port can exit at any DCP line port T...

Page 51: ...assurance that at least one party on the call can control the dropping of the call This avoids locking up circuits on a call where no party is able to send a disconnect signal to the system Internal...

Page 52: ...utters indicating a denial If transferring to a DCS trunk the denial may drop the call since the transfer is allowed and the other system is queried for disconnect supervision Analog Station Transfer...

Page 53: ...m 5000 feet 1524 m 7000 feet 2130 m 12 000 feet 3654 m 20 000 feet 6100 m 40 000 feet 12200 m RS 449 Processor Interface to Processor Interface 19 2 kbps 9 6 kbps 4 8 kbps 2 4 kbps 200 feet 61 m 400...

Page 54: ...Category A Data modules to terminals or cluster controller Data module in ASCII emulation mode 64 kbps 9 6 kbps 500 feet 152 m ISDN BRI Communication interface to ISDN BRI S T ISDN BRI U 64 kbps 160 k...

Page 55: ...tation or CO trunk to digital interface DS0 relative to loss at 1 kHz for the United States NOTE The following numbers apply only to DCP or BRI station types They do not apply to IP stations Table 1 8...

Page 56: ...llowing numbers apply only to DCP or BRI station types They do not apply to IP stations Table 1 10 Insertion Loss for the United States Typical Connections NominalLoss dB at 1 kHz On premises to on pr...

Page 57: ...uantization Distortion Loss Table 1 13 lists the quantization distortion loss in the system for analog port to analog port NOTE The following numbers apply only to DCP or BRI station types They do not...

Page 58: ...ingle Frequency Return Loss SFRL performance is usually dominated by termination and or loop input impedances The system provides an acceptable level of echo performance if the ERL and SFRL are met Ta...

Page 59: ...microwave systems 7 0Z Partially protected private communications microwave systems 8 0X Port for ancillary equipment 9 0F Fully protected terminal equipment 9 0P Partially protected terminal equipme...

Page 60: ...ger Equivalency Numbers RENs and types of network jacks that connect a line to a rear panel connector on a carrier Table 1 15 Analog Private Line and Trunk Port Circuit Packs Circuit Pack FIC Service...

Page 61: ...The Vistium Personal Conferencing System is supported either through the 8510T BRI terminal or directly through the Vistium TMBRI PC board Using the World Class Core WCC BRI interface most desktop mu...

Page 62: ...Maintenance Architecture 555 233 123 1 26 Issue 4 May 2002...

Page 63: ...nd supported by the DEFINITY Servers Where appropriate detailed information down to the circuit pack level is provided This chapter also discusses the power sources required to enable the various comp...

Page 64: ...vice fails The time and extent of the holdover varies according to the type of cabinet and to whether or not the system has a duplicated control complex Table 2 1 summarizes the response to the interr...

Page 65: ...ets are dropped Table 2 2 Response to Power Service Interruption with an Internal Holdover Battery System and Configuration Cabinet Holdover for Entire Cabinet in seconds Holdover for Entire Control C...

Page 66: ...power is restored in less than 250 milliseconds no calls are dropped If power is restored between 250 milliseconds and two minutes all calls are dropped and memory is maintained However since the tone...

Page 67: ...he typical maintenance tasks that can be performed from them This chapter discusses the following topics Management Terminals System Login Procedure Password Aging Administrable Logins System Logoff P...

Page 68: ...any time the terminal may be disconnected from the Duplication Interface circuit pack A and connected directly to the active processor circuit pack by attaching the terminal to the connector labeled T...

Page 69: ...he permissible entries the user can input for that field This key can be pressed at thanker command level to obtain a list of all commands System Login Procedure To log into the system 1 Turn on the a...

Page 70: ...ssful login enter command appears on the screen You can enter a command A command is made up of multiple words that are typed on the keyboard and that instruct the system to perform a particular task...

Page 71: ...Login type Service level Disable following a security violation value Access to Inads Port value Password aging cycle length Facility test call notification and acknowledgment Remote access notificat...

Page 72: ...aged starting with the date the password was created or changed and continuing for a specified number of days 1 to 99 If a login is added or removed the Security Measurement reports are not updated un...

Page 73: ...add login name and press Enter to access the Login Administration screen 2 Enter your super user password in the Password of Login Making Change field on the Login Administration screen The login nam...

Page 74: ...in this field password aging does not apply to the login 10 Decide whether or not to leave y in the Facility Test Call Notification field If y is selected the user receives notification at logoff tha...

Page 75: ...ord in the Password of Login Making Change field on the Login Administration screen The 3 to 6 character login name entered with change login name appears in the Login s Name field 3 Enter customer in...

Page 76: ...aging does not apply to the login Administering Login Command Permissions Login permissions for a specified login can be set by the super user to block any object that may compromise switch security...

Page 77: ...r Maintain Process Circuit Packs fields 3 A super user with full super user permissions super user administering the login cannot have the Additional Restrictions field set to y for his her own login...

Page 78: ..._______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ _______________________ ______________________ ____________...

Page 79: ...git conversion X ars digit conversion X ars route chosen X ars toll X attendant X X bcms agent X bcms loginIDs X bcms split X bcms trunk X bcms vdn X board X bri port X bridged extensions X bulletin b...

Page 80: ...cor X X cos X coverage answer group X X coverage groups X coverage path X X customer alarm X data module X X X X dialplan X digit absorption X display format X X do not disturb group X do not disturb...

Page 81: ...intercom group X X interface MIPS Only X X intra switch cdr X X isdn cpn prefix X isdn network facilities X isdn testcall X isdn tsc gateway X ixc codes X journal printer X led X link X X listed direc...

Page 82: ...uting X X packet control MIPS Only X X packet interface MIPS Only X paging code calling ids X X paging loudspeaker X password X periodic scheduled X permissions X personal CO line X X pgate X X pickup...

Page 83: ...terminal parameters 603 302B1 X terminal parameters 8400 X test schedule X X time X time of day X toll X toll all X toll restricted call X toll list X toll unrestricted call X tone clock X trunk X X...

Page 84: ...eup station X wakeup log X Table 3 2 Command Permissions screen Entries Administer Permissions Object Action Add Change Display Enable Remove login X X X X X permissions X Table 3 1 Command Permission...

Page 85: ...eviated dialing 7103A buttons X X X abbreviated dialing enhanced X X X abbreviated dialing group X X X abbreviated dialing personal X X abbreviated dialing system X X X alias station X attendant X X X...

Page 86: ...ysis X aar digit conversion X access endpoint X X X X announcements X ars analysis X ars digit conversion X ars toll X digit absorption X meas selection route pattern X meas selection trunk group X me...

Page 87: ...res that present a significant security risk are enabled A message appears on the system administration maintenance interface Additionally you can be required to acknowledge the notification before th...

Page 88: ...board service provides an easy interface for the customer and Avaya to leave messages on the system The bulletin board feature makes it easy for the customer to communicate with Avaya and vise versa F...

Page 89: ...oard Messages Entered After the next command is entered the command prompt appears User Considerations Only one user at a time may edit a message on the bulletin board The user must have the proper pe...

Page 90: ...ines that cause two or more consecutive blank lines the bulletin board is automatically reorganized upon submittal Two or more blank lines are consolidated into a single blank line If a blank line is...

Page 91: ...ns are shown in Table 3 5 Table 3 5 Keyboard Definitions for the DEC VT220 Terminal Function VT220 Key Escape Sequence Help Help ESC 28 Previous Page Previous Screen ESC 5 Next Page Next Screen ESC 6...

Page 92: ...Management Terminals 555 233 123 3 26 Issue 4 May 2002...

Page 93: ...commands are discussed in Chapter 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble Clearing Aids A system is reset due to a loss of power or via one of the following reset commands at the administration terminal M...

Page 94: ...ceed with the restart If the LMM does not proceed with the restart the system goes into SPE Down Mode In failure cases the appropriate part for example the Processor circuit pack should be replaced Yo...

Page 95: ...ns reload from translation card Depending on the translations the reloading process could take from five to 30 seconds Thereafter all port circuit packs are reset and all telephone sessions drop Telep...

Page 96: ...are reset and all telephone sessions drop Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds In a large system reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes Typical display TN2...

Page 97: ...ions drop Telephones begin to reconnect to the switch within 30 seconds In a large system reconnection of all telephones may take up to five minutes Scheduled maintenance is initiated MEMORY FUNCTIONA...

Page 98: ...ODULE A PARITY TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A BURST TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE A COUPLE TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B STUCK BIT TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B PARITY TEST PASSED MEMORY MODULE B BURST TEST PASS...

Page 99: ...ed in one of the following three ways a System Technician Demanded use the reset system interchange command b Scheduled Maintenance c Software Requested The software requests the interchange when it d...

Page 100: ...cessor The administration terminal which connects directly to the processor in a standard reliability system and to DUPINT A in a high or critical reliability system provides a very limited interface...

Page 101: ...affects the other All three of the following methods should be employed to determine where the fatal fault lies 1 Use display alarms command Issuing the display alarms a b command at the administratio...

Page 102: ...n restarting the system using the reset command causes the system to go down again 2 In a High or Critical Reliability system select a carrier to repair first When it is possible to accurately determi...

Page 103: ...ks To Replace PROC_BD 1 Processor 2 Network Control MEM_BUS 1 Processor 2 Network Control PROC_MEM 1 Processor OFFBD_MEM 1 Processor 2 Network Control INVALID_ERR 1 Processor 2 Network Control MAINT_B...

Page 104: ...sing Element Communication down The system may continue to function on one of the SPEs However the system is not able to provide any interface to the administration terminal If the system is still pro...

Page 105: ...ed to INADS After logging off INADS automatically reactivates and any unresolved alarms are reported to INADS Also when logged in as craft an automatic logoff of the terminal occurs after 30 minutes o...

Page 106: ...ide the latch pin upward to unlock the locking lever 3 Pull down on the locking lever until the circuit pack disconnects from its socket 4 Pull the circuit pack just enough to break contact with the b...

Page 107: ...this circuit pack is handled remove the translation card 1 Check that the card in use LED is not lighted Otherwise removing the memory card may damage the data recorded on it 2 Carefully pull the tra...

Page 108: ...circuit pack is shown to be a part of the Active Expansion Interface Link use the set expansion link PCSS command to make the current Standby link the Active one EPN Tone Clock Circuit Packs If the EP...

Page 109: ...Power Procedures on the circuit pack and in EMBEDDED AUDIX documentation EMBEDDED AUDIX System Power Procedures Manually Power Down AUDIX System A yellow caution sticker on the system s power unit not...

Page 110: ...slation card is in the TN777B Network Control circuit pack 1 At the administration terminal type save translation and press Enter 2 In a standard reliability system on the processor circuit pack in th...

Page 111: ...e power from the cabinet 1 Turn off the power in each cabinet individually The ON OFF power switch is located behind the power unit WP 91153 Power Unit for an AC powered system 676B Power Unit for a D...

Page 112: ...ystem 4 System Reboot in Chapter 4 Initialization and Recovery 4 After the system reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared return the EMER XFER Emergency Transfer switch es to AUTO This restores...

Page 113: ...em reboot is finished and all trouble is cleared return the Emergency Transfer switch to AUTO This restores the system to the normal operating mode Power Up the AUDIX System 1 Using a pointed object s...

Page 114: ...lted due to overload conditions However the power supply continues to provide other output voltages 5V DC and 48 V DC to circuit packs and does not completely shut down as earlier power supplies do if...

Page 115: ...t see Replacing power supplies and fans 13 Reboot the system 14 When the system reboot has completed return the EMER XFER Emergency Transfer switch to AUTO restores the system to the normal operating...

Page 116: ...ore replacing the new power supply ensure that the ring generator slide switch on the bottom of the unit is set to the appropriate frequency Table 5 1 6 Slide the unit into the slot and ensure that bo...

Page 117: ...wing procedures and Figure 5 1 Figure 5 1 631AR or 631BR AC Power Unit 1 Set the power switch to OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Move the locking slide on the power unit all the way to the left and un...

Page 118: ...position the rocker is down on the side adjacent to the number 5 Move the locking slide on the replacement power unit to the extreme left position and open the locking lever 6 Insert the power unit in...

Page 119: ...n and unlatch the locking lever 3 Remove the power unit from the carrier 4 Move the locking slide on the replacement power unit to the extreme left position and open the locking lever 5 Insert the pow...

Page 120: ...nference Test in ANL LINE 8 Port Analog Line ANL NE L 8 Port Neon Analog Line CO TRK alarms refer to Test 33 Loop Around and Conference Test in CO TRK CO Trunk All other power supplies Figure 5 3 on p...

Page 121: ...or off of the backplane See Figure 5 4 Figure 5 4 Power supply sub assembly inside view 6 Remove the power supply from the unit Once the power supply is removed disconnect the AC power cord 7 Reconnec...

Page 122: ...panel CAUTION The power cord for each fan extends from a plug on the backplane Do not tug on any of these cords Otherwise the corresponding plug on the backplane might come off 3 Each fan has a power...

Page 123: ...tion command blocks all maintenance commands except some list display monitor and status commands The system blocks the execution of any commands that change translations or trigger a maintenance acti...

Page 124: ...nouncements on the Standby SPE as well WARNING The save announcements commands should only be used after business hours or when the system is operating during a low usage period The system takes about...

Page 125: ...t pack match the announcements administered in the system The working copy of the announcements is stored on the announcement circuit pack A backup copy should be made on a 10 Mb or larger translation...

Page 126: ...Check to see which translation card is installed If the correct one is installed test it 2 Cannot turn on 12 volt power supply Implies that something may be wrong with the Netcon circuit pack which c...

Page 127: ...on card 12 Card Mem is write protected The switch on the top side of the translation card is incorrectly set Move the switch to the down position 13 Transmission problem please try later There is a pr...

Page 128: ...ed Date equipment installed ________________________ Post this form with the equipment Table 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Log Avaya DEFINITY Servers Air Filters1 1 Inspect annually clean or replace See...

Page 129: ...e tape head during each maintenance visit and that you clean the tape head several times a year Place a dated label on the tape drive unit after the tape head is cleaned Access the tape head from the...

Page 130: ...nt console Automatic Circuit Assurance ACA assists users in identifying possible trunk malfunctions The system maintains a record of the performance of individual trunks relative to short and long hol...

Page 131: ...group status for each trunk group associated with the 12 Trunk Group Select buttons located on the console Trunk groups with busy indications during nonbusy periods should be checked to ensure that t...

Page 132: ...iptions are for voice terminal users Trunk test call The trunk test call accesses specific Tie or CO trunks DID trunks cannot be accessed NOTE Do not use this trunk test call procedure to test ISDN PR...

Page 133: ...the port number are transmitted using end to end DTMF signaling therefore if the trunk being tested is a rotary trunk it will not be possible to break dial tone If the call does not go through that is...

Page 134: ...ice terminal user to a specific time slot located on the TDM Buses A or B or out of service time slots Specific Time Slots To place the call 1 Dial the Facility Test Call Feature Access Code administe...

Page 135: ...ouch Tone 2 770 Hz 007 263 Touch Tone 3 852Hz 008 264 Touch Tone 4 941 Hz 009 265 Touch Tone 5 1209 Hz 010 266 Touch Tone 6 1336Hz 011 267 Touch Tone 7 1447 Hz 012 268 Touch Tone 8 1633 Hz 013 269 Dia...

Page 136: ...ice 3 Repeat from Step 1 to alternate between out of service time slots on TDM Bus A and B System Tone Test Call The system tone test call connects the voice terminal user to a specific system tone To...

Page 137: ...one 07 Internal call waiting tone 08 Ringback tone 09 Special ringback tone 10 Dedicated ringback tone 11 Dedicated special ringback tone 12 Touch tone 1 13 Touch tone 2 14 Touch tone 3 15 Touch tone...

Page 138: ...confirmation 42 Zip tone 43 2804 Hz 44 1004 Hz 16db 45 1004 Hz 0 db 46 404 Hz 47 Transmission test sequence 105 48 Redirect tone 49 Voice signaling tone 50 Digital milliwatt 51 440 Hz 480 Hz 52 Music...

Page 139: ...connection of Tie Trunks back to back in the same switch to verify the operation of Tie Trunk ports The tests can be performed in either the E M or simplex modes 60 Restore music or silence 61 Warning...

Page 140: ...cuit packs 4 Insert the circuit pack back into the slot 5 Enter display trunk xx p command for each trunk group identified in Step 3 This command displays the specified trunk group on the administrati...

Page 141: ...play n Data Restriction n MIS Measured n Dial Access y Busy Threshold 60 Night Service Queue Length 0 Internal Alert n Incoming Destination Comm Type voice Auth Code n TRUNK PARAMETERS Trunk Type in o...

Page 142: ...another voice terminal using the Tie Trunk ports assigned Dial TAC and extension For example if TAC of Tie Trunk group is 110 and station number is 5012 then dial 110 5012 If the call cannot be made...

Page 143: ...M2 13 T3 T3 14 R3 R3 15 T13 16 R13 17 E3 18 M3 19 T4 T4 20 R4 R4 21 T14 22 R14 23 E4 24 M4 25 T5 26 R5 27 28 29 30 31 T6 32 R6 32 33 Table 5 6 Carrier Lead Appearances at 110 Cross Connect Field Cont...

Page 144: ...e Tie Trunk circuit pack to simplex mode 3 Enter add trunk n to add a new test trunk group Then enter Group Type tie TAC use trunk access code obtained from dial plan Trunk Type in out wink wink Port...

Page 145: ...ced back into normal operation The D Impact Tool AT 8762 is required to perform this step 6 Use jumper wires DT 24M Y BL R G and the D Impact Tool to connect wiring between the two ports assigned in S...

Page 146: ...connect is forced after 24 hours Test Type 105 provides 1 nine seconds of 1004 Hz at 16dB 2 one second of quiet 3 nine seconds of 404 Hz at 16dB 4 one second of quiet 5 nine seconds of 2804 Hz at 16dB...

Page 147: ...DS1 BD MO SECTION ARE THERE ALARMS OR ERRORS AGAINST PI BD PI PT PI SCI PI LINK OR ISDN LINK IF MULITPLE ALARMS EXIST INVESTIGATE IN FOLLOWING ORDER PI BD PI PT PI SCI PI LINK ISDN LINK FOLLOW REPAIR...

Page 148: ...HAS A SYNCHRONIZATION SOURCE BEEN SYSTEM SWITCHING IF PROBLEMS STILL EXIST THEN ESCALATE COMPARE INDICATED FACILITY TO RECORD OF PREVIOUS PROBLEMS ARE BIT ERRORS OCCURRING MORE FREQUENTLY THAN PREVIOU...

Page 149: ...s not the SAT START END YES A YES YES FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE IN THE PE BCHL MO SECTION FOLLOW REPAIR PROCEDURE RECOMMENDED BY THE PRI TERMINAL ADAPTER VENDOR OR ISDN ENDPOINT EQUIPMENT VENDOR Are the...

Page 150: ...face between the switch and the endpoint equipment including the premise distribution wiring endpoint equipment and any other noise producing equipment YES Are there bit errors over the DS1 interface...

Page 151: ...he long qualifier in order for the ISDN test call to run The repeat number can be any number from 1 through 99 default 1 The following information is displayed in response to the above commands Port T...

Page 152: ...l qualifier can also be used that specifies in minutes the duration of the test call If no duration is specified the default duration is used which is 8 4 or 9 6 seconds The qualifier minutes accepts...

Page 153: ...the same port network is available for testing regardless of whether the status information has been displayed For details on this command refer to the status isdn testcall command description in the...

Page 154: ...95 5 35 VDC 48 VDC 43 53 VDC neon message waiting voltage 80 VDC 165 VDC The type of cabinet determines where the circuit is placed to measure the voltages For single carrier cabinets all voltages ex...

Page 155: ...ESM to the Avaya DEFINITY Server Troubleshooting MMCH Before troubleshooting any problems associated with the DEFINITY MMCH always be sure that the endpoint is operating correctly audio video and data...

Page 156: ...ccur then 64 Kbps calls from the site are blocked Solution Administer the conference for connection at 56 Kbps Calls Terminate with No Audio Description To support endpoints that do not support Multip...

Page 157: ...nd then check the circuit packs for active yellow LEDs If any of these are unexpected such as on a VC board try replacing the board and then bringing the conference up again Calls Terminate with No Vi...

Page 158: ...to instability The Avaya Vistium also disconnects fairly infrequently Last the CLI Rembrandt II VP freezes video and waits for framing to be recovered Network Configuration Concerns with Synchronizati...

Page 159: ...ly noisy the DEFINITY MMCH may receive sufficient audio signal to conclude that there is a speaker present Use the Status Conference x form to determine if the MMCH thinks an endpoint is talking The M...

Page 160: ...lution If the audio is not muffled 1 Use the status conference command to determine which port on the TN788B VC board is connected to this endpoint 2 Check the VC TN788B board using the test board xxy...

Page 161: ...4kbps to 56 kbps operation on conferences that have the Rate Adaptation flag set to y When a downgrade does occur information on the Status Conference form indicates the success or failure of the 64kb...

Page 162: ...ervice Units or other external CSUs or earlier ICSUs Loopback Jack Installation Configurations Using a Smart Jack The preferred location of the loopback jack is at the interface to the Smart Jack This...

Page 163: ...n page 2 of the form change the supply CPE loopback jack power field to y NOTE Setting this field to y informs the technician that a loopback jack is present on the facility This allows a technician t...

Page 164: ...and change it to 0dB for testing Press Enter to implement the changes or press Cancel to change nothing 4 Enter test ds1 loop location cpe loopback jack This turns on simplex power to the loopback jac...

Page 165: ...ve Synchronized Y or N If y displays the DS1 circuit pack has synchronized to the looped 3 in 24 pattern and is accumulating a count of the bit errors detected in the pattern until the test has ended...

Page 166: ...he Smart Jack If the service provider successfully looped and tested the span up to the Smart Jack this condition isolates the problem to the wiring between the loopback jack and the Smart Jack Refer...

Page 167: ...der Test the short length of customer premises wiring section 2 in the following 3 figures between the loopback jack and the Smart Jack This can be done using a loopback that overlaps section 2 of the...

Page 168: ...rface at Smart Jack Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1 2 Span Section 2 3 Span Section 3 4 120A2 or later Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU 5 RJ 48 to Network Interface Up to 1000 Feet 305 m 6 Loopback...

Page 169: ...t Smart Jack Inaccessible Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1 2 Span Section 2 3 Span Section 3 4 120A2 or later Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU 5 RJ 48 to Network Interface Up to 1000 Feet 305 m 6 Loo...

Page 170: ...ble Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1 2 Span Section 2 3 Span Section 3 4 120A2 or later Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU 5 RJ 48 to Network Interface Up to 1000 Feet 305 m 6 Dumb Block Extended Demar...

Page 171: ...ee Figure 5 14 on page 5 67 and Figure 5 15 on page 5 68 1 ICSU to the loopback jack 2 Loopback jack to the Central Office CO Figure 5 14 Network Interface at Dumb Block Figure Notes 1 Span Section 1...

Page 172: ...emarcation point part of the loopback jack This is the only portion o f section 2 that is part of customer premises wiring but is not covered in the loopback jack s loopback path Figure Notes 1 Span S...

Page 173: ...begin The test is terminated by entering test ds1 loop location end loopback span test Bit error counts are examined as described in the DS1 Span Test section This test only isolates problems to secti...

Page 174: ...oblems to the wiring between the loopback jack and the MUX 2 Be aware that there are installations that use repeatered metallic lines between the MUX and the dumb block Theses lines require DC power f...

Page 175: ...rd on EPN 100ms on 100ms off Loss of signal on the OC 3 fiber Either the TN230X receive top or TN230X transmit bottom fibers are not working N S Fast blink Running DSP diagnostics or downloading code...

Page 176: ...ved This is not a normal state if the terminating port network is supposed to be up and running RX Green Intermittent blink ATM cells are being received intermittently This is a typical pattern for DE...

Page 177: ...are administering the A500 through a locally attached console is there a local console terminal connected to the console port on the A500 switch processor board with the correctly pinned RS232 serial...

Page 178: ...00 through a telnet connection over the Ethernet this works but it is worthwhile making sure the Ethernet address is correct A500 System Console c 1997 Avaya Inc login root password XXXXXX New System...

Page 179: ...the ATM address field have the customer or Avaya provided network prefix the first thirteen bytes and set by using modify atmprefix DEFINITY Administration Is ATM PNC administered correctly 1 Enter l...

Page 180: ...ch cabinet and carrier Verify that the TN230Xs are physically located in the slots indicated on the display Screen 5 11 on page 5 77 shows the output for display circuit packs 1 Screen 5 12 on page 5...

Page 181: ...RCUIT PACKS Cabinet 1 Carrier B Cabinet Layout five carrier Carrier Type port Slot Code Sfx Name Slot Code Sfx Name 00 11 TN464 C DS1 INTERFACE 01 12 TN464 F DS1 INTERFACE 02 TN2305 ATM PNC EI 13 TN76...

Page 182: ...isplay atm pnc 2 Administered with End System Identifiers If the port networks are addressed using End System Identifiers the display looks like Screen 5 15 on page 5 79 pnc 1 and Screen 5 16 on page...

Page 183: ...creen output for the show signaling summary command display atm pnc 1 ATM PNC Connection Number 1 A PNC Location 01B02 Name Address Format E 164 ATM Private AFI 45 E 164 0001013035381053 HO DSP 000000...

Page 184: ...ing End System Identifiers enter show signaling esi on the A500 console Screen 5 19 on page 5 81 shows the output Field Value IntType Network If User links will not come up between the PPN and the EPN...

Page 185: ...TM network can route from the PPN to the EPN which creates the bidirectional EAL and PACL signaling channels and one side of the talk path If an address or End System Identifier is missing or incorrec...

Page 186: ...ode A1 5 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A1 6 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A1 7 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A1 8 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 1 down down present STS_3c MultiM...

Page 187: ...ce alarm 3 Enter list configuration carrier cabinetcarrier on the DEFINITY SAT See Screen 5 21 on page 5 83 1b and Screen 5 22 on page 5 84 2a below Screen 5 21 List configuration carrier 1b screen li...

Page 188: ...board then either the board is in the incorrect slot or board insertion was not completed correctly list configuration carrier 2a SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Assigned Ports Number Board Type Code Vinta...

Page 189: ...ATM BCH ATM B Channel Trunk Possible Causes 1 The TN230X board is in a slot different from the DEFINITY administration 2 The TN230X did not complete board insertion test board 2a01 TEST RESULTS Port...

Page 190: ...ut Screen 5 25 A500 show signaling summary screen Ensure that the fields have the values indicated below 4 Enter show system interfaces on the A500 console Screen 5 26 on page 5 87 shows an example of...

Page 191: ...own present STS_3c MultiMode A2 2 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 3 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 4 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 5 down down present STS_3c MultiMode A2 6 down d...

Page 192: ...ceived so lack of a receive carrier could indicate a transmitter problem at the same end The A500 does not recognize that there is a port board in the slot It may be necessary to re administer the A50...

Page 193: ...increasing this may be because the port was administered with no UNI signaling admin link Use show signaling summary to ensure that Signaling is UNI3 1 The error counters may not be zero but should no...

Page 194: ...is UNI3 1 The Supported only for UNI 3 0 line for the SDP PDUs field means that the port was administered for UNI3 0 signaling admin link command Use the show signaling summary command to verify that...

Page 195: ...he port of interest If this field is not configured for UNI signaling then the port was administered for no UNI signaling admin link Use show signaling summary to verify that Signaling is UNI3 1 Conne...

Page 196: ...PN and to a TN230X on an EPN This is successful only if the links between the PPN and the EPN remain up so that the message from the EPN is logged Refer to ATM BCH ATM B Channel Trunk for detailed inf...

Page 197: ...pnc are incorrect 31 Normal unspecified This is a normal return 41 Temporary failure This try again later Cause Code has been observed when the source of the problem is on another port for example a r...

Page 198: ...ciated with DEFINITY port networks and may be signaling channels for other applications for example data network traffic CaPro Layer Are control channels being established from the PPN to the EPN Diag...

Page 199: ...A common use of VBRnrt circuits is multimedia and video conferencing systems Link Type Channel One PACL to each TN230X in either a PPN or an EPN and one EAL to each TN230X in an EPN State up list sys...

Page 200: ...from A1 1 to A1 2 and another from A1 2 to A1 1 These virtual circuits may persist beyond the duration of a phone call The DEFINITY Call Processing software saves virtual circuits for a few seconds a...

Page 201: ...utes End System Identifiers or Fiber between A and B side TN230Xs on an EPN Swapped Routes End System Identifiers or Fiber between two EPNs Incorrectly typed or omitted EPN Route or End System Identif...

Page 202: ...or physically to the PPN that should not exist Action 1 Correct the ATM addresses or swap fibers on the A500 between the incorrectly connected PPN and EPN Swapped Routes End System Identifiers or Fib...

Page 203: ...N230X on the EPN As normal it reboots this TN230X and when complete it resets the EPN When this happens the active instead of the standby TN230X reboots dropping the links To recover the PPN re establ...

Page 204: ...Routine Maintenance Procedures 555 233 123 5 100 Issue 4 May 2002...

Page 205: ...a high or critical reliability system has two control carriers the A control cabinet and the B control cabinet Since the circuit packs in the two SPEs are the same the SPEs have identical capabilitie...

Page 206: ...circuit pack detects faulty Packet Bus leads and instructs all Packet circuit packs for example ISDN BRI Packet Control or TN570 Expansion Interface to use up to three spare leads in place of defecti...

Page 207: ...ny failure that affects the ability of the active control channel or the tone time slots to function takes place the other bus becomes active for those time slots For more information see TDM BUS Main...

Page 208: ...andby manner with all inter PN calls set up on both fibers so that the active SPE can assume control without disruption of service Each fiber pair between port networks operates independently of the o...

Page 209: ...E This lead is known as the SPE Select lead Duplication Interface A controls another set of leads that indicate to the duplicated TN768 and TN780 8 Tone Clock circuit packs which of the two is current...

Page 210: ...f carrier B If the Duplication Interface A circuit pack becomes defective and carrier A becomes the Active SPE the terminal can be connected to the Maintenance Tape Processor in carrier A by connectin...

Page 211: ...indicate the position of the SPE Select switches Emergency Transfer leads indicate whether Emergency Transfer is on or off in the PPN cabinet Other leads combine the INADS CDR and the Customer Provid...

Page 212: ...ndependent buses called bus A and bus B The first five time slots of both buses are reserved for communication between the SPE and port circuit packs These time slots are known as the control channel...

Page 213: ...ne of the spare leads in place of the defective lead Additionally the circuit pack can recover up to three Packet Bus lead failures by this mechanism This provides high availability by decreasing the...

Page 214: ...Common Shadow Circuitry and Standby SPE Memory are tested and maintained individually the integrity of the entire logical connection is also tested and maintained to make sure that the shadowing mech...

Page 215: ...on the severity of the Active SPE fault s In Busyout Mode the Standby SPE is busied out by the busyout SPE standby command Only system technician requested activities are carried out on the Standby S...

Page 216: ...here are six conditions under which an SPE interchange is initiated Upgrade Software Type upgrade software to upgrade the software on a High or Critical Reliability system reboot the Standby SPE from...

Page 217: ...ce An SPE interchange can be requested as a part of scheduled maintenance This mechanism is used to exercise both SPEs An SPE interchange can be requested as part of scheduled maintenance by issuing t...

Page 218: ...ndby mode when the alarm occurs a Hot SPE Interchange occurs If the Standby is in Maintenance mode when the alarm occurs however a Warm SPE Interchange rather than a Hot SPE Interchange occurs MEMORY...

Page 219: ...standby alarms use the standby refresh command to put the standby SPE into the standby mode Verify the results by using the status system 1 command For more information about the status system command...

Page 220: ...o that it is clearly understood The refresh spe standby command is used to immediately put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode The command conducts the same activities regardless of whether the Standby...

Page 221: ...on save was to have been conducted the save translation command should be issued to ensure that the current translation data has been written to the Active SPE and Standby SPE tapes or Memory Cards Wh...

Page 222: ...nd displays the Tone Clock circuit pack that is currently supplying tones and clocks among other information The test tone clock 1 2 3 a b short long command tests the specified TN768 Tone Clock circu...

Page 223: ...Emergency Transfer LED Duplication Interface Circuit Pack PICP B carrier TN772 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack DICP A carrier TN772 Yellow Green Red Meaning On Off Active mode On On Active mode Ma...

Page 224: ...en both SPE Select Switches are in the position In the latter two cases the Active SPE is automatically selected by the system software Processor Interface Circuit Pack TN765 Network Control Circuit P...

Page 225: ...ection provides procedures for performing an SPE interchange to place the circuit packs in the Standby SPE mode SPE circuit packs should never be replaced while they are located in the Active SPE Use...

Page 226: ...the upper left corner of the form to determine which SPE A or B is the Active SPE it is labeled as active The other SPE is the Standby SPE and is labeled as either standby maint or down Follow the Cir...

Page 227: ...ect the Standby SPE this will result in a COLD 2 restart of the system 4 If the upgrade software reset system interchange command is successful an SPE interchange results in the new Active SPE perform...

Page 228: ...andby SPE as follows 1 Issue the status system command from the terminal Look at the SPE and MODE fields in the upper left corner of the form to determine the status of the Standby SPE Recall that the...

Page 229: ...Throw the SPE Select Switches one at a time to force selection of the current Active SPE If SPE B is currently the Active SPE throw both SPE Select Switches one at a time to the SPE A position If SPE...

Page 230: ...EM CLOCK and SYSTEM TONES fields are now in and active Proceed to Step 4 NOTE If the 1B Tone Clock circuit pack is defective the switch may have failed and a reset system 2 may have occurred In this c...

Page 231: ...configuration software versions command If the software matches and the UPDATE FILE Identifier displays none continue with this procedure Replace the translation card in the Active SPE b Insert the g...

Page 232: ...t step CAUTION If the Duplication Interface circuit pack is being tested Test 278 fails because the SPE Select Switches are thrown 8 Issue the busyout spe standby command followed by the release spe s...

Page 233: ...eempted using the refresh spe standby command To preempt the maintenance activity continue issuing the refresh spe standby command followed by status system 1 command until the status system form show...

Page 234: ...enance documentation in Chapter 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures as appropriate If any of these circuit packs are located in the Standby SPE force the Standby SPE to become the Active SPE as de...

Page 235: ...SPE time to become active Throw the SPE select switches to force an SPE interchange Exchange the active SPE and STANDBY SPE memory cards or tapes Exchange the active SPE and STANDBY SPE memory cards o...

Page 236: ...D section of the maintenance manual 555 204 105 Issue the set tone 1b command to make it active Throw new DUPINTs SPE select switch to hard select the active SPE YES YES YES NO NO NO Is the defective...

Page 237: ...ked after repeated tries use the busyout spe standby and release spe standby com m ands and try again Replace processor circuit pack do not rem ove SPE power Replace software m em ory card with transl...

Page 238: ...ulling on the cable itself can damage the cable to connector interface 3 Pull the cable straight out Pulling the connector from the backplane at an angle can bend the backplane pins 4 Push the ICC con...

Page 239: ...es to the right If SPE A is currently the Active SPE throw both SPE Select Switches to the left 2 Issue status system 1st cabinet from the G3MT terminal The status system form indicates the presence o...

Page 240: ...ied by issuing status system and noting whether the Standby SPE is labeled as standby Although not recommended at this stage of the procedure the maintenance activity on the Standby SPE can be preempt...

Page 241: ...ocated on the attendant console on all circuit packs in the switch cabinets and optionally on customer designated voice terminals The following LEDS are included in the system Processor and Maintenanc...

Page 242: ...e pr awu alm Auto Wakeup Journal Printer Alarm the automatic wakeup journal printer has a Major Minor or Warning alarm active off bd alar m DS1 or ATM Facility Alarm an off board Major Minor or Warnin...

Page 243: ...means that the Standby Switch Processing Element SPE is not refreshed that is it is in Maintenance or Down Mode NOTE On the Maintenance circuit pack the green LED may blink very faintly once per seco...

Page 244: ...tion see Figure 7 2 on page 7 5 This means that the system controls which SPE is active However there will be times during maintenance activity for example when you the technician may choose to manual...

Page 245: ...eturn control of the SPE selection to the system return the SPE Select switches on both Duplication Interface circuit packs to the AUTO position one at a time to avoid accidentally selecting the other...

Page 246: ...f the system is unable to report the alarm to INADS the LED flashes signaling the attendant to call INADS and report the alarm Cabinet power unit LEDs For a description of Cabinet Power Unit LEDs refe...

Page 247: ...initializing the circuit pack If after 5 minutes the circuit pack still has not initialized communications with the system check the MO for any special instructions for example EPN Maintenance circuit...

Page 248: ...n tests and light both the red and green LEDs during that testing During the various states of operation start up testing normal operation circuit failure and so forth circuit pack status LED indicati...

Page 249: ...andby SPE Memory Lit during system initialization stays lit until Emergency Transfer is turned off Lit steady on the Active SPE and off during normal operation on the Standby SPE Packet Control Lit wh...

Page 250: ...LED Interpretation 555 233 123 7 10 Issue 4 May 2002...

Page 251: ...nformation found in Chapter 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures The information consists of using the maintenance commands as trouble clearing aids The maintenance commands are used to control tes...

Page 252: ...circuit 1 to 6 The responses display on a test by test basis with one line of data for each test result Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions busyout acces...

Page 253: ...t The release access endpoint command returns all the ports associated with the specified access endpoint to operation WARNING This command is service disrupting and may cause extraneous alarms Port P...

Page 254: ...e Name The name of maintenance object Alt Name Alternate way to identify maintenance objects If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx yyy xxx trunk group yyy member private CO l...

Page 255: ...t inads craft nms Primary None Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit 1 primary 2 secondary link Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt Name Alternate way to identify maintenance...

Page 256: ...eturns the specified data module or data channel to operation On duplicated systems a busyout of a Network Control Data Channel DATA CHL or a Processor Interface Port Data Channels PI PT are preserved...

Page 257: ...ink A controller protocol is usually a transient process that exists for as long as the link is up A link is considered up if a physical connection is established A link can be considered to be up whi...

Page 258: ...shows the output for busyout journal printer wakeup log Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Default Feature Interactions busyout journal printer pms log wakeup log...

Page 259: ...ommand The responses display on a test by test basis with one line of data for each test result Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions bu...

Page 260: ...ing example shows the output from the busyout mis command The responses display on a test by test basis with one line of data for each test result Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier...

Page 261: ...n be busied out by specifying the modem pool group number Warning alarms error type 18 are generated on each busied out maintenance object so that INADS can determine the state of the objects Use rele...

Page 262: ...l complex is busied out all connectivity across the Packet Bus is severed Thus all ISDN BRI point to point signaling links that have been established through the active packet control are torn down by...

Page 263: ...18 are generated on each busied out maintenance object so that INADS can determine the state of the objects The release pms link command reactivates the busied out objects on the link These links pro...

Page 264: ...link with the busyout command and the link remains intact If the link is already down the busyout command stops periodic re setup attempts on the link Output The following example is a display of the...

Page 265: ...d Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions busyout port location Port location PPsspp Examples busyout port 01c1101 busyout port 02c1501 in...

Page 266: ...e switch attempts to negotiate with the far end PRI terminal adapter to reactivate each PRI endpoint port B channel Output Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interac...

Page 267: ...system printer extension and setting up a call to the system printer The following is an example of the results of busyout sp link For more information see Busyout and Release Port Port address cabin...

Page 268: ...nd scheduled testing cannot start on the standby SPE while it is busied out The busyout state of the standby SPE and the STBY SPE Warning alarm are maintained across a reset system 1 Warm restart and...

Page 269: ...ect so that INADS can determine the state of the objects The command release station reactivates the specified voice terminal extension Port Standby SPE cabinet and carrier location 01A or 01B Mainten...

Page 270: ...ier slot circuit Maintenance Name Type of busied out maintenance object Alt Name Extension Result Test result Pass Fail Abort Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted Refer...

Page 271: ...ier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions busyout tdm pn number bus pn number TDM bus Port Network number bus a or b specifies desired half of TDM bus Each 512 time slot TDM bus c...

Page 272: ...ed tone clock Output The following example is a display of the busyout tone clock command Port Port address and associated TDM number and bus PNA or PNB Alt Name Not applicable Maintenance Name Type o...

Page 273: ...ed on each busied out maintenance object so that INADS can access the state of the objects The release trunk command reactivates the specified trunk group or group member NOTE If the user enters busyo...

Page 274: ...ay to identify maintenance objects If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx yyy xxx trunk group yyy member private CO line P xxx xxx private CO line group number Result Test res...

Page 275: ...if the test hardware group command is canceled Status Hardware group The status hardware group command displays the state of a canceled test hardware group command as canceled change circuit packs Thi...

Page 276: ...12 02 TN767 B DS1 INTERFACE 13 03 14 04 15 05 16 06 07 08 TN556 BRI LINE 09 TN754 DIGITAL LINE 10 TN769 ANALOG LINE indicates circuit pack conflict change circuit packs 1 Page 2 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cab...

Page 277: ...TN742 ANALOG LINE 06 TN767 DS1 INTERFACE 17 TN556 BRI LINE 07 TN742 ANALOG LINE 18 TN742 ANALOG LINE 08 TN762 B HYBRID LINE 19 09 TN742 ANALOG LINE 20 TN754 DIGITAL LINE 10 indicates circuit pack conf...

Page 278: ...0 21 Code Circuit pack code TN number to identify the circuit pack type Sfx Lists the suffix if applicable Name Alphanumeric circuit pack name change circuit packs 1 Page 5 of 5 CIRCUIT PACKS Cabinet...

Page 279: ...___ __ __ Target Target Target Target Target Location Location Location Location Location 1 _____ 11 _____ 21 _____ 31 _____ 41 _____ 2 _____ 12 _____ 22 _____ 32 _____ 42 _____ 3 _____ 13 _____ 23 __...

Page 280: ...at some future time If n is entered the download will commence when the form is successfully submitted If y is entered the Start Date Time and Stop Date Time fields are displayed to schedule the down...

Page 281: ...Direct IP IP Audio Connections n Codec Set 1 IP Audio Hairpinning y Location 3 UDP Port Range RTCP Enabled y Min 2048 RTCP Monitor Server Parameters Max 65535 Use Default Server Parameters n Server I...

Page 282: ...output example shows the output for the change synchronization command 3 was entered in the stratum field Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions change syn...

Page 283: ...synchronization selected Location Circuit pack location of all administered DS1 circuit packs port network carrier and board slot Name User defined name for the DS1 circuit pack blank no user defined...

Page 284: ...maintenance must remain idle during a maintenance procedure set the Start Time field to a time after the session ends If daily Scheduled Maintenance is running and needs to be deactivated set the Sto...

Page 285: ...e number For example INADS or DEFINITY SNMP The number must be obtained from the National Customer Support Center NCSC or the TSC and are not allowed in the telephone number Abbrev Alarm Report Enable...

Page 286: ...e resolved Activate Alarm Origination to enable Cleared Alarm Notification n Restart Notification Enables the switch to originate calls to the OSS and report any system restarts caused by switch probl...

Page 287: ...control circuit pack is installed If a Packet Control circuit pack is not installed in the system a major alarm is raised against the PKT CTRL MO Change this field to no if no packet endpoints are ad...

Page 288: ...ve duplicated SPEs daily days of the week or no prevents automatic saves Control Channel Interchange Each port network has a pair of TDM busses A and B Each has a set of time slots dedicated to the co...

Page 289: ...ch have 8 TTRs To alarm the first occurrence of a TTR being taken out of service set this field to the total number of TTRs in the switch Minimum Threshold for CPTRs When the number of call progress t...

Page 290: ...lope and C message and C notch noise by sending nine seconds of 1004 Hz at 16dB one second of quiet nine seconds of 404 Hz at 16dB one second of quiet nine seconds of 2804 Hz at 16dB 30 seconds of qui...

Page 291: ...apter 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures SPE Optional Boards These fields indicate if a Disk circuit pack is present and identifies administered Packet Interface slots If a Packet Interface circuit pack...

Page 292: ...nk Timeslot Pt1 The number of timeslots to be used for port 10 on the Inter Board Link Displays only if switch model type is csi and the Packet Intf2 field is y Enter the number of timeslots 1 3 to be...

Page 293: ...e internal or external Modem Name This field is 20 characters long and will permit alpha numeric characters to provide a unique qualifier for a given modem RTS CTS Enabled This field will inform the m...

Page 294: ...V 42 MNP Buffer mode first attempts to negotiate V 42 error control with the remote modem If this fails then the modem transitions to MNP and if this fails then no error control is used Misc Init Para...

Page 295: ...fairly standard command D No Answer Time Out Most off the shelf external modems provide a timer that abandons any outbound data call after a predetermined interval Some modems provide for this timer...

Page 296: ...audits executed clear errors This command moves errors and resolved alarms to the cleared error list making room for new incoming error messages but it does not clear active alarms from the alarm log...

Page 297: ...progress Once a running test call is cleared another can begin Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions clear interface location Processor interface address...

Page 298: ...command helps resolve packet bus problems by sending a clear stimuli message over the packet bus Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions clear link link id L...

Page 299: ...eraction with routine periodic or scheduled maintenance exists The flash checksum test acts as a backup check to ensure entire field update files are applied correctly When the flash Checksum Test fai...

Page 300: ...stered connections disable filesystem board ppcss disable filesystem board ppcss This command requests the board ppcss to remove the memory filesystem This command will fail if there are any files pre...

Page 301: ...le mst command has no effect on the system if the trace is already disabled To view the results of the trace enter the list mst command disable suspend alm orig This command stops entries from the act...

Page 302: ...number command Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions disable synchronization switch init inads craft none none Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Descriptio...

Page 303: ...oblem was corrected The system handles any errors associated with the alarms as resolved System Reboots and the Alarm Logs The system saves the alarm and error logs to the active SPE memory card if an...

Page 304: ...ms to show the options screen and select the options you want to view on the report The figure below is an example of the options screen for Alarm Reports Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description...

Page 305: ...le 01A20 Port Port address PCSSpp example 01A2031 Category Object code for the equipment category Press HELP in this field to view a list of the object codes Extension Extension number per dial plan T...

Page 306: ...link number PNC side Example x A PNC X fiber link number and A PNC side A or B Maintenance Name Lists the logical name of the maintenance object with the alarm On Brd A y yes indicates the fault was f...

Page 307: ...ings 1 and 2 identify the first and second OSS telephone numbers respectively The entries below indicate the acknowledged alarm state Y yes alarm has been acknowledged N no alarm has not been acknowle...

Page 308: ...ion of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen 1...

Page 309: ...m Room where cabinet is located administered on the cabinet form Floor Floor where cabinet is located administered on the cabinet form Building Building where cabinet is located administered on the ca...

Page 310: ...heduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed is sent to the system printe...

Page 311: ...lists For more information see Administrator s Guide for Avaya MultiVantage Software Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI Active Controlling Associations The number of station domain controls th...

Page 312: ...antage Software Basic Call Management System BCMS Measured Agents Per System The number of agents the Basic Call Management System BCMS is measuring Measured Splits Skills The number of hunt groups BC...

Page 313: ...rompting Vector Directory Numbers The number of system VDNs For more information see DEFINITY Call Vectoring Expert Agent Selection Vectors Per System The number of vectors per system For more informa...

Page 314: ...dant This includes but is not limited to PCOL groups common shared extensions access endpoints administered TSCs code calling IDs VDNs LDNs hunt groups announcements and TEGs UDP Extension Records The...

Page 315: ...queue positions Queue Status Buttons The number of hunt group queue status buttons administered on stations There are four types of queue status buttons attendants use the last two queue status butto...

Page 316: ...r the system s analog announcements Maximum VAL Boards Indicates the maximum number of VAL integrated announcement circuit packs allowed in this system Temporary Signaling Connections TSC Administered...

Page 317: ...inistered buttons Station Records The number of resources being used by regular stations announcements and music on hold Stations includes BRI Stations The number of voice terminals Stations With Port...

Page 318: ...ations available to move using ACTR ISDN BRI Endpoint and Trunk Ports The number of ISDN BRI ports IP Trunks included in Trunk ports The number of administered IP trunks Remote Office Trunks included...

Page 319: ...tion Counts IP Stations The number of IP stations currently registered in the system Remote Office Stations The total number of remote office stations currently registered in the system Page 9 CURRENT...

Page 320: ...tform Offer Category The system s offer category Last Translation Loaded Information Software Load The software load translations saved before upgrade or reboot Can also be unknown no trans if no flas...

Page 321: ...k n for more details Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions display communication i nterface hop channels links processor channel print schedule See above S...

Page 322: ...smission facility to another endpoint such as a DCS node or AUDIX The link carries application messages between the SPE and other switches or adjuncts Link Channel A Identifies the first of the two li...

Page 323: ...tocol for this link bx 25 Processor Interface and X 25 ppp ethernet Destination Number Destination of the link as administered on the data module forms Processor Interface X 25 and PPP DTE DCE Process...

Page 324: ...GNMENT Proc Gtwy Interface Destination Session Mach Chan Enable Appl To Mode Link Chan Node Port Local Remote ID 1 _ ________ ___ _ __ _____ _________ 0____ ___ ___ __ 2 _ ________ ___ _ __ _____ ____...

Page 325: ...e of interface link is x 25 r model or procr intf si model This field cannot be blank if the type of interface link is ethernet or ppp Valid entries are client server or blank Interface Link Identifie...

Page 326: ...ion Logins Defaults Feature Interactions display disabled tests print schedule Report sent to printer Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The...

Page 327: ...after having been on battery backup The attempt to save the alarm and error logs may be unsuccessful if the MSS is not available Whenever the system reboots the logs are restored from the SPE disk tha...

Page 328: ...he command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer instead of the screen 1 Examples...

Page 329: ...me of the existing error records in the log To Enter 2 digit numbers for the month day year Example 01 01 97 The default is the current date Cabinet Enter 1 2 or 3 the administered number Port Network...

Page 330: ...Example PN 02B PN 02 Port Network PN number and A or B bus Maintenance Name The name of the maintenance object Alt Name Identifies the location of maintenance object as follows Station extension numbe...

Page 331: ...the high resolution line option is used of the most recent error If the system is unable to retrieve the time of day when the error occurred a dummy date is stamped in the log and appears as 00 00 01...

Page 332: ...ommand allows you to diagnose and correct vectoring problems due to the above mentioned causes See DEFINITY Communications System Generic 3 Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection EAS Guide 555 230...

Page 333: ...od Enter the first letter of one of the following selections all month day hour minute Start Stop Time Start and end times of the interval to be reported in 24 hour notation Vector Number Vector numbe...

Page 334: ...rther explanation of the condition and the type of data in the Event 1 and Event 2 fields Event Type The event identification number that points to a specific piece of software code see Table 8 2 Even...

Page 335: ...H323 UserObj undef Registration rejected because there is no H323 User Object 0 IP address 1911 IP RRJ Exceed max endpts Registration rejected because the capacity for either registered endpoints or...

Page 336: ...ld H225 NSData Registration rejected cannot decode H225 non standard data NSD message 0 IP address 1919 IP RRJ Bad H225 NSDchoice Registration rejected unexpected NSD message received from registering...

Page 337: ...ered password on the station screen do not match UID IP address 1927 IP RRJ Invld station type Registration rejected invalid set type no Remote Office or IP Softphone administration on the station scr...

Page 338: ...registered UID IP address 1935 IP RRJ Not Remote Ofc ext Registration rejected Remote Office is not administered for this extension on the station screen UID IP address 1936 IP RRJ Invld RO anlg stn...

Page 339: ...ess 1948 IP RRJ Complete pend reg Registration rejected failure to obtain a station user record internal software error corrupt translation UID IP address 1949 IP RRJ Build KARCF msg Registration reje...

Page 340: ...ate for example TTI is not enabled for voice TTI state IP address 1958 IP GRJ Invalid extension Gatekeeper request rejected extension is not administered Either extension number or 0 IP address 1959 I...

Page 341: ...ress 1969 IP BRJ Bld BCF Gatewy MCU Bandwidth Request rejected failure to build a Bandwidth Request Confirm BCF message for a Gateway or MCU internal software error UID IP address 1970 IP BRJ Endpt no...

Page 342: ...dress 1982 IP ARJ No H323 user Admission Request rejected H 323 user object does not exist internal software error UID IP address 1983 IP ARJ CRV already in use Admission Request rejected call referen...

Page 343: ...Can t decode NSD Unregistration Request rejected failure to decode non standard data NSD in the URQ UID IP address 1996 IP URJ Unexpected NSD msg Unregistration Request rejected unexpected non standa...

Page 344: ...stration Request Received a KeepAlive RRQ from a dual connect endpoint whose H 323 extension is not registered cannot make calls Re register the endpoint UID IP address 2007 IP FURQ User no sig conn F...

Page 345: ...s 2013 IP FURQ SigGrp removed Force Unregistration Request An H 323 Gateway administered as a signalling group is registered Unregister the Gateway before removing the administered signalling group Ga...

Page 346: ...ion Data 1 Data 2 Occur Occur Cnt 1012 Destination Unavailable 71 5A 01 09 09 44 01 09 09 54 8 1012 Destination Unavailable 65 22 01 09 09 45 01 09 09 45 1 1012 Destination Unavailable 6E 2D 01 09 09...

Page 347: ...wnload Whenever the processor resets and the system is restarted whether initiated by a technician command or by system software information about the recovery is stored If the reset is escalated only...

Page 348: ...recorded to the initcauses buffer in chronological order This buffer fills an entire screen with information if it is completely full Power failures in the processor complex wipe out the entire initc...

Page 349: ...Sanity Timer Reset 1 no 1B 08 02 6 03 Sanity Timer Reset 1 no 1B 08 02 6 08 Sanity Timer Reset 2 yes 1B 08 02 6 14 Scheduled Interchange i no 1A 08 03 2 33 Bad Handshake 1 no 1B 08 04 2 34 Software R...

Page 350: ...erchange to the Standby SPE If this initcause triggers an SPE interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode the previous entry in the log may actually represent a restart that occurred on th...

Page 351: ...lly represent a restart that occurred on the Standby SPE See the preceding description of display initcauses for a complete explanation If a High or Critical Reliability System does a PEI with a warm...

Page 352: ...nge took place that made the Standby SPE the Active SPE If this initcause triggers an SPE interchange when the Standby is NOT in Maintenance mode the previous entry in the log may actually represent a...

Page 353: ...ause occurs when ini 1 is executed from the Flash Monitor This initcause can occur only in systems with SBB Level of Restart Reboot no escalation Bad GDT For Development Environment Only This initcaus...

Page 354: ...y memory configuration long print schedule Displays the standby SPE Flash ROM and DRAM configuration Report sent to printer Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule executi...

Page 355: ...s command displays a list of the administered node names Output The following example shows the output from display node names Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Int...

Page 356: ...18 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 3 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 19 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 4 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 20 _______________ ___ ___ ___ ___ 5 _______________ ___ ___...

Page 357: ...or switch Enter 0 255 or leave blank Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions display port location print schedule Port address PCSSpp Report sent to printer...

Page 358: ...ier slot circuit Equipment Type Hardware that is physically connected to the specified port Identification Depends on the hardware that is physically connected to the port If hardware is The field con...

Page 359: ...circuit pack administration form Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions display synchronization print schedule Report sent to printer Command is validated a...

Page 360: ...rrier slot of all administered DS1 circuit packs are listed here Name User defined name administered for the DS1 circuit pack Blank means no user defined name administered Slip If the DS1 circuit pack...

Page 361: ...ed switch node interfaces SNI to SNI fiber links are automatically duplicated NOTE The PNC Duplication field must be enabled on the customer options form before you can do any duplication administrati...

Page 362: ...ualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions display system parameters maintenance print schedule Report sent to printer Command is validated a scheduling form appears to schedu...

Page 363: ...tivated n Customer Access to INADS Port n Repeat Dial Interval mins 7 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Start Time 22 00 Stop Time 04 00 Daily Maintenance daily Save Translation daily Control Channel Interchange...

Page 364: ...port Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the first OSS y Second OSS Telephone Number Second telephone number that the switch dials to report alarms must be obtained from the National Cust...

Page 365: ...l be activated in the administration Cleared Alarm Notification Enables the switch to originate a call to the OSS and send an alarm resolution message whenever all previously reported Major and Minor...

Page 366: ...l circuit pack is not installed in the system then a major alarm is raised against the PKT CTRL MO This field can only be changed from yes to no if there are no packet endpoints administered thus ensu...

Page 367: ...one of the two busses This field indicates on which days the control channel in each port network will be switched from one of the paired TDM busses to the other Valid entries are daily days of the w...

Page 368: ...rts CLSFY PTs in service falls below this number a WARNING alarm is raised against TTR LEV Valid entries are 1 to 200 There are 8 ports on each TN744 or TN2182 circuit pack To alarm the first occurren...

Page 369: ...on a call by call basis by dialing a test call extension specified on the second page of the System Parameters Maintenance form No special hardware is required When the test call extension is receive...

Page 370: ...at field is allowed If the system is equipped with duplicated SPEs a Packet Interface field is y when either SPE carrier contains a Packet Interface circuit pack in the corresponding position If a Pac...

Page 371: ...odem If this fails then the modem transitions to MNP and if this fails then no error control is used Misc Init Param This field supports any initialization parameters that are not already specified Th...

Page 372: ...y denotes the dialing command of the modem This is a fairly standard command D No Answer Time Out Most off the shelf external modems provide a timer that abandons any outbound data call after a predet...

Page 373: ...sted from the same schedule Page 1 of 1 ATMS TRUNK TEST SCHEDULE Schedule No __ Schedule Time __ __ Schedule Test Days Interval __ Schedule Date __ __ __ SU _ TU _ TH _ SA _ Duration __ OTL Throttle _...

Page 374: ...the full test but skips all self test and return loss sequences This saves about 40 seconds on the type 105 test and does not have any effect on type 100 or 102 tests Duration The maximum number of ho...

Page 375: ...y time display time print display time schedule 1 Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details init inads craft cust browse none Date and time are generally...

Page 376: ...s received by the switch The link level of XMODEM provide error detection and retransmission Additional protection is provided within the application level After the entire file has been written to ta...

Page 377: ...lls to each duplicated switch Put a delay into the scripts causing the scripts to wait a period of time after downloading the file and before issuing the reset This requires only one call but the amou...

Page 378: ...tion software command can be used to display the status of the patch file Recovery procedures In the event of a failure encountered during the download and application of the update file follow the re...

Page 379: ...xtremely odd switch behavior followed by SPE down mode if you re not The problem is that the LMM cannot complete the programming of memory with the result that memory is in a corrupted state The only...

Page 380: ...updated patch identifier and no update file and the other looks as if the patch file is still present no patch identifier and valid update file the application of the patch can be forced by making tha...

Page 381: ...ate a filesystem of size KB If the optional size parameter is not given the maximum available is used If more than 32K is not available an error message is given This command fails if the filesystem i...

Page 382: ...ff only on and off board specifications of an active entry replaces the active entry in the Suspend Alarm Origination table This command may be particularly useful for Improved control over customer r...

Page 383: ...alifiers Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions enable suspend alm orig board port location off board o nly expires in hrs Physical location of the hardware optional if not specifi...

Page 384: ...eature Interactions enable test number number The test number to re enable Example enable test number 102 init inads craft none display disabled tests gives a list of all disabled tests Action Object...

Page 385: ...ksum Cyclic Redundancy Check data integrity algorithm Active Image Yes in this field indicates the active firmware image file No in this field indicates the inactive firmware image file To change the...

Page 386: ...roper level is performed regardless of whether the core is actually dumped Auto Negotiation Yes means that the system automatically negotiates the highest possible network speed No means that the Spee...

Page 387: ...significant bit warm start cold 2 restart cold 1 restart reboot A value of 0 indicates that the vector is cleared or not set See Table 8 3 on page 8 137 Table 8 3 Vector Condition Mapping value warm...

Page 388: ...ther a duplex or simplex SPE system this field is blank Core Dump Time The time of the core dump for SPE A and SPE B If the system has a simplex SPE a timestamp for SPE A or the active SPE and non dup...

Page 389: ...ons list configuration hardware group print schedule Enter a group listed in the Hardware Groups section below Report sent to printer Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedu...

Page 390: ...rcuit packs in the control complex ds1 Displays all the DS1 TN722 TN767 and TN464 port circuit packs administered and or physically inserted port network pn Displays all circuit packs located in a spe...

Page 391: ...at is physically installed no link The T1 link is down to a DS1 circuit pack list configuration all Page 1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Board Assigned Ports Number Board Type Code Vintage u unassigned t tti p...

Page 392: ...stered CSU MOD Displays only when list configuration ds1 option is selected The field contains the identification number of the Integrated CSU module present on the DS1 circuit pack TN767E or later TN...

Page 393: ...the active hardware by querying the individual circuit packs each time the command is invoked There is no memory cache of serial numbers Valid entries Usage Circuit pack serial number This field disp...

Page 394: ...d the relevant fields display no tape or memory card This does not indicate that the system does not recognize the presence of the device Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Feature I...

Page 395: ...Memory Resident Version number of the RAM resident load module Mem Card Resident Version of memory card resident load module If a memory card is not installed this field will display no card Update i...

Page 396: ...lated to the Processor Interface PI circuit pack resident copy and corresponding tape file firmware PI 1 Resident The version of firmware in the first PI circuit pack in the control carrier PI 2 Resid...

Page 397: ...his list none in memory no update has been applied to memory immediate partially applied an error condition that is valid only when an update that is in the process of being applied fails Check the va...

Page 398: ...y resident identifier has been completely applied to memory list directory list directory board ppcss This command lists all files in the path directory of the ppcss board memory filesystem NOTE The f...

Page 399: ...Os schedule 1 Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details init inads none none Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object or group of maintenance objec...

Page 400: ...d This time stamp is noted when translation is loaded from the memory card and included in all recent change history reports When a user requests a recent change history report there could be other us...

Page 401: ...history Page 1 HISTORY Date of Loaded Translation 10 08pm Wed Feb 14 2001 Date Time Port Login Actn Object Qualifier 2 18 12 34 1A0301 tti m cha station 4000 2 18 12 23 1B0401 psa a cha station 4003...

Page 402: ...ard Location Example list ip route board 01A03 init inads craft none none Route Number IP route number Destination Node Destination of the route This name is administered on the Node Name form Default...

Page 403: ...ode field Accepted by CLAN Indicates whether a C LAN circuit pack has accepted the administered IP route Routes for a link are downloaded to the C LAN circuit pack when the link comes into service Pos...

Page 404: ...inter instead of the screen 1 Examples list isdn testcall list isdn testcall print list isdn testcall schedule 1 Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more details...

Page 405: ...stem printer instead of the screen 1 Examples list marked ports list marked ports print list marked ports schedule 1 Refer to the Report Scheduler and System Printer feature specification for more det...

Page 406: ...ns If the data cannot be retrieved for the 15 minute interval N A appears in the field The delta the change from the last inquiry and the total are provided for each error count After the occurrence o...

Page 407: ...ce of an N A the delta equals the total Busyout or release of a board or a port the reset board command and reseating the board all clear the firmware counters Delta The difference between the current...

Page 408: ...at the measures if the trouble cleared Data is retrieved for 15 minute intervals for 24 hours for CRC Invalid Frame and Chap Failures for PPP connections If the data cannot be retrieved for the 15 min...

Page 409: ...oard or a port reset board and reseating the board all clear the firmware counters Delta The difference between the current and the previous sample Invalid Frame The number of invalid misaligned frame...

Page 410: ...ect Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Default Feature Interactions list measurements clan sockets hourly CCccss Lists the measurements for the last 24 hours from current hour backwards for the in...

Page 411: ...peg Total number of times a C lan socket on the board was needed for a call or link but was not available Range 0 65535 Denials Socket Denial peg Socket Denial peg Socket peg Range 0 99 Time ASB The p...

Page 412: ...summary yesterday peak Page 1 Switch Name Date 5 27 pm WED MAR 26 1992 CLAN SOCKETS PEAK REPORT Peak Hour 0400 Socket Socket Meas Avail Usage Socket Denial Time Hour Board Region Sockets Erl peg peg D...

Page 413: ...t Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions list measure ments log summary ds1_location print schedule Detailed report generated Summary report generated The physical locati...

Page 414: ...is invalid Bursty Err Secs the value of the bursty errored seconds counter for the specified 15 minute interval 0 900 or N A if data for the 15 minute interval is invalid Severely Err Secs the value...

Page 415: ...id Counted Since The start time and date when the associated measurement counters were cleared or the DS1 circuit pack was administered DATE The date of the 15 minute interval TIME The time of the 15...

Page 416: ...es whether the data for the specified 15 minute interval is valid Data is considered valid when a count for that 15 minute interval If the field has a value of y the data for the four error categories...

Page 417: ...the measurements for the last 24 hours from current hour backwards for the indicated region If the switch clock is changed the report shows stars as on R8 Examples Sample IP Codec Hourly Output For R...

Page 418: ...ime that the voice channels are on a call Use is measured from the time the voice channel is allocated until it is released Calculated by Total Call Seconds 3600 where Total Call Seconds is a sum of t...

Page 419: ...easured from the time the voice channel is allocated until it is released Calculated by Total Call Seconds 3600 where Total Call Seconds is a sum of the following total time in seconds that a G 723 or...

Page 420: ...n compare the above report with the lines of the list measurements trunk group and list performance trunk group and list measurements outage trunk and monitor traffic trunk groups reports which corres...

Page 421: ...Lists the measurements for the last 24 hours from current hour backwards for the indicated region If the switch clock is changed the report shows stars as do other reports on R8 Examples command x non...

Page 422: ...udes time that the voice channels are on a call Use is measured from the time the voice channel is allocated until it is released Calculated by Total Call Seconds 3600 where Total Call Seconds is a su...

Page 423: ...llocated in this region nor any other region because all IP media processor ports were busy resulting in the call not being able to go through Range 0 65535 Blk The percent of attempted allocations of...

Page 424: ...esource detail yesterday peak Output For Region 4 list measurements ip dsp resource detail 4 yesterday peak 4 Switch Name Date 5 32 pm WED MAR 26 1992 IP DSP RESOURCE DETAIL REPORT Meas DSP DSP Usage...

Page 425: ...full hour none today yesterday Shows the 10 worst signaling groups for each hour of today starting with the most recent whole hour or yesterday none list measurements ip signaling group current hour P...

Page 426: ...xx 100 18 12 10000 xx 100 005 05 10000 xx 100 18 15 10000 xx 100 006 06 10000 xx 100 18 18 10000 xx 100 007 07 10000 xx 100 18 21 10000 xx 100 008 08 10000 xx 100 18 24 10000 xx 100 009 09 10000 xx 10...

Page 427: ...y is shown as Hour Worst Interval The hour and worst 3 minute interval within the hour The interval is identified by the last minute of the interval Interval Average Latency ms The average latency for...

Page 428: ...s above provides a way to watch as messages arrive print schedule Report sent to printer Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is th...

Page 429: ...te Time Type Message 1 12 21 90 14 30 21 220 62 00 00 74 17 08 02 00 11 05 04 03 80 90 a2 18 03 a1 83 86 70 01 80 96 28 0d 73 74 61 74 69 6f 6e 20 35 31 30 30 31 2 14 30 22 420 60 00 00 74 17 08 02 80...

Page 430: ...vel 2 primitive downlink 0x52 ASAI maintenance uplink 0x53 ASAI maintenance downlink 0x54 ASAI unrecognized uplink 0x55 ASAI unrecognized downlink 0x56 ASAI association uplink 0x57 ASAI association do...

Page 431: ...Outgoing session layer control message 0xB1 X 25 Incoming session layer control message 0xCF X 25 Message confirmation 0xD0 X 25 Outgoing processor channel control message 0xD1 X 25 Incoming processo...

Page 432: ...1 of MST message type 0xA2 appears on the list mst output Version 2 of MST message type 0xA2 appears on the list mst output Vector Trace Message type 0x10 Message format Number Date Time Type Message...

Page 433: ...rough TCM but their output goes to the MST buffer See IMT for details on these messages A read only field in the change mst screen Other Tracing alerts the user that one or more of these types of mess...

Page 434: ...type and will be different depending on set type and module type The mapping of the button number stored in the IMT_BUT_DEBUG MST message to a position on the set is not trivial however the debug but...

Page 435: ...gel number Message 15 circuit number Message 16 message Message 1 4 user identifier Message 5 6 hook identifier defined in BASEPJ hdrs mstencode h Message 7 STIM type Message 8 11 service identifier M...

Page 436: ...rk number Message 2 endpoint number Message 3 angel number Message 4 circuit number Message 5 6 hook identifier defined in BASEPJ hdrs mstencode h Message 7 message length Message 8 angel id Message 9...

Page 437: ...ifier varies according to the type as specified by the MST encode of ASAI message traced The body which is a real ASAI message except for Level 2 Primitives follows the qualifier When the display is a...

Page 438: ...ASAI Link State 0x02 TEI Management Message 0x03 XID Message Message 10 R1 R3 Link States 0x00 the link has gone down 0x01 the link has come up 0x02 the link id has changed 0x03 the link has gone hyp...

Page 439: ...nk has gone hyperactive 0x04 the link has recovered 0x05 the audit recovery stim 0x06 the link has been reset 0x07 link state hyper too many SABMEs disconnect 0x08 broadcast link audit TEI Management...

Page 440: ...nt if the message was built but could not be sent Message 9 Downlink encode 0x01 ASAI Link Events 0x02 TEI Management Message 0x03 XID Message Message 10 ASAI Link Events 0x02 link release request 0x0...

Page 441: ...nk Events 0x02 TEI Management Message 0x03 XID Message Message 12 ASAI Link Events 0x02 link release request 0x0f link establish request sent to and received by the lower level TEI Management Message...

Page 442: ...existent 0x64 100 Invalid Information Element Contents 0x6f 111 Protocol Error NOTE An unrecognized message displayed in abbreviated format may be missing information such as cause because the messag...

Page 443: ...cation 4 adjunct routing 5 set value 6 value query 7 request feature Message 1 Port Network Number of ASAI port Message 2 Reserved Message 3 Carrier Address of ASAI port Message 4 Port number of ASAI...

Page 444: ...s 128 Message 1 Port Network Number of ASAI port Message 2 Reserved Message 3 Carrier Address of ASAI port Message 4 Port number of ASAI port Message 5 association type Message 6 standard or abbreviat...

Page 445: ...he header of the Q 931 message the cause IE if present and the channel id IE if present are the only IEs present Message 1 Port Network Number of D channel port Message 2 Reserved Message 3 Carrier Ad...

Page 446: ...R1 Message 1 Port Network Number of BRI port Message 2 Reserved Message 3 Carrier Address of BRI port Message 4 Port number of BRI port Message 5 SAPI Message 6 TEI Message 7 8 Link ID Message 9 stan...

Page 447: ...f BRI port Message 2 Reserved Message 3 Carrier Address of BRI port Message 4 Port number of BRI port Message 5 SAPI Message 6 TEI Message 7 8 Link ID Message 9 Uplink encode 0x01 BRI Link State 0x02...

Page 448: ...s changed 0x03 the link has gone hyperactive 0x04 the link has recovered 0x05 the audit recovery stim 0x06 the link has been reset 0x07 link state hyper too many SABMEs disconnect 0x08 broadcast link...

Page 449: ...Link Events 0x02 link release request 0x0f link establish request sent to and received by the lower level TEI Management Message 0x02 Identity Assigned 0x04 Identity Check Request 0x06 Identity Remove...

Page 450: ...nized Messages Types of failure 0x01 outgoing ISDNPRI 0x02 incoming ISDNPRI Message 1 Port Network Number of D channel port Message 2 Reserved Message 3 Carrier Address of D channel port Message 4 Por...

Page 451: ...are the only IEs present An additional cancel byte 0xCA may be present after the standard ISDNBRI formatted message if the message was not sent The cancel byte will not be appended if the abbreviated...

Page 452: ...trigger or count 0x72 Time changed while trace enabled timestamp indication 0x00 MST timestamp is old time 0x01 MST timestamp is new time X 25 Application Data The processor channel number is the R1 R...

Page 453: ...ssage category contains notifications as well as errors 0xA2 0xF0 and 0xF2 messages will be turned on by responding y to the Application Errors field Version 1 Message 1 processor channel number Messa...

Page 454: ...ad msg type in message buffer routine 0x0E no message buffers available 0x0F message buffer pointer error 0x10 pm state table stimulus ignored 0x11 bad session connect message Session Layer Control NO...

Page 455: ...r control message session message type 0x00 session connect 0x01 session accept 0x02 session reject 0x03 session disconnect 0x04 reserved 0x05 reserved 0x06 resynch 0x07 reserved 0x08 reserved In abbr...

Page 456: ...nnel 0x08 Connect Processor Channel 0x09 Disconnect Processor Channel 0xD1 X 25 incoming control message R1 Message events 0x01 Performed Requested Reset of Logical Channel 0x06 Resetting Logical Chan...

Page 457: ...R3 Message events 0x00 Stop Link 0x01 Start Link 0x0A Level 3 Restarting 0xD3 link status R3 Only R3 Message events 0x02 Session Down 0x03 Session Up Session Sanity 0xE2 X 25 Session Timer Expiration...

Page 458: ...essage 3 protocol machine state where timeout occurred Message 3 protocol machine state where timeout occurred Message 3 not used BAD_STATE 0x00 0 is very common don t use as a state PT_UNALLOC 0x01 p...

Page 459: ...e number Message 3 message Message 1 processor channel number Message 2 sequence number Message 3 reason code Message 4 message 0x00 message lost 1 reserved 0x02 message ignored sequence number is wit...

Page 460: ...s command displays information about ip stations registered at a facility Output The following example shows the output from list registered ip stations Message 1 processor channel number Message 2 Fa...

Page 461: ...the number of hunt groups to be displayed Example list skill status 11 count 6 init inads craft none none Table 8 6 Skilled Hunt Group data Group Number Group Name Group Extension Group Type Service...

Page 462: ...l Note that in both of these examples list skill status was executed before any traffic was offered to the skills Therefore the weighted service level is equal to the percentage component of the servi...

Page 463: ...able done shows extensions that had the Automatic Moves field set to once and have moved list station movable always shows extensions available for moves anytime list station movable error shows mis a...

Page 464: ...t Feature Interactions list suspend alm org print schedule Report sent to printer Schedule execution of the command The command is placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The...

Page 465: ...isplayed Summary measurement report displayed grp group number Measurements for a specific trunk group displayed When used with the to grp option this option is the starting trunk group in a range of...

Page 466: ...l to mem 3 result pass list testcalls detail port 1c1504 list testcalls detail port 1c1504 count 5 schedule list testcalls detail port 1c1504 count 5 not result marg print list testcalls summary list...

Page 467: ...e measurements Trk Mem The trunk member within the trunk group Test Date The month and day this trunk was tested Test Time The time of day this trunk was tested Tst Rslt This field describes the resul...

Page 468: ...occurs most often in the frequency range of 200 to 500 Hz SRL HI Singing return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the sum of the circuit repeater gains on a circuit and the sum of the circuit losses SRL HI...

Page 469: ...p Use the Field descriptions list trace to interpret this report Trunks Failed Marginal Threshld The number of trunks that failed a marginal threshold but not an unacceptable threshold according to th...

Page 470: ...C after setup rele ase DEFINITY has sent an SVC release message This is unlikely because the call being traced has already ended by the time the SVC release message is sent add indicates that a party...

Page 471: ...marked ports in a list format All marked port information is saved as part of translations monitor bcms The monitor bcms command displays output for agents and splits and summarizes the bcms conditio...

Page 472: ...tus as well as cumulative split information for all the BCMS measured splits system number ACD hunt group numbers split numbers separated by spaces and or split number ranges separated by a hyphen ski...

Page 473: ...available to receive an Automatic Call Distribution ACD call from this split This field is real time status data ABAND The number of calls that have abandoned during the current period This field is m...

Page 474: ...either the Auto in or Manual in work modes and are not currently on a call If the agent is on another split s call or in After Call Work ACW for another split this agent is not considered available an...

Page 475: ...translation data STATE The current state of the agent for this split This possible states are Avail ACD ACW AUX Extn In Extn Out OtherSplit and Unstaff If an agent is staffed the agent must also be in...

Page 476: ...e none If standby SPE Emergency Transfer Select Switches change and handshakes are down the displayed Emerg Trans field is incorrect until handshake reintializes When the monitor health command termin...

Page 477: ...needed This percentage is rounded to the nearest integer therefore 0 percent means that the occupancy is less than one half of a percent Idle Proportion of the CPU currently available This percentage...

Page 478: ...tivates The off option shows that cabinets cannot activate emergency transfers In duplicated SPE systems switch settings for both processors of the PPN cabinet 1 display In this case auto is abbreviat...

Page 479: ...d during logging in session If a data module is not used this field is blank Date Date of the logged security violation MM DD MM month DD day Time The time of the logged security violation HH MM HH ho...

Page 480: ...nection manager process Data is collected frequently in the connection manager for key information items used to create this report The single option is monitor system conn and its parameter is pnn Th...

Page 481: ...ps with highest of qued calls Grp no 78 Grp no 16 Grp dir Calls qued 2 Calls qued 1 Calls aban 1 Out blkg Attendant Group Measurement Time ATB Calls qued 1 Calls aban 0 16 06 WED MAR 6 1996 press CANC...

Page 482: ...e system except trunks and stations First OSS number has been informed Questions if the first OSS telephone number reports and acknowledges alarms If Alarm Origination is disabled or there are no acti...

Page 483: ...ximum call rates When this flag is set statistics accumulate for the next hour and shortly thereafter tot_ts_ req Total time slots in use during the time period elapsed since the top of the last hour...

Page 484: ...one receivers that are currently active Decrements when tone receivers are freed and increments when they are requested This field applies to the TN748 board This field represents real time status dat...

Page 485: ...groups monitor traffic trunk groups 4 monitor traffic hunt groups init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none none trunk groups The number of trunk group calls waiting to be serviced members in the g...

Page 486: ...rviced LCIQ The longest call in queue LCIQ indicates the time in seconds the oldest call in the hunt group queue has been waiting to be serviced monitor traffic hunt groups HUNT GROUP STATUS 22 49 SAT...

Page 487: ...f a group number is entered without a member number the member number defaults to 1 1 99 If a member number is entered the member status displays Examples monitor trunk 78 monitor trunk 80 monitor tru...

Page 488: ...ted NE Near End and FE Far End refer to the end of the trunk that has placed the facility in its current state Maintenance Busy This field identifies maintenance testing that occurs on the trunk CA TS...

Page 489: ...administered on the Node Name screen Subnet Mask Display only field showing the subnet mask information entered on the IP Interfaces screen Interface pppn represents one of the PPP interfaces on the...

Page 490: ...at arp unsorted Page 1 of 3 Net to Media Table Seq C LAN IP Address Phys Addr Type 01 11B15 135 247 062 254 02 e0 3b db c8 0a 02 11B14 192 011 131 254 00 30 6d 19 5c 0f 03 11B13 135 009 191 254 00 60...

Page 491: ...00 20 75 e3 86 09 03C09 135 009 004 079 08 00 20 7a ff b2 10 10E10 135 009 004 079 08 00 20 7a ff b2 11 05A15 135 009 004 093 08 00 20 81 cc b8 12 07B05 135 009 004 106 08 00 20 83 21 d0 13 11B12 135...

Page 492: ...terpret this report The entry in bold indicates duplicate IP addresses found in the ARP data If the systems finds no duplicate IP address the NO DUPLICATE IP ADDRESSES FOUND message appears Field desc...

Page 493: ...List 1 Type change permissions loginid an administered login such as inads and press Enter 2 Set the Additional Restrictions field to y in the Administration Commands section of the form 3 Go to the s...

Page 494: ...r to the command you can also specify which C LAN circuit pack in the case of multiple C LAN circuit packs If only one C LAN or IP Medpro board circuit pack is present the board qualifier is optional...

Page 495: ...ect the behavior of the type of packets sent IP Media Processor sourced pings should reflect audio transport performance and C LAN sourced pings should reflect control information transport performanc...

Page 496: ...default route exists specify board The IP address is not in the route table and more than 1 C LAN circuit pack has a default route Invalid internet address Invalid Internet address parameter CCcss is...

Page 497: ...Routine Maintenance Procedures Feature Interactions Carrier a cannot recycle its power When carrier b of the PPN contains SPE duplication hardware it cannot recycle its power Recycling maintenance ob...

Page 498: ...lls already in service Port Port address cabinet carrier for tested maintenance objects This field displays cabinet and carrier values Maintenance Name CARR POW Alt Name Not applicable Test Number T12...

Page 499: ...te table to interpret the report Screen 8 23 Refresh route table 01B11 Use the information in Field descriptions refresh route table to interpret the report refresh route table all Page 1 of 1 C LAN B...

Page 500: ...command should be used judiciously The following potential side effects can occur Tests that detect faults and or lack of faults on Standby SPE components might not run Accordingly alarms are not rai...

Page 501: ...ndpoint extension number associated with desired access endpoint Examples release access endpoint 25012 release access endpoint 77868 init inads craft nms none none Port Port address cabinet carrier s...

Page 502: ...ion PCsspp Examples release board 01c11 release board 02c15 init inads craft nms none none Port Port address cabinet carrier slot of released maintenance object Maintenance Name The type of maintenanc...

Page 503: ...nk command Output The following example shows the output from the release cdr link primary command Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions...

Page 504: ...odule 310 init inads craft cust nms none none Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit of the maintenance object that is busied out or released or the number of the data channel Maintenance Name...

Page 505: ...The following output example is a display of release journal printer wakeup log Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Default Feature Interactions release journal pr...

Page 506: ...rough 4 reside on Processor Interface circuit packs 1a1 or 1b1 5 through 8 reside on Processor Interface circuit pack 1a2 or 1b2 Examples release link 1 release link 8 init inads craft none none Port...

Page 507: ...mis Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions release mis init inads craft cust rcust none none Port Not applicable Maintenance Name MIS Al...

Page 508: ...aults Feature Interactions release modem pool group member 1 5 pair of analog and digital line ports or two pair for the Integrated modem pool case 1 32 Examples release modem pool 1 release modem poo...

Page 509: ...point signaling links reestablish with release packet control Output The following output example is a display of release packet control 1A Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Descrip...

Page 510: ...conflicts with link maintenance itself Busied out objects create link setup failure Frequent link re setup attempts may delay faulty component recovery For best results use busyout to disable attempt...

Page 511: ...1101 release port 02c1501 init inads craft none none Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit of released maintenance object Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being release...

Page 512: ...re in cabinet 1 carrier B slot 20 circuit 1 to 6 Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions release pri endpoint extension extension number a...

Page 513: ...aults Feature Interactions release sp link init inads craft none none Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit of busied out maintenance objects Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object t...

Page 514: ...occur depending of Fault Severity Levels of the two SPE s If the standby SPE is in poor health memory shadowing must not enable communication to the standby is impossible if it is enabled Then the sta...

Page 515: ...erminal Examples release station 10020 release station 32770 init inads craft cust none none Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit of the released maintenance object Maintenance Name Type of...

Page 516: ...allows for duplication of control channels and dedicated tone time slots The default control bus carrying the control channel is the a bus while the default tone bus carrying dedicated tones is the b...

Page 517: ...Physical location PCsspp Examples release tone clock c init inads craft 1 one none Port The tone clock circuit pack maintenance object displays the cabinet and carrier of the specified tone clock boar...

Page 518: ...trunk group member Group number 1 99 Member number 1 99 Examples release trunk 78 release trunk 78 1 init inads craft none none Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit of the released maintenan...

Page 519: ...memory For example if a default license has been installed to perform customer upgrades it must be removed when the customer s own translation media is returned To remove a License File from the tran...

Page 520: ...reset board location repeat number Physical location PCsspp Number of times each board reset repeats 1 00 Examples reset board 01c11 reset board c08 reset board 03d12 r 3 init inads craft nms carrier...

Page 521: ...High or Critical Reliability For troubleshooting see status interface status link and status processor channel commands to locate problems before performing a reset interfaces link traffic is interru...

Page 522: ...ier Description Logins Default Feature Interactions reset maintenance location Physical location of the EPN maintenance circuit pack carrier number Examples reset maintenance 02 reset maintenance 2 re...

Page 523: ...es start they cannot abort from the CANCEL key If reset system interchange commands are rejected because standby SPE Fault Severity Levels are higher than active SPEs the health override command can f...

Page 524: ...ypass Fault Severity Levels of standby SPEs to force an interchange SPE alarm components determine Fault Severity levels Each component is assigned a severity level and the most severe SPE alarm defin...

Page 525: ...5 Hot DATA CHL MINOR ON 15 Hot DATA CON MINOR ON 15 Hot DATA BD MINOR ON 15 Hot MEM CARD MINOR ON or OFF 10 Hot PR MAINT MINOR OFF 8 Hot A reset system interchange command aborts if The standby SPE is...

Page 526: ...WSP to synchronize with the PPN translations The preserve license qualifier Prevents the PPN License File with the wrong serial number from overwriting the WSP License File Preserves the WSP product...

Page 527: ...standby SPE that has been busied out must be released release standby spe Check that the SPE select switches on the DUPINT circuit pack are in the AUTO position reset val This command performs the fu...

Page 528: ...pe is in the tape drive when users attempt a copy the command aborts If the MSS is in use by another user or maintenance the restore announcements command is not allowed Unsaved or corrupted announcem...

Page 529: ...urs the restore operation fails Valid announcement files do not appear on the announcement board To copy the announcements from the active processor s MSS device to the announcement board restart the...

Page 530: ...n the status hardware group screen save announcements This command copies announcement data from the announcement board to the MSS The Card Mem stores announcements for the system By default announcem...

Page 531: ...loading or downloading the system denies the command Users cannot record integrated announcements after the save announcements command commences even though 15 channels are available for announcement...

Page 532: ...rrective action Maintenance software that monitors hardware logs hardware errors to maintenance Then maintenance software invoke tests to diagnose and attempt corrective action If maintenance software...

Page 533: ...o save translation to the memory card on SPE_A Duplex The system defaults to save translation to the memory card on both SPE A and SPE B Output The following is an example of save translation on a dup...

Page 534: ...ion data saves SPE A or SPE B Command Completion Status Displays a variety of messages identifying the success or failure of the command Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Default Fe...

Page 535: ...er Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions set ethernet options location The physical location of the circuit pack UUCSS init inads craft customer Auto Negotiation y means that the...

Page 536: ...in Judicious use of this command can reduce the number of ineffective alarms to the TSC For effective results technicians should use the set options command default settings specified in this section...

Page 537: ...Alarms Alarm Group 4 w w Off board Trunk Alarms Alarm Group 4 w w On boar Adjunct Alarms w w Off board Alarms w w Off board DS1 Alarms w w Off board PI LINK Alarms w w Off board Alarms Other w w Memor...

Page 538: ...cuit pack as before but no attendant LEDs or stations reporting alarms are affected No call is placed to INADS Report The report option treats alarms the same as warnings with one exception alarms rep...

Page 539: ...information in the Alarm Reporting Options Form as translation data and preserves it through all restart levels This command affects the MO alarming listed below Neither the trunk nor the station cate...

Page 540: ...s according to Major and Minor alarm criteria Trunk MOs Affected By This Command NOTE Although alarms on these MOs may appear as warnings the alarms should be investigated with user reported problems...

Page 541: ...s for adjuncts Similarly the administration of alarm severity for the adjunct alarm group does not affect the alarm severity levels for other stations PI Link and Associated Link MOs Affected by this...

Page 542: ...tion SYNC System Communication Interface PI SCI System Printer SYS PRNT TDM Clock TDM CLK Tone Generator Circuit Pack TONE BD set signaling group This command upgrades secondary D channel in specified...

Page 543: ...zation sources become synchronization references If no primary or secondary source is administered synchronization uses active tone clock boards as synchronization references after synchronization is...

Page 544: ...s on dedicated tone time slots drops these calls Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions set tdm port network pn number bus bus override specifies the Port N...

Page 545: ...d from an earlier release the daylight savings time rule on the set time screen defaults to 0 no rule While you can change the daylight savings time rule the system clock is not adjusted automatically...

Page 546: ...he Month 1 31 The system also checks for leap year Month January through December Year 1970 2999 Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59 Second The system sets this field to zero when the time of day clock is set Type...

Page 547: ...vector bit set the core dump writes to secondary storage the primary MSS device Once core dumps write the vector clears and the restart executes This command disrupts service in a simplex system The...

Page 548: ...mples set vector f set vector 9 DUPLEX SYSTEM Examples set vector f spe standby set vector f spe active set vector f spe maint set vector 9 init inads craft spe standby High or Critical Reliability Sy...

Page 549: ...for simplex SPE systems If a restart occurs on active SPEs and the corresponding vector bit is set core dumps occur on the active SPE This option disrupts service spe maint Available for High or Criti...

Page 550: ...valid voice and data communication type that the access endpoint is administered The options are 56k data 64k data voice grade data and wideband Width For communication types of 56k data 64k data and...

Page 551: ...stered connection enabled y n Originator Extension of originating access data endpoint Destination Destination address used to route administered connections Connection State Current status of the adm...

Page 552: ...printer Examples status attendant 1 status attendant 2 status attendant 2 print init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse none none Console Number Number assigned to the attendant 1 16 Port Port locatio...

Page 553: ...es that an audit ran and aborted The date and time that the audit first detected a problem only for cumulative The time of the most recent error detected by the audit only for cumulative Audit data in...

Page 554: ...tion Logins Default Feature Interactions status audits peak hour cumulative print schedule Data collected since the last reboot or since the last clear audits cumulative command Data for the peak hour...

Page 555: ...3 22 10 14 06 24 16 03 CR AUDIT 135 0 0 03 22 10 12 06 10 19 17 HU CALLS 2 0 0 03 22 10 12 03 22 10 20 SE CALLS 1 0 1 03 22 10 13 03 22 19 14 TTR SID 1 0 0 05 01 02 17 05 01 02 17 CO CALLS 1 0 0 05 01...

Page 556: ...hey execute as part of scheduled maintenance and are marked with SCH following the audit name Cycles Fixed Data Number of times that the audit ran in the specified interval and found a fixable problem...

Page 557: ...ALLS 572 Announcement group calls audit AN QUE 577 Announcement group queue audit AQSA 545 ACB queue slot allocation audit ASLINK 606 ASAI link status audit ASYLED 605 ASAI yellow LED audit ATACT 558...

Page 558: ...ension group administration audit DE CALLS 517 Data extension group calls audit DMLK 563 Data module lock audit DUR A 543 Data user record audit DXLK 567 Data extension member lock audit EI TAB 621 Ex...

Page 559: ...dit PCLK 566 PCOL member lock audit PC ADM 535 Personal CO line group administration audit PC CALLS 521 Personal CO line group calls audit PINC TAB 612 Packet Inter Port Network Connection Sub Table a...

Page 560: ...CALLS 522 Trunk group calls audit TR QUE 525 Trunk group queue audit TSC PRI 520 ISDN PRI TSC resource audit TSRA 547 Time slot record allocation audit TTI STATE 618 TTI State Audit TTI TRANS 619 TTI...

Page 561: ...ture Interactions status bri port location print Physical location PCsspp Report sent to printer Examples status bri port 1c0701 status bri port 1c0701 print init inads craft cust nms browse none none...

Page 562: ...state at layer 2 The switch successfully initiates the link can now exchange layer 3 frames with the endpoint If the endpoint does not support SPID initialization procedures the endpoint extension ass...

Page 563: ...oints and wiring by following SPID Facility Test Procedures described in the BRI SET ISDN BRI Set ASAI Adjunct Maintenance documentation 2 Verify repairs by executing the status bri port PCSSpp comman...

Page 564: ...6 Established blank blank Transitory state for automatic TEIBRI endpoints which support MIM initialization 1 Verify that SPID administration on the switch and endpoint are consistent Verify the repair...

Page 565: ...d with port endpoints See description of SPID Facility Test Procedures in the BRI SET ASAI ADJ BRI DAT Maintenance documentation BRI 0 126 L3 Established blank blank Invalid SPID assigned to link 1 Ch...

Page 566: ...aling link is L3 Established BRI cont d 0 126 L3 Assigned ext yes Transitory state for BRI endpoints which support MIM initialization when SPID Facility Test initializes the station 5 Wait for five se...

Page 567: ...2 Replace the endpoint Verify repairs by executing the status bri port PCSSpp command Determine that the L2 state of the signaling link is L3 Established ASAI 0 126 L3 Restarting ext The switch sends...

Page 568: ...standby SPEs Is a valid memory card in place Is the memory card write protected NOTE Beginning with Release 9 the memory card has no write protect switch and no equivalent software mechanism What is...

Page 569: ...rrier of the memory card Simplex system 01A for carrier A of Processor Port Network High or Critical Reliability Systems 01A or 01B System Size System configuration Small or Medium This information ca...

Page 570: ...o different algorithm of erase operations between the two series Translatio n Storage Space Used 1 Percentage of reserved storage space for storing translation files in the memory card that saves tran...

Page 571: ...in Chapter 9 Output The following information is displayed for both the Primary and Secondary CDR links whether or not both are used The following is an example of the fields contained on the output...

Page 572: ...etect chronic alarming conditions If the Feature is suspended message appears Expert Systems can identify open trouble tickets as chronic problems for special consideration Action Object Qualifier Qua...

Page 573: ...een by other users due to interworking problems 6 Users cannot participate in Multipoint Communications Service conferences 7 Continuous conferences do not move endpoints in or out of quadrants Action...

Page 574: ...nce data displays in 2 parts the first screen describes the status of the conference and indicates the modes and levels of the conference It also identifies in use endpoints that cause conference oper...

Page 575: ...y none any mlp ww pcs MLP rate Conference MLP Data Rate blank start time date Conference start time in 24 hour notation with month and day stop time date End of conference in 24 hour notation with mon...

Page 576: ...the rate that endpoints can receive frames The MCU cannot detect maximum transmit frame rates or current frame rates Frame rates change due to the amount of motion in the input image QFPS The ACIF fra...

Page 577: ...analysis of this endpoint s capabilities and mode field to identify the missing capability f the endpoint is in use but not connected to all media The endpoint declared all required capabilities chan...

Page 578: ...Aud and Dat fields are y c downgraded conference video quality from changing CIF to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate The conference video mode defaults to CIF If QCIF only endpoints join the confe...

Page 579: ...ate adaptation see Join Time below n Another endpoint triggers a 64 kbps conference to rate adapt to 56 kbps This endpoint joins the conference at 64 kbps but encounters problems in rate adapting to 5...

Page 580: ...erences This endpoint s video broadcasts to other sites This conference is in VAS broadcast or presentation mode Quad screen VAS conferences are prefix with an indicating that this endpoint s video be...

Page 581: ...dpoint as set in a quadrant An u represents endpoints that belong to the quad image and U represents disconnected endpoints U For quad screen conferences UCC CRCS Agents designate quadrants as VAS U i...

Page 582: ...pri Administration errors cause mismatches in primary secondary designation for cascade linking This mismatch indicates that both MCUs are administered as primaries see Cascading for a description of...

Page 583: ...U regarding the UIN password Query Timeout periods exist for each period Internal MCU cannot allocate the necessary trunk resources to route the dial out call for the specified dial numbers This probl...

Page 584: ...bout 10 seconds between digits inter digit timing System MCU restarts level 2 disconnect all calls UIN Inv The user enters an invalid User Identification Number Unknown The system cannot determine the...

Page 585: ...d from the endpoint Terminal Name Blank Sum Grp Endpoints belong to this Summer group number and the VC Audio Level L1 and Level 2 L2 summer ports for this group These fields supply entries for confer...

Page 586: ...cted to all media The endpoint declared all required capabilities channel video audio data but is not fully connected to all conference media This endpoint may be connecting failed to connect or is no...

Page 587: ...video if the Chl Aud and Dat fields are y c The endpoint downgrades the conference s video quality from CIF to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate The conference video mode defaults to CIF and if a...

Page 588: ...his endpoint joins the conference at 64 kbps but because another endpoint triggers rate adaptation to 56 kbps this endpoint rate adapts to 56 kbps c 64 kbps endpoints join the conference at 56 kbps Th...

Page 589: ...is not connected to the conference suppresses its video or has invalid video for its video source Up to four endpoints have an or before the Vs field value Quad screen conference in VAS mode The mixe...

Page 590: ...with fixed quadrant participants s represents an endpoint that is fixed in a particular quadrant S displays when both the endpoint and the UCC CRCS Agent suppress the endpoint video u For full screen...

Page 591: ...unk Video Aud ESM BONDng Err Software 1 _____ _____ _________ __ ___ ______ ______ ______ ______ ___ ________ 2 _____ _____ _________ __ ___ ______ ______ ______ ______ ___ ________ 3 _____ _____ ____...

Page 592: ...to disconnect for example agents change connected dial out destination numbers Bandwidth Mismatches occur when bandwidths of calls and the conferences they attempt to join are inconsistent BondHshake...

Page 593: ...oblem allocating the necessary trunk resources to route dial out calls for specified dial numbers This problem is associated with routing patterns or trunk associated translation for example TAC speci...

Page 594: ...en digits inter digit timing System MCU restarts level 2 disconnect all calls UIN Inv Users enter invalid User Identification Numbers Unknown The system cannot determine the disconnect cause Wrong num...

Page 595: ...nference endpoint page 3 of 6 CONFERENCE INFO Broadcaster xx See Me Return Vid xx MODE COMMANDS COMMUNICATION MODES EPT MISC FAW CMD STAT CONF EPT IN EPT OUT I O CH1 CH2 AIM y n XRATE y 384 384 384 VI...

Page 596: ...See Me The endpoint initiates a MCV broadcaster request Presenter A presentation mode broadcaster Rollcall The UCC designates the broadcaster by the Rollcall feature UCC The UCC designates the broadc...

Page 597: ...compatibility n modes incompatibility EPT IN defines the communication modes coming in from an endpoint EPT OUT Defines the communication modes sent to an endpoint based on the number of connected ch...

Page 598: ...It includes endpoints that support the highest common audio mode HC audio when the administered mode is auto The highest common conference mode depends on the administered bandwidth A in the table in...

Page 599: ...1 recommended H CTX proprietary H CTX proprietary or SG4 proprietary indicate that video is on in the direction indicated and video off when the video is off MLP Multi Layer Protocol data mode When te...

Page 600: ...no video broadcaster broadcaster does not join or broadcaster s video is invalid MIS Multipoint Indicate Secondary status n For output the endpoint is a valid source not necessarily at this moment n i...

Page 601: ...nt s status as a video source for 5 seconds of hyperactivity timer The HYPR counter tallies the number of times this endpoint is hyperactive DMUTE y The VC board or the software in the MCU mute the de...

Page 602: ...chronization This counter starts with 0x00 increments to 0xff then wraps around to 0x01 The MCUFAL count also displays in the Fr Err field on Page 2 FEFAL Far End Frame Alignment Loss FEFAL Counts of...

Page 603: ...CTX H CTX and SG4 are proprietary video format capabilities SG4_sfg indicates support for SG4 Still Frame Graphics MISC The restrict field and the 56 64 command mode with a restrict value indicate th...

Page 604: ...the MCU provides Audio Only Communications Mode ACOM For a 2B conference the MCU sets the rate to 2x64 expecting the endpoints to do likewise 64x2 displays if this is not displayed no 64x2 capability...

Page 605: ...__ __________ __ __ __ ________ 7 __ _____ _____ __________ __ __ __ ________ 8 __ _____ _____ __________ __ __ __ ________ 9 __ _____ _____ __________ __ __ __ ________ 10 __ _____ _____ __________ _...

Page 606: ...uled Transient in nature indicating that an AC is about to enter the attempting to connect state waiting to retry The AC is inactive waiting for the retry timer to expire Once the timer expires the AC...

Page 607: ...s denied 0x1F 0t31 Reason unknown 0x22 0t34 Trunks unavailable 0x26 0t38 Temporary or facility failure 0x29 0t41 Temporary or facility failure 0x2A 0t42 Resources unavailable 0x2C 0t44 Resources unava...

Page 608: ...Ring no answer 0xC8 0t200 Hi and dry no feedback detected 0xC9 0t201 Cascade link administered wrong 0xCA 0t202 CPTR not available to detect failure Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login...

Page 609: ...data module valid states are In service idle The data module is present but not in use In service active The data module is present and is in use Out of service The data module has been removed from...

Page 610: ...Routine Maintenance Procedures for more information Output The following output example is a display of status esm Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions s...

Page 611: ...f 1 STATUS FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD Source Board Location 01C02 Firmware Image File Name usd1v22r1 Target Board Code TN464 Suffix FP Firmware Vintage 22 Schedule Download Y Start Date Time 01 12 2001 13 30 S...

Page 612: ...of status hardware group Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions status hardware group print Report sent to printer Examples status hardware group status har...

Page 613: ...me It tracks completion time for the hardware group command If a test cancels then restarts the time for the cancel period is excluded The time displays in HH MM SS format Repetition Number Number of...

Page 614: ...down the displayed Emerg Trans field is incorrect until handshakes reactivate Major Number of logged major alarms 0 200 Minor Number of logged minor alarms 0 200 Warning Number of warnings logged in...

Page 615: ...ng source Display values for this field vary according to timing sources selected external For Stratum 3 hardware internal an internal source such as a tone clock Primary and secondary timing sources...

Page 616: ...gel Link EAL determines PNC status of a port network up denotes that the EAL is available dn denotes that the EAL is unavailable Time of Day Current time of day acquired from the system Action Object...

Page 617: ...eld Name on switch output output type MIB data Description Incoming data gram header errors Counter Long ipInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams dis carded due to errors in their IP head ers inclu...

Page 618: ...his counter does not include any dat agrams counted in ipForwDatagrams Outgoing data grams dis carded Counter Long ipOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encoun tered...

Page 619: ...network region x or status ip network region y will indicate the result as f failed between those two regions Output The following example shows the output for the status network region 2 command Fie...

Page 620: ...for data and the rates are high the trunk should be deactivated If the trunk is used for voice the trunk may not be deactivated Also high rates be at risk for some type of power hit Output The follow...

Page 621: ...ult of 10 seconds Duration of Test Run time for the test call listed in minutes blank a default time Reason of Termination Reason that the test call terminates finished canceled overflow no bits trans...

Page 622: ...n on journal printer links see the description of the busyout journal printer command Output The following example is a display of status journal link wakeup log Field descriptions Action Object Quali...

Page 623: ...e invoked with status pgate port for PGATE links status clan port or netstat link n for C LAN links Output The following example shows page 1 of the output from the status link n command si w TN794 Ne...

Page 624: ...signed by add change data module command Service State Displays in service idle in service active disconnected out of service maintenance busy in service inactive active idle Node Name Administered no...

Page 625: ...liverable to a higher layer protocol Incoming packets discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverab...

Page 626: ...CP IP socket links that are currently up and active that are using the ethernet link n via the CLAN board or the Processor Ethernet interface UP Channels are up DN Channels are down PND Channels are i...

Page 627: ...displayed These updates will not be reflected until the next execution of the command The command will take a snapshot of the commands that the users on the system are currently executing Because of t...

Page 628: ...example shows the output from the status pms link command Field descriptions Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions status pms link print Report sent to pri...

Page 629: ...of the specified PRI endpoint is out of service and background maintenance testing is being performed on the port NOTE A PRI endpoint can initiate and receive a call on any one or more of the B chann...

Page 630: ...mber of B channels in the in service idle state Port Port locations cabinet carrier slot circuit for each of the B channels making up the PRI endpoint Service State Service state of the B channels in...

Page 631: ...dministered Channel is in a state entering wait session accept WSA Channel is in a state waiting for a session accept message from the far end Channel is in data transfer state channel is up and runni...

Page 632: ...t example shows the output from the status signaling group 1 command Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions status signaling group group identifier print Ad...

Page 633: ...service NOTE If there is no D channel backup and the primary D channel is out of service then the signaling group is in an out of service state Link Link transporting the D channel Port Address of th...

Page 634: ...state without system technician intervention manual out of service a D channel is manual out of service when system technician intervention has caused it to be placed in the TEI assigned state at laye...

Page 635: ...administered Number of Retries Number of times the switch has tried to set up the link since a request to set up the link was received 1 999 if more than 999 retries have occurred 999 still displays T...

Page 636: ...ny Message Waiting Whether there is a message waiting for the station AP SPE AUDIX PMS or blank if no messages are waiting Connected Ports Port locations of the facilities to which the station is conn...

Page 637: ...Group Cntrl Restr One or two of the following none total stat stat outward or terminate AWU Call at Time that Automatic Wakeup Call is scheduled User DND Status of the do not disturb feature Group DN...

Page 638: ...is unable to determine the Serial Number This field can also show Errored if the serial number received is not in the correct format Station Lock Active Indicates whether the station has been locked u...

Page 639: ...Management Features in the Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software Screen 8 35 Status station Field descriptions Average Jitter ms Last Ten Seconds The ten most recent...

Page 640: ...quence No Last transmitted data packet sequence number Worst Case this Call Jitter the worst case 1 second jitter buffer size ms experienced during the current connection Packet Loss the worst case 1...

Page 641: ...or a DS1 cabinet carrier for a tone clock Switching Capability Whether the on line reference for synchronization can be switched Enabled or Disabled Excessive Reference Switching High level descriptio...

Page 642: ...us system 1st cabinet status system 2nd cabinet status system 3rd cabinet status system all cabinets 1 For PPN and 1st and 2nd EPNs one page of output displays 2 The status displayed for a cabinet is...

Page 643: ...r of Minor alarms associated with the SPE complex that affect the fault severity level of this SPE If the system is simplex system then the 1B SPE always shows blank TONE CLOCK Location of the tone cl...

Page 644: ...EL Whether the control channel is on this TDM Bus y n DEDICATED TONES Whether the dedicated tones are on this TDM Bus y n PKT Packet Bus identifier same as the cabinet number 1 2 or 3 If the system is...

Page 645: ...tch 1A and 1B for the PPN and 2A or 3A for the EPNs SELECT SWITCH Emergency Transfer Switch position on the Processor s or the EPN maintenance circuit pack and the state of Emergency Transfer in the c...

Page 646: ...ertain maintenance tests and has been removed from service blank Expansion Interface Link does not exist MODE active Expansion Interface Link is in service and providing the active connectivity betwee...

Page 647: ...tialization the standby SPE is available for maintenance functions on the standby SPE busyout testing SPE busied out however the switch software on this SPE has been restarted and is currently in the...

Page 648: ...maint list config SPE in maintenance mode and currently executing a list configuration command maint save trans SPE in maintenance mode and is currently executing a save translation command maint save...

Page 649: ...that has temporarily left the standby memory not refreshed After the current test finishes background maintenance refreshes the standby SPE down analysis SPE in down mode and currently performing bac...

Page 650: ...updates the screen automatically every minute or on demand Parameters Examples status trunk 78 status trunk 80 2 print group member If you enter a trunk group number without a member number the infor...

Page 651: ...connected NE Near End and FE Far End refer to which end of the trunk has placed the facility in its current state Explanations of these service states for each type of trunk appear in the maintenance...

Page 652: ...31 12B1217 xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn H 245 12B1217 xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn G 711 MU Audio 12B1108 xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn xxx xxx xxx xxx nnnnn H 245 Tunneled in Q...

Page 653: ...ection delays and a general loss of quality making speech unintelligible status trunk 1 19 SPE B TRUNK STATUS Trunk Group Member 01 19 Service State in service active Port T00123 Maintenance Busy no S...

Page 654: ...twork Connectivity for Avaya MultiVantage Software for more information status trunk 11 3 Page 2 of 2 SPE B TRUNK STATUS NETWORK STATUS Average Jitter ms Packet Loss per Second Last Ten Seconds Last T...

Page 655: ...Call The number of SSRC changes occurring during the current connection Last Rx Sequence No Last received data sequence Last Tx Sequence No Last transmitted data sequence Worst Case this call Jitter...

Page 656: ...status tsc administered 1 1 command Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions status tsc administered signaling group tsc index print Administered signaling g...

Page 657: ...ve shows that the TSC is being released pending active the TSC is about to come up Establish The switch responsible for the origination of the administered TSC as needed TSC is established on an as ne...

Page 658: ...us psa to see the same screen It shows that the status of PSA is dependent on the state of TTI Output The following example shows the output for status tti and status psa Action Object Qualifier Quali...

Page 659: ...of Boards Completed Number of TTI supported circuit packs that were processed by the background maintenance task The ports on a completed circuit pack if unadministered were translated as TTI ports if...

Page 660: ...field descriptions status val ip 1C02 IP STATUS Reset Time mm dd hh mm Last Hour Start Time mm dd hh mm End Time mm dd hh mm Incoming Received Octets Datagrams Discards Hdr Errors Since reset 1 0 0 La...

Page 661: ...d and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed by the comman...

Page 662: ...selected alarm log entries The results display in standard test output and status information display on the message line as the command progresses Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit Maint...

Page 663: ...step failures test alarms long clear auto page test alarms long failures 1 If auto page option is not specified the screen does not refresh once filled and testing stops until the user presses PAGE c...

Page 664: ...of two users attempting to test the same physical hardware for example one using the test alarms command and another using the test board command If this command attempts to test a board that is curre...

Page 665: ...ment types If there is no input to any of these fields the system defaults to all the equipment The user can select one of the following fields Cabinet tests alarms associated with a particular cabine...

Page 666: ...ack y or off board o Alt Name Terminal extension numbers or trunk group numbers Alarm Type Major Minor or Warning Service State Current service state of the station and trunk ports RDY ready for servi...

Page 667: ...te Alarmed Day hour and minute of alarm Alarm Count Count of the current alarm entry versus the total number of alarms to be tested Test results section Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit...

Page 668: ...00 or 102 transmission tests How many times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is the...

Page 669: ...e line of data for each test result Field descriptions Port The port address cabinet carrier slot circuit of the maintenance object that is being tested Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object...

Page 670: ...Option for a longer more comprehensive test series includes a destructive test How many times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat...

Page 671: ...private CO line P xxx xxx private CO line group number Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Fail Abort Disabled No Board or Extra Board Error Code Numeric code explaining why the r...

Page 672: ...y of the memory card device the basic read erase write operations to the memory card the integrity of the translation data stored in the memory card the function of 12 volt power supply in TN777B NETC...

Page 673: ...equence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 2 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command...

Page 674: ...running test card mem command for a memory card in the standby SPE means that the standby SPE is put into the maintenance mode and no SPE interchange is allowed through the reset system interchange co...

Page 675: ...maintenance object FL DATA is blank Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested CARD MEM for the memory card CAP MEM for memory card capacity FL DATA for the data consistency stored...

Page 676: ...y times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is v...

Page 677: ...e maintenance name always CUST ALM Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test number always 115 Result Test result Pass Abort or Fail Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted...

Page 678: ...tive test How many times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fai...

Page 679: ...way to identify maintenance objects If the Object is The field contains station extension trunk xxx yyy xxx trunk group yyy member private CO line P xxx xxx private CO line group number Test No The te...

Page 680: ...er to specify a loop up code for the CPE loopback jack if it differs from the default 0x47F The loop up code is entered by specifying the number of bits in the loop up code as well as the actual hexad...

Page 681: ...est basis with one line of data for each test result Field descriptions Port Port address cabinet carrier slot circuit Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt Name The alternate means of i...

Page 682: ...Option for a longer more comprehensive test series includes a destructive test How many times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat...

Page 683: ...t applicable Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board or Disabled Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted Refer to the detailed list of...

Page 684: ...s to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the specified time The information displayed by the command is sent to the system printer inst...

Page 685: ...e external device alarm Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled or Extra Bd Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted Refer to t...

Page 686: ...r status 3 EXT DEV tests external AUDIX for example alarm status for both the SCC and MCC cabinet systems 4 POWER tests battery backup 5 AC POWER tests AC power availability 6 CARR_POW tests carrier D...

Page 687: ...ive and nondestructive diagnostic tests How many times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a s...

Page 688: ...d carrier values display Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail Disabled Error Code Numeric code exp...

Page 689: ...ons The default is ALL failed ip network regions Otherwise test failed ip network region xxx where xxx is in the range of 1 250 for r and 1 80 for si csi d Output The following display shows a typical...

Page 690: ...agnostics on all the hardware in the specified hardware group and reports results of the test along with any possible error codes Concurrent testing is done to enhance performance therefore test resul...

Page 691: ...e group carrier 1a schedule test hardware group cabinet 2 test hardware group board 01c07 test hardware group board 01c07 schedule test hardware group spe test hardware group spe print test hardware g...

Page 692: ...try later displays and the request fails Save translation If the test hardware group with the all ports option while a translation save operation is active some unadministered ports may not be tested...

Page 693: ...s set to continuously then this field disappears from the screen if this field is set to repeat then the field appears Auto page Provides a new screen every time the SAT screen fills with test results...

Page 694: ...d Number Description Board Number Description TN413 Digital Line TN746 16 port Analog Line TN417 Auxiliary Trunk TN747B Central Office Trunk TN429 Direct Inward Outward Dialing Trunk TN753 Direct Inwa...

Page 695: ...2149 Analog Line TN2180 16 port Analog line SPE interchange Allow for planned interchange of duplicated SPEs and subsequent testing of both the active and standby SPEs Table 8 16 Test of all ports opt...

Page 696: ...continues The test waits 2 minutes before dialing the call to allow the remote maintenance technician to logoff thus freeing the line A local SAT user entering the test inads link command does not ne...

Page 697: ...Process Circuit Packs field must be set to yes on the inads and technician permission forms This provides permissions to execute the test inads link command This field can be changed by executing a ch...

Page 698: ...ehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until t...

Page 699: ...d with the particular processor interface board Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt Name Blank Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled or E...

Page 700: ...ng test calls running depends upon the number of Maintenance Test circuit packs in the system Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions test isdn testcall grou...

Page 701: ...tenance object being tested Alt Name Alternate means of identifying the maintenance object xxx yyy where xxx trunk group yyy member number Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort...

Page 702: ...ive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the al...

Page 703: ...and stops periodic re setup trys on the link Output The following example shows the output for the test journal printer pms log command The responses display on a test by test basis with one line of d...

Page 704: ...e test led command SPE Select LEDs on the Duplication Interface Circuit Packs Power Unit LEDs Yellow amber LED on the tape drive Output If the command is successful Command successfully completed disp...

Page 705: ...s Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Co...

Page 706: ...id being tested Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error...

Page 707: ...more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repe...

Page 708: ...maintenance object only the cabinet and carrier values display Maintenance Name The maintenance name always MAINT Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test being executed Result The result of the indi...

Page 709: ...test series all nondestructive for this command Number of times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is clear...

Page 710: ...ress cabinet carrier Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested is MEMORY Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test being executed Result The result of the test Pass Abort or Fail Err...

Page 711: ...ool Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests Option for a longer more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests Number of times each test in the...

Page 712: ...t circuit Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object always MODEM PT Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error Co...

Page 713: ...quence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a schedul...

Page 714: ...aintenance object DATA BD for Network Control board SW CTL for Switch Control Archangel DATA CHL for administered data channel CARD MEM for flash memory card on Network Control board Alt Name Extensio...

Page 715: ...s the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of...

Page 716: ...tenance Name The name of maintenance object Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test number run on the packet control Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error Code Numeric c...

Page 717: ...he test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of th...

Page 718: ...Maintenance Name The name of maintenance object being tested Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error Code Numeric co...

Page 719: ...h test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated an...

Page 720: ...nd is used to do this and causes the link to be torn down If the link is already down the busyout command stops periodic re setup tries on the link Output The following example shows the output for th...

Page 721: ...ce is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling...

Page 722: ...Name The alternate means of identifying the maintenance object If the Object is aThe field contains stationextension trunkxxx yyy xxx trunk group number and yyy member number private CO lineP xxx xxx...

Page 723: ...until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in...

Page 724: ...The specified extension number of the PRI endpoint Test No The actual test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error Code Numeric code explaining why the relea...

Page 725: ...nd nondestructive diagnostic tests This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then...

Page 726: ...d is MEMORY Alt Name Not applicable Test No Test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted Refer...

Page 727: ...if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queu...

Page 728: ...eld descriptions Port The port address is always blank Maintenance Name SHDW LNK Alt Name Not applicable Test No The test number is always 318 Result Test result Pass Abort Fail Disabled Error Code Nu...

Page 729: ...h destructive and nondestructive diagnostic tests How many times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is clea...

Page 730: ...ld descriptions Port The signaling group number 1 8 of the signaling group that is being tested Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being tested Alt Name Not Applicable Test No Tes...

Page 731: ...efaults Feature Interactions test sp link short long schedule Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic tests Option for a longer more comprehensive series of both destructive and nondest...

Page 732: ...ntenance object Alt Name Alternate means of identifying the maintenance object This field contains the extension when the object is a data module Test No Test being executed Result Test result Pass Ab...

Page 733: ...MEM PKT CTRL Action Object Qualifiers Qualifier Description Logins Defaults Feature Interactions test spe standby short long repeat number clear Option for a brief series of nondestructive diagnostic...

Page 734: ...nce object that is being tested Alt Name Alternate means of identifying the maintenance object This field contains the extension when the object is a data module Test No Test being executed Result Tes...

Page 735: ...How many times each test in the sequence is repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Comm...

Page 736: ...ess cabinet carrier slot circuit Maintenance Name The type of maintenance object that is being tested Alt Name Alternate means of identifying the maintenance object This field contains the extension w...

Page 737: ...repeated 1 100 This option causes the test sequence short or long to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form...

Page 738: ...rt command Field descriptions Port Not applicable Maintenance Name Maintenance object name Alt Name Not applicable Test No Test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extr...

Page 739: ...e test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the command queue and is executed at the spec...

Page 740: ...B is displayed Maintenance Name Maintenance object name Alt Name Not applicable Test No Test being executed Result Test result Pass Abort Fail No Board Disabled Extra Bd Error Code Numeric code expla...

Page 741: ...the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then placed in the com...

Page 742: ...DM CLK Alt Name Not applicable Test No Test being executed Result PASS ABORT FAIL NO BOARD DISABLED EXTRA BD Error Code Numeric code explaining why the release failed or aborted Refer to the detailed...

Page 743: ...g to repeat until the alarm if any is cleared or a single test in the sequence fails 1 Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule execution of the command The command is then...

Page 744: ...the maintenance object If the object is a trunk the field contains xxx yyy where xxx trunk group number yyy member number If the object is a private CO line the field contains P xxx where xxx private...

Page 745: ...ing group number 1 8 The number associated with each TSC in a signaling group The number of times each test in sequence is repeated Command is validated and then a scheduling form displays to schedule...

Page 746: ...IP addresses of the hop points and the final destination Observed round trip delay from the source to each hop point If no reply is received from a potential hop point the IP Address field contains bl...

Page 747: ...ormance Output The following shows an example output for the C LAN traceroute command For Medpro boards the clan port 1 17 qualifier does not appear Action Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login...

Page 748: ...which the traceroute command is issued Time ms Time from the board to each intermediate destination in milliseconds If an error occurs at a node the entry is repeated with an error code immediately fo...

Page 749: ...andard reliability The command verifies that a software card mem is present and then if present proceeds to reprogram the flash memory and perform a level 4 restart During the restart of the system th...

Page 750: ...nd duplex systems This is due to the clearing of memory during the level 4 reset Periodic and Scheduled Maintenance Periodic and scheduled maintenance is suspended during the upgrade Error and Alarm L...

Page 751: ...of the processor The only recovery procedure is to power down and power up the system since the presence of a software card mem will cause a software upgrade ERASING MEMORY The rest of the memory is b...

Page 752: ...ervention REPLACE SOFTWARE MEM CARD WITH TRANSLATION MEM CARD The system technician is prompted by a beep and this text string on the Manager I to replace the software card mem with the translation ca...

Page 753: ...s chapter is organized into several sections that provide introductory information as well as packet bus fault isolation and correction procedures The sections of the chapter are as follows Remote Mai...

Page 754: ...chart is intended to be the normal starting point for isolating and resolving Packet Bus problems However anyone who is unfamiliar with Packet Bus maintenance should read the introductory sections to...

Page 755: ...d in the Packet Bus Fault Correction section in this chapter Tools for Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction The following list discusses several tools that are or may be required to perform Packe...

Page 756: ...urs when leads on the packet bus become connected together Such a connection can occur due to component failures on the packet bus interface of a circuit pack a failure of the cables between carriers...

Page 757: ...k An explanation of how each circuit pack assists in packet bus maintenance is also included NOTE The MOs involved with each circuit pack are listed in brackets Documentation for each maintenance obje...

Page 758: ...esponding alarms while others cause service outages without alarming the Packet Bus although the failed circuit pack s should be alarmed The following list discusses the effects on the Packet Bus of a...

Page 759: ...lures that do not affect all endpoints on that packet bus may occur Therefore a packet bus failure should not be ruled out even if some packet service is still present A circuit pack can fail in a man...

Page 760: ...lly a catastrophic TDM Bus failure one that affects both TDM Buses disables ALL traffic in the system while a catastrophic Packet Bus failure affects only Packet traffic This means that all TDM traffi...

Page 761: ...or acted upon ISDN BRI endpoint BRI SET BRI DAT ASAI ADJ in line error are neither placed into the error log nor acted upon Circuit pack and port in line errors that are not related to the Packet Bus...

Page 762: ...us problem is still not resolved the same procedure is attempted for the control complex circuit packs 4 If the problem is still not resolved or if the Packet Bus faults are known to have open leads a...

Page 763: ...LED to respond to a change in the state of the Packet Bus In normal switch operation the Maintenance Test provides the visual feedback of the Packet Bus state When standalone mode described in the nex...

Page 764: ...inal Therefore if the Manager I can be used for this operation and this depends on the switch configuration and on customer requirements remember to restore the original communication parameters befor...

Page 765: ...a loss of service to the Packet Bus This is true because reconfiguration is not performed in standalone mode Therefore this procedure should be considered a service disrupting procedure If the system...

Page 766: ...s not recognize the presence of the circuit pack If the standalone mode is entered successfully the following is displayed on the connected terminal Figure 9 1 Normal Standalone Mode Display CAUTION I...

Page 767: ...e display In the display an S indicates a shorted lead an O indicates an open lead and a blank indicates no fault Figure 9 2 Example Standalone Mode Display The information within a standalone mode di...

Page 768: ...123 9 16 Issue 4 May 2002 Figure 9 3 Packet Bus Leads on the Backplane Front View SLOT XXX Backplane Separation GND GND L8 H0 SB H2 H4 SF H6 H7 H8 SS 5v 5v 5v 5v 5v L5 LP L2 L4 L1 5v L7 GND LF GND GND...

Page 769: ...May 2002 9 17 555 233 123 Figure 9 4 Packet Bus Leads on the Backplane Back View 5v LP L2 L4 L7 L8 H0 SB H2 H4 SF H6 H7 H8 GND SS GND GND 5v 5v 5v 5v 5v L5 L1 GND L3 GND L6 GND HP H1 GND H3 GND H5 GND...

Page 770: ...nce documentation in Chapter 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures Correct any problems with the TN771 Maintenance Test Packet Bus port as described in that section If the TN771 Maintenance Test cir...

Page 771: ...ause ISDN BRI failure in an EPN but it could not be the cause of a failure in the PPN Whenever the flowchart refers to the Maintenance documentation for a specific MO keep in mind that the repair proc...

Page 772: ...ge 1 of 2 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO To page 2 NO NO NO NO A Are there alarms or errors TDM CLK C Is only a single PN affected D Are there alarms or errors against PKT INTF F Are ther...

Page 773: ...ts K Is the problem isolated to a single board H Are there alarms or errors against M T PKT Are the packet bus problems resolved Are the packet bus problems resolved Are the packet bus problems resolv...

Page 774: ...larms should be resolved before any other Packet Bus fault isolation is attempted NOTE All TDM CLK problems should be resolved before the process is continued even if the problems refer only to the TD...

Page 775: ...in 286 systems 386 systems or later systems that are using the Packet Bus must be TN570s Using TN776s results in an EPN where TDM traffic works but Packet traffic does not work g If a TN771 is not pre...

Page 776: ...e is actively running on the Packet Bus at the time the status system command is issued the data reported for the Packet Bus may be inconsistent The reason is that this data is updated by the maintena...

Page 777: ...Chapter 10 Maintenance Object Repair Procedures NOTE Keep in mind that even though the steps discussed in the previous list may fail to resolve the problem the steps are not necessarily fault proof Co...

Page 778: ...ket Bus and Packet circuit packs been resolved NOTE If all alarms are resolved issue the clear pkt command This command attempts to put the switch back into the service state by resolving any BRI prob...

Page 779: ...Correction procedures at that point 3 After implementing the repair procedure for the circuit pack and regardless of whether this procedure succeeds or fails determine if the Packet Bus fault is still...

Page 780: ...but is resolved when the circuit pack is removed either the circuit pack or the backplane pins in that slot caused the problem If the backplane pins are intact replace the circuit pack NOTE In a multi...

Page 781: ...ighten or replace the pins reinsert the circuit pack restore power refer to the Restoring Power section in Chapter 5 and repeat Procedure 2 beginning with Step 2 for the same circuit pack WARNING If t...

Page 782: ...Also problems with the backplane pins need not be checked for Determining if the problem is resolved by removing circuit packs is sufficient In a system without High or Critical Reliability do the fo...

Page 783: ...wer down the carrier Refer to the Removing Power section in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures b Straighten or replace the pins c Insert the same circuit pack d Restore power to the carrier Refe...

Page 784: ...ar carrier first unplug the cable that connects the carrier to the next carrier and then replace the cable with a termination resistor see Figure 9 6 on page 9 21 When the length of the Packet Bus is...

Page 785: ...res 4 Determine if the packet bus fault is still present 5 If the fault is present go to Part 2 Part 2 Processor Port Network 1 Terminate the Packet Bus so that it extends only from the Active control...

Page 786: ...t Networks 1 Terminate the Packet Bus so that it extends only from the carrier that contains the Active Expansion Interface to the nearest carrier that contains the Maintenance Test circuit pack Place...

Page 787: ...rms Resolve the first alarmed entry first because it may affect the rest of the alarmed entries System alarmed and user reported troubles may exist at the same time Always clear the alarmed troubles f...

Page 788: ...repair procedures MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation A B C D or E and SS is the ad...

Page 789: ...system goes on battery backup which is known as Nominal Power Holdover NPH If power is restored before the NPH time expires the alarm is resolved Each basic control cabinet has separate batteries for...

Page 790: ...ironment P sh r 1 513 Any AC Power Query Test 78 WARNING OFF test environment P sh r 1 FILTER CARRIER A CARRIER B A I R F L O W S4 631 S4 631 RING GENERATOR S3 FRONT VIEW A H D 1 DA BATTERY BATTERY CH...

Page 791: ...minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to ABORT with Error Code 2000 check for system powering problems with the A carrier PPN or EPN Resolve all DC POWER alarms Then repeat the...

Page 792: ...nd rerun the test If the test still fails then the PR MAINT Maintenance Tape Processor in a PPN in a system without High or Critical Reliability the DUPINT Duplication Interface circuit pack in a high...

Page 793: ...ce circuit pack may be incorrectly reporting the problem Resolve all alarms against these Maintenance Objects and rerun the test 100 FAIL The switch is currently without AC power and AC Power maintena...

Page 794: ...e AC Power Query Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 10 3 AC Power Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On...

Page 795: ...itical Reliability the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system PPN or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system for the status of AC po...

Page 796: ...y the Duplication Interface circuit pack in a High or Critical Reliability system PPN or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system is incorrectly reporting a problem with...

Page 797: ...was due to an administered error The alarm raised major minor warning or none is specified in the Alarm Type field of the Administered Connection Administration Form Error Log Entries and Test to Cle...

Page 798: ...e 54 a b c o Any None Any OFF None 58 a b c l Any None Any OFF None 65 a b c d p Any None Any OFF None 66 a b c d p Any None Any OFF None 69 a b c d p Any None Any OFF None 81 a b c q Any None Any OFF...

Page 799: ...reshold specified by the customer is ignored d The address of the destination endpoint is an unassigned number 1 has an invalid number format 28 or is restricted form terminating calls Access Denied d...

Page 800: ...vice has not been purchased Check the routing pattern used by this Administered Connection and verify that the service type is correct If the service type appears correct check with the customer or ne...

Page 801: ...y 5 slots on a port cabinet The tests described in this manual apply only to switch side maintenance which tests circuit pack components related to the TDM bus interface The AUDIX system has an extens...

Page 802: ...itch as AUDIX reserved slots or ADXDP RS ADX8D RS In DP mode the TN566 pack supports up to 8 voice ports each with a primary information channel and a secondary information channel Ports are administe...

Page 803: ...Spp Table 10 7 EMBEDDED AUDIX Digital Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass r...

Page 804: ...This can be ignored if no user complaints are received If the problem persists replace the circuit pack see precaution at the beginning of this section Once the problem is resolved the alarm is retir...

Page 805: ...ry information channel voice and on the secondary information channel data associated with each EMBEDDED AUDIX port If this test fails on either channel the voice port is taken out of service Table 10...

Page 806: ...g heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone De...

Page 807: ...channel This test is the same as Conference Test 6 Only one value Pass Fail or Abort is generated as a result of the four tests run If any test fails or aborts the sequence is stopped 1 2 FAIL The NPE...

Page 808: ...TDM BUS errors Refer to TDM BUS to diagnose TDM BUS errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1003 ABO...

Page 809: ...of this port None FAIL The test failed for reasons external to the EMBEDDED AUDIX circuit pack 1 Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack by u...

Page 810: ...see XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack Port level maintenance is covered by ADX16A PT EMBEDDED AUDIX consists of 2 circuit packs that occupy 5 slots on a port carrier The tests described in this manual...

Page 811: ...System Maintenance 585 300 110 AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs the TN566 Multifunction Board MFB and the TN2169 Alarm Board ALB Because of its size this combination occupies 5 slots...

Page 812: ...release port PCSSpp command Table 10 10 EMBEDDED AUDIX Digital Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence...

Page 813: ...ice port This can be ignored if no user complaints are received If the problem persists replace the circuit pack see caution at the beginning of this section Once the problem is resolved the alarm is...

Page 814: ...NPE Crosstalk Test 9 This test verifies that this port s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and that it never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections If the NPE is not work...

Page 815: ...on 2 When the port it idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be in use 1 Use the display...

Page 816: ...status station command to determine when the voice port is available for testing 2 When the port it idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test re...

Page 817: ...same as Conference Test 6 Only one value Pass Fail or Abort is generated as a result of the four tests run If any test fails or aborts the sequence is stopped Table 10 12 TEST 13 Voice and Control Cha...

Page 818: ...R LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors Try a 1004 ABORT The port was put in use during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port PCSSpp to determine the voice port extension of the...

Page 819: ...fect to loss of use of this port None FAIL The test failed for reasons external to the AUDIX 1 Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit pack and the tone detector circuit pack by usi...

Page 820: ...as an extensive maintenance strategy that is described in EMBEDDED AUDIX System Maintenance 585 300 110 AUDIX resides on a combined pair of circuit packs the TN566 Multifunction Board MFB and the TN21...

Page 821: ...nected to this carrier If analog circuit packs on many carriers have this error check the ringing generator e AUDIX is not available to the switch Check the AUDIX system referring to EMBEDDED AUDIX Sy...

Page 822: ...and not to EMBEDDED AUDIX These tests always return PASS Battery Feed Test 35 Audits and Updates Test 36 Station Present Test 48 Tests 36 and 48 ABORT when AUDIX is not running NPE Crosstalk Test 6 Th...

Page 823: ...at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test Try a 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The sys...

Page 824: ...he test for the particular analog station being tested enter the change station extension command and change the Test field on the Station Form from n to y 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was...

Page 825: ...e wait until it is idle before retesting 3 When the port is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test ha...

Page 826: ...d port did not conference the tones correctly This causes noisy and unreliable connections 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections User reported troubles...

Page 827: ...The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors Refer to TDM BUS to diagnose TDM BUS errors 1 If system has no TDM BUS errors and is no...

Page 828: ...sary system resources for this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times FAIL The reflective Loop Around Test failed This causes noisy or unreliable connections or other user...

Page 829: ...nal Device Alarm EXT DEV Maintenance Object is used for the off board external device alarm MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and...

Page 830: ...dule you must assign the port location on the data form and connect a modem to the port The analog data module may be used for connection to a CDR output or other adjuncts as needed These ports are te...

Page 831: ...pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40960 40975 40977 none 15 b Any Audits and Up...

Page 832: ...voltage is absent If only 1 analog circuit pack in the system has this problem then replace the circuit pack If only analog circuit packs on a particular carrier have this error then the ringing gene...

Page 833: ...a valid call This result is also reported for the system s Music On Hold port when it is off hook which it usually is 1 Enter display port PCSSpp to determine the station s extension 2 Enter status s...

Page 834: ...mes 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal for example the modem pool...

Page 835: ...test fails PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by examining t...

Page 836: ...the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the s...

Page 837: ...l fails replace the board PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining station trun...

Page 838: ...ported for the system s Music On Hold port when it is off hook which it usually is 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port PCSSp...

Page 839: ...e to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximu...

Page 840: ...D to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are...

Page 841: ...imum of 5 times 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable or it may be disruptive to terminal equipment other than a voice terminal for example the...

Page 842: ...y the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times PASS The software and the port processor have the same status User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port te...

Page 843: ...BORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted 1 Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension 2 Use the status station command to determin...

Page 844: ...st may cause 1 To enable the test for a particular station being tested enter change station extension and set the Test field on the station from n to y 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not...

Page 845: ...may also pass if no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located very far from the switch User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examin...

Page 846: ...etermine the service state of the port 3 If the port is in use wait until the port is idle and retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate tim...

Page 847: ...been disabled by administration The default for the Test field on the station form is y Determine why this field has been set to n on this station this may be due to the ringing application test 48 t...

Page 848: ...t is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station equipment User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by examini...

Page 849: ...es of the software this action disables Tests 6 7 161 and 35 as well as Test 48 No maintenance of the terminal connected to the 16 Port Neon Analog Line circuit pack is performed except to determine w...

Page 850: ...results of Test 48 Table 10 24 16 Port Neon Analog Line Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If al...

Page 851: ...probably a problem with the ringing generator e Test 48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance If this ringing is disturbing the customer or the terminal equipment...

Page 852: ...tem resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command t...

Page 853: ...minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use escalate the problem 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not...

Page 854: ...and 3 are cleared Replace the board only if the test fails PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port test...

Page 855: ...display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then th...

Page 856: ...og station being tested enter change station extension and set the Test field on the station from n to y 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100...

Page 857: ...nd by examining station trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect...

Page 858: ...resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command to de...

Page 859: ...is field has been set to n on this station this may be due to the ringing application test 48 which can be customer or terminal disturbing 1 To enable the test for the particular analog station being...

Page 860: ...ative User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by examining the station 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID...

Page 861: ...tatus station command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is i...

Page 862: ...roblem The switchhook audit failed The other updates were not performed because of this failure This may occur when the audit is performed at the same time that the terminal equipment goes off hook Us...

Page 863: ...should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by examining the station 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to...

Page 864: ...id call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is...

Page 865: ...hases are in use 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration The default for the Test field on the Station form is y thus you may want to determine why this field has been set to n on thi...

Page 866: ...switch This test may also pass if no terminal equipment is connected and the terminal is located very far from the switch User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other por...

Page 867: ...s test is designed to check the on board transmission capabilities of the NPE the codec and the battery feed chip of the analog port A Tone Detector and a Tone Generator talk and listen on the same pa...

Page 868: ...nd at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service...

Page 869: ...an External Alert or Announcement port 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration The default for the Test field on the Station form is y thus you may want to determine why this field ha...

Page 870: ...The port is able to provide an analog transmission path to the station equipment User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring or by...

Page 871: ...s the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or G 1 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for example A B C D or E and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located for...

Page 872: ...some loop equipment If this is the case then the test should be disabled using the Tests field of the change station extension command No maintenance of the terminal connected to the 8 Port Analog Li...

Page 873: ...minal Table 10 31 8 Port Analog Line Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the...

Page 874: ...via the change station extension command However on some releases of the software this disables Tests 6 47 and 35 as well as Test 48 e Test 47 may cause a false alarm when the port is connected to of...

Page 875: ...able The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the serv...

Page 876: ...ain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use escalate the...

Page 877: ...able time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available Either a system allocation to get information about the port or to put the port into a service state failed or...

Page 878: ...to the TDM BUS Maintenance documentation 3 Look for TONE BD and or TONE PT errors in the error log If present refer to the TONE BD Maintenance documentation and the TONE PT Maintenance documentation 4...

Page 879: ...t Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issu...

Page 880: ...ort is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT Sys...

Page 881: ...000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available Either a system allocation to get infor...

Page 882: ...is defective User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests by examining station wiring by examining the station and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly tr...

Page 883: ...ORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station co...

Page 884: ...this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1 FAIL This does not indicate a hardware problem The switchhook audit failed and the other updates were not performed because...

Page 885: ...rior to Vintage 6 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane...

Page 886: ...e Tone Detector is within acceptable limits The Conference Circuit Test verifies that the NPE channel for the port being tested can correctly perform the conferencing function As part of Test 47 the o...

Page 887: ...eon Analog Line Issue 4 May 2002 10 101 555 233 123 Figure 10 3 Analog Loop Around and Conference Test TONE LEVEL MEASUREMENT TONE SOURCE TDM BUS BFC CODEC NPE ETC PORT BFC BATTERY FEED AND HYBRID CHI...

Page 888: ...mes 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test were not available The port may be busy with a valid call This could be a Music on Hold port 1 Enter display port PCSSpp to determine the stat...

Page 889: ...s available for testing retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 3 If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use escalate the problem 1005 ABORT The test was aborted du...

Page 890: ...ence test or the noise test failed This could cause noisy or unreliable connections or users calling this port may hear an echo The problem can also be off board as described below 13 The reflective l...

Page 891: ...r all ports on a circuit pack a 5 volt power problem is indicated If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective The 6...

Page 892: ...examining the station and by ensuring that the terminal is correctly translated as off premises or on premises NOTE This test always passes for TN712 Analog circuit packs prior to Vintage 14 and TN742...

Page 893: ...ook or for wiring problems 1004 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station e...

Page 894: ...hy this field has been set to n on this station this may be due to the ringing application test 48 which can be customer or terminal disturbing 1 To enable the test for a particular station enter chan...

Page 895: ...roperly If this is the case disable the test using the change station extension command enter n into the Test field Note that this action also disables tests 6 7 161 and 35 on this port PASS The stati...

Page 896: ...t config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release...

Page 897: ...t assign the port location on the data form and connect a modem to the port The analog data module can be used for connection to a CDR output or other adjuncts as needed These ports are tested the sam...

Page 898: ...pe Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description a...

Page 899: ...has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes 1 To clear the error reseat or replace the circuit pack d Error Type 257 this is an in line error and can only be resolved over time This e...

Page 900: ...aring error codes associated with the Battery Feed Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Se...

Page 901: ...ld port when it is off hook which it usually is 1 Enter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station s extension 2 Enter status station extension to determine the service state of the port 3 If the p...

Page 902: ...s 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1005 ABORT This test was aborted due to a configuration problem The test is not applicable for this type of analog port This error can be ignore...

Page 903: ...ts allocated time slots Investigate user reported troubles on this port by running other port tests by examining station wiring or by inspecting the station 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the in...

Page 904: ...t 1 minute intervals no more than 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1004 ABORT A valid call seized the port during the test and aborted the test 1 Use the display port UUCS...

Page 905: ...f the test still fails replace the board PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections Investigate user reported troubles on this port by running other port tests by examining station tr...

Page 906: ...also reported for the system s Music On Hold port when it is off hook which it usually is 1 Enter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station s extension 2 Enter status station extension to determi...

Page 907: ...rt is a TTI port Enter the display port UUCSSpp command the display shows that the port is a TTI port Enter the list configuration command the display shows a t for the port 2 If both commands indicat...

Page 908: ...se this port is inoperative 2 Investigate user reported troubles on this port by running other port tests by examining station wiring or by inspecting the station 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate...

Page 909: ...the port is in use wait until the port is idle before testing Retry the command at 1 minute intervals no more than 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 1005 ABORT This test wa...

Page 910: ...equipment goes off hook 1 Use the status station extension command to determine when the port is available 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals no more than 5 times 3 If the test continues to fa...

Page 911: ...re and the port processor have the same status Investigate user reported troubles on this port by running other port tests by examining station wiring or by inspecting the station 0 NO BOARD The test...

Page 912: ...tus station extension to determine the service state of the port 3 If the port is in use wait until the port is idle Retry the command at 1 minute intervals no more than 5 times 4 If the test continue...

Page 913: ...Administration has disabled the test The default for the Test field on the station form is y Determine why this field has been set to n on this station this may be due to the ringing application Test...

Page 914: ...estigate user reported troubles on this port by running other port tests by examining station wiring or by inspecting the station NOTE This test may also pass if no terminal equipment is connected and...

Page 915: ...ermine the service state of the port 3 If the port is in use wait until the port is idle Retry the command at 1 minute intervals no more than 5 times 4 If the test continues to abort escalate the prob...

Page 916: ...an be ignored 1018 ABORT Administration has disabled the test The default for the Test field on the station form is y Determine why this field has been set to n on this station this may be due to the...

Page 917: ...The port provides an analog transmission path to the station equipment Investigate user reported troubles on this port by running other port tests by examining station wiring or by inspecting the stat...

Page 918: ...ement boards you must have G3V4 software or later and at least one TN750C up to ten are allowed or TN2501AP VAL Only one TN750A B may be present in the system when a TN750C is used The announcements f...

Page 919: ...y are not lost This should be done as soon as the announcements are recorded on the circuit pack or whenever they are changed assuming that the circuit pack is in proper working order see Note NOTE Un...

Page 920: ...d the only solution is to re record all announcements To do this follow these steps a Remove the announcement board b Remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive Do this so that announcements are no...

Page 921: ...command Likewise integrated announcements can be downloaded to the Announcement circuit pack with the restore announcements command Both of these commands require a free data module of NETCON type to...

Page 922: ...09 18 0 busyout board PCSS WARNING OFF release board PCSS 23 c 0 None WARNING OFF 125 d None MINOR ON 170 e 0 None MINOR ON 217 f 0 None WARNING OFF 257 65535 Control Channel Test 52 MINOR ON test boa...

Page 923: ...ions for Red alarm in the Control and Port Circuit Pack Status Led section in Chapter 7 LED Interpretation NOTE The alarm is logged about 11 minutes after the circuit pack has been removed and or SAKI...

Page 924: ...and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR use the change circuit pack command to readminister this slot to match the circuit pack inserted e Error Type 170 Announcement board is not allowe...

Page 925: ...errors are logged in conjunction with Error Type 1281 Aux Data 17699 Since that error see Note j means that a defective speech memory location was found the announcement checksum error is also logged...

Page 926: ...downloading announcements The extension can be found by using list data module System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Investigate tests in the order presented in Table 10 45 on...

Page 927: ...ailed Circuit pack cannot be used Announcement speech memory is cleared when this test fails Therefore when the problem has been resolved announcements must be rerecorded or downloaded to the circuit...

Page 928: ...ddition associated with each failure is an error in the Error Log Error Type 14 The Aux Data indicates the number of the first defective announcement found This number corresponds to the announcement...

Page 929: ...se the list data module command See Note a at end of table for more information 1 Wait until the blocking event is finished and then run this test again An upload or download could take up to 45 minut...

Page 930: ...ment Play back the announcement If the announcement sounds defective rerecord it or delete it If the error code was greater than one indicating that there is more than one defective announcement run t...

Page 931: ...is in this state yield the following abort codes Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test 206 with code 1024 Ports 1 AND 9 abort Test 205 with code 2000 Board level Tests 209 and 210 abort with code 1024 3 The save...

Page 932: ...ory Array PSMA Test 206 see ANN PT Announcement Port Maintenance documentation for a description of this test is run on the two ports first to make sure that they are working properly Table 10 48 TEST...

Page 933: ...some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Look for TTR LEV errors in the Error Log If present refer to the TTR LEV TTR Level Maintenance documentation 2 Look for TONE PT errors in the Error Log If...

Page 934: ...the test continues to abort and there is no download in progress escalate the problem 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period If Error Type 1538 is pr...

Page 935: ...intervals a maximum of 5 times 1 3 FAIL Test failed The error code indicates at which speech compression rate the test actually failed one being the first rate tested three being the last 1 Reset the...

Page 936: ...Frame Match Inquiry Test 211 The super frame is a means by which the SP synchronizes with the 140AY device on the Announcement circuit pack If the super frame is not synchronized the SP is not able t...

Page 937: ...again If the test continues to fail replace the circuit pack see Warning 2 If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test failing replace the circuit pack even if Step 1 works...

Page 938: ...orted The ANN BD may be defective or the Active Tone Clock circuit pack TONE BD in the same Port Network as the ANN BD may be marginal and is causing this test to fail 1 Reset the circuit pack via the...

Page 939: ...beginning of this Maintenance procedure 4 If there are recurring alarms on this circuit pack caused by this test failing replace the ANN BD even if the previous steps were successful WARNING Replacing...

Page 940: ...ments Digital speech is converted from its TDM Bus form to an internal storage form for recording and vice versa for playbacks by the 140AY device on the circuit pack which has 16 channels one for eac...

Page 941: ...to mistakenly enter this command thereby destroying valid speech memory especially if the system tape does not have a valid announcement file on it 5 Whenever the Announcement circuit pack is replace...

Page 942: ...done To play back an announcement press station keypad digit 2 To delete an announcement press station keypad digit 3 confirmation tone is given if the delete worked Announcements can also be played b...

Page 943: ...e error reinsert or replace the circuit pack Table 10 51 Announcement Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Se...

Page 944: ...s in the system By clearing error codes associated with the Channel Administration Memory Array CAMA Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Chann...

Page 945: ...test ABORT Internal System Error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times FAIL Test failed Announcements played back on this port may sound corrupted 1 Reset the circuit pack vi...

Page 946: ...cleared remotely by performing a soft reset to the circuit pack busyout board PCSS this command drops all calls in progress on the Announcement circuit pack reset circuit pack using the reset board PC...

Page 947: ...ORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Look for TTR LEV erro...

Page 948: ...rors found by the Tone Detector 1 Reset the circuit pack via the reset board PCSS command and then run this test again If the test continues to fail replace the circuit pack see Warning 2 If there are...

Page 949: ...Detector never synchronized Check for active GPTD PT errors and refer to GPTD PT General Purpose Tone Detector Port CPTR Maintenance documentation to diagnose them first 1 If there are no active GPTD...

Page 950: ...Board level Tests 209 and 210 abort with code 1024 3 The save restore announcements command times out with Error encountered can t complete request The Announcement circuit pack lock up can be cleare...

Page 951: ...e command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort escalate the problem FAIL Test failed Announcements cannot be played back over this port 1 Reset the circuit pack...

Page 952: ...Circuit Pack to the system To save or restore announcements an ANNOUNCEMENT Data Extension must be administered and at least one DATA CHL Network Control Data Channel must be in the in service idle s...

Page 953: ...r actions c User pressed cancel while announcements were being saved by the active PE d User pressed cancel while announcements were being saved by the standby PE e Error occurred while restoring anno...

Page 954: ...32002 Announcement circuit pack is in use 1 Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three times 2 If the save restore announcements command fails escalate the problem 32003 Announcement...

Page 955: ...e status command to check the status of all DATA CHLs At least one DATA CHL should be in the in service idle state 32010 32013 DATA CHL is not administered or it is unavailable A DATA CHL is required...

Page 956: ...Check for any other ANNOUNCE errors and take corrective action If there are no other announcements errors do the following 1 Retry the command at two minute intervals a maximum of three times 2 If th...

Page 957: ...erved slots needed NOTE Refer to LAN BD Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors See also ASAI PT ASAI EPT BRI Line maintenance documentation for related line information See the follow...

Page 958: ...the DEFINITY switch currently sends to all other port boards The MAPD handles proper interpretation of these messages You should note that the PC on the MAPD and the switch itself control the LEDs an...

Page 959: ...orts but only 8 of the 12 ports can be administered at any one time Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO ASAI EPT MAJOR1 1...

Page 960: ...ures for those tests 2568 i 0 None 3329 j Any Signaling Link Status 626 MAJ WNG OFF 3584 3839 k 0 1 None 3841 l 4095 0 None 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequ...

Page 961: ...mmand and perform the associated repair procedures for those tests 2 Check the health of the adjunct by following the recommended repair procedures of the manufacturer of the adjunct if the preceding...

Page 962: ...ASAI adjunct i The adjunct identification is invalid Check the vendor ID or software running on the ASAI adjunct j This occurs when the point to point signaling link to the endpoint goes down except w...

Page 963: ...mentation to determine which set of operations is supported by switch and the adjunct Adjunct administration turning off operations not implemented by the switch may resolve the problem 34 No circuit...

Page 964: ...t presently available Requested bearer capability is implemented but not administered No B channel administered See code 50 above 63 Service or option not available Requested ASAI capability or resour...

Page 965: ...ption not implemented Requested service or option or combination of selected options is not supported implemented in switch or the adjunct 1 Consult switch and adjunct documentation to determine ASAI...

Page 966: ...the signaling link is bound when the link is connected at Layer 2 L2 established Table 10 58 TEST 626 Signaling Link Status Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1139 ABORT The Packet...

Page 967: ...link is disconnected at Layer 2 Since the signaling link associated with the endpoint has been identified by administration the link is only unbound from the endpoint when it is disconnected 1 Execut...

Page 968: ...cation running on the TN800 In non native mode only one type of port MOs will run at any time and the port type depends on the application running on the TN800 If the TN800 fails diagnostics in non na...

Page 969: ...both on board hardware problems and potential off board Packet Bus problems Table 10 59 ASAI PT Port Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level ASAI PORT On Off Board Test to Cl...

Page 970: ...hen the circuit pack detects an overflow of its receive buffers Run the Long Test Sequence and note the results of the Receive FIFO Overflow Counter Test 625 f This error occurs when the BRI Port Loca...

Page 971: ...iated with the port are in progress Failures of this test indicate either on board faults associated with the ASAI PT hardware on the circuit pack or problems with the LAN Bus which is used to form co...

Page 972: ...associated with the ASAI on the port to be torn down Note that third party calls established by an ASAI adjunct remain connected even though the port is taken out of service 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus...

Page 973: ...state Level 1 is also put into the deactivated state This could be due either to the system detecting a fault with the port or in response to a busyout port PCSSpp request 2100 ABORT Could not allocat...

Page 974: ...present for both ASAI BD and ASAI PT then release the board with the release port PCSS command and run the test again NOTE When you release a port you release all ports associated with it If certain p...

Page 975: ...o run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 3 FAIL Received a status of Level 1 Deactivated the port is out of service 1 Issue the status bri port PCSSpp command to...

Page 976: ...rror Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of 5 times reset...

Page 977: ...command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times Any FAIL The TN800 circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type The Error Code field contains the value of this counter 1 Retry the command at...

Page 978: ...test is used only to send messages to the ASAI PT and therefore should neither abort nor fail ASAI uses a fixed TEI value of 1 Table 10 64 TEST 270 Clear Error Counters Error Code Test Result Descrip...

Page 979: ...ack connects to the switch through a single slot in the backplane The number of slots occupied by the MAPD pack is supplied by the board when inserted The TN800 in R5EM is 3 slots wide The TN800 requi...

Page 980: ...call control signaling One D channel handles signaling for a group of B channels that combine to form a signaling group ATM SGRP B channel service states The ISDN specification defines 2 service stat...

Page 981: ...B channel in the OOS FE state Out of Service Near E nd OOS NE The NPE Crosstalk Test has failed or the trunk is busied out Calls cannot be placed or received Maintenance Far End MTC FE A request has...

Page 982: ...g trunk on the far end switch Warning Far end busied out Check the status of the far end switch Pending In Service Pending Maint None Maintenance message timed out waiting for reply Wait 2 minutes aft...

Page 983: ...o the results of the Call State Audit Test 257 Table 10 67 ATM BCH Error Log entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence f...

Page 984: ...S FE state f Error Type 769 inconsistent SERVice or SERVice ACKnowledge message Possible causes SERVice or SERVice ACKnowledge message received containing a change status that is more available than t...

Page 985: ...outgoing or incoming call that uses the alarmed trunk System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate problems in the order presented in the table below When you clea...

Page 986: ...e Audit Test 257 X X ND ISDN Test Call Test 258 X ND Continued on next page Table 10 69 TEST 255 Signaling Link State Audit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation None ABORT Internal s...

Page 987: ...nks that are in the OUT OF SERVICE FAR END state It asks the far end switch to bring the trunk back into the IN SERVICE state and waits 2 minutes for a reply If the first request times out the service...

Page 988: ...Retry the command up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals 1116 ABORT Trunk not in Out of Service Far end state and country protocol other than 1 1117 ABORT Service state audit message outstanding 1 Wait 2...

Page 989: ...Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1018 ABORT Maintenance disabled 1 Enable maintenance by entering y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 1019 ABORT...

Page 990: ...lem 1 See the ATM INTF TN2305 6 maintenance object 1004 ABORT B channel in use 1 See if a call is active Run status trunk grp mbr command 2 If the service state is In Service Idle retry the test 1005...

Page 991: ...mbr 2 Try the test again 1119 ABORT Test call aborted normal call attempted 1 Wait for the call to terminate normally or drop it by running busyout trunk grp mbr 2 When the trunk is idle retry the tes...

Page 992: ...mand up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals 2 If the test continues to abort there may be a serious internal problem in the Maintenance Test Digital Port See the M T DIG Maintenance Test Digital Port mai...

Page 993: ...en try again 2215 2219 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2220 ABORT Call terminated prematurely 1 Wait 1 minute and try again 2221 2226 ABORT I...

Page 994: ...ansmit control messages between two endpoints User information or bearer channels B channels carry digitized voice and digital data and are assigned to DS1 ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints Call control si...

Page 995: ...ect is test port UUCSSpp where pp is for ports 9 32 Table 10 73 ATM D channel Error Log entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test...

Page 996: ...dled independently of the ATM CES signaling link maintenance raising the possibility of inconsistent states Table 10 75 TEST 643 Signaling Link Board Check Error Code Test Result Description Recommend...

Page 997: ...cuit pack with the same type LED states The ATM INTF circuit pack has the standard red green and yellow LEDs The red and green LEDs have the traditional use red indicates an alarm condition green mean...

Page 998: ...rt the logically administered circuit pack c Error Type 217 The ATM circuit pack is physically present but has not been given a personality Remove the circuit pack or administer it using the add atm p...

Page 999: ...minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times FAIL The circuit pack failed to return the circuit pack code or vintage 1 Retry the command a few times for a maximum of 5 times 2 If the problem continues to...

Page 1000: ...e information see ATM TRK Circuit Emulation Service Circuit Pack The operation of the entire ATM signaling group depends on several other entities the ATM DCH signaling channel port the TN230X Interfa...

Page 1001: ...The Aux Data field contains Layer 3 protocol information used by internal counters Table 10 80 ATM SGRP Signaling Group Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board...

Page 1002: ...k 1 Pay particular attention to the results of Test 636 Primary Signaling Link Hardware Check in the test sequence When the link does recover the B channels are negotiated back to the In Service state...

Page 1003: ...not respond within the allotted time 1 Investigate elements of the ATM D channel s ATM DCH for both this switch and the Far end switch If Test 637 fails twice in a row the B channels are alarmed and m...

Page 1004: ...is trunk group for validity of interexchange carriers requested IXC field 3846 The far end switch has indicated that the B channel trunk is not acceptable for use in the call for which it was requeste...

Page 1005: ...een subscribed to or purchased for this trunk This could indicate a local administration problem a mismatch between the local administration and that of the network provider 1 From the circuit pack an...

Page 1006: ...in the Aux Data field Test 256 Service State Audit is the important test in the sequence 2 If Test 256 passes yet the customer continues to complain of unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN t...

Page 1007: ...ror Type 3890 3928 A call was denied because of a basic incompatibility between the type of call and either the facilities selected by the routing pattern or the called user itself This error might be...

Page 1008: ...are problems with the ATM D channel port ATM DCH Table 10 82 System Technician Demanded Tests ATM SGRP Order of Investigation ShortTest Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Non destruc...

Page 1009: ...Result Description Recommendation 1132 ABORT Internal system error The port location for the D channel is not known This condition should not be possible since an administered ATM circuit pack must be...

Page 1010: ...heck passes the Layer 2 Query test may still fail if the Signaling Channel at the far end has not been administered correctly or if the Signaling Channel has been busied out 3 Verify that the Signalin...

Page 1011: ...ed to ensure that the communication path between the switch and the far end is up and operational and that the two endpoints can properly exchange ISDN control messages Table 10 85 TEST 1291 Remote La...

Page 1012: ...of ABORT with Error Code 2500 PASS A message was sent to the far end switch or terminal adapter The ISDN PRI specification allows up to 2 minutes for a reply 1 Check the Error Log for ATM SGRP errors...

Page 1013: ...and the EPNs Either circuit pack personality requires SONET OC 3 or SDH STM 1 fiber cable connections between the circuit pack and the ATM switch As a trunk board it supports direct connection betwee...

Page 1014: ...a varied number of virtual circuits depending on the switch and the administration of the circuit pack Table 10 87 lists the possibilities for various Avaya DEFINITY Server models Virtual trunk group...

Page 1015: ...naling groups trunks per circuit pack Max available ports Reserved ports Total ports T1 24 8 192 ports 1 8 256 E1 31 8 248 ports 1 8 256 Continued on next page Table 10 90 ATM TRK LED interpretation L...

Page 1016: ...d is listed the 256 ports are not busyout release atm signaling group Busyout or release of an ATM signaling group within a trunk group status atm signaling group Show current status of an ATM signali...

Page 1017: ...y seated in the slot 771 h 26 ATM Error Query Test 1259 WRN OFF test board UUCSS 1281 i ATM Board Error Query Test 1259 WRN MIN OFF test board UUCSS r 1 1537 j 12 None WRN MIN ON 1538 k 0 None WRN MIN...

Page 1018: ...board or the Digital Signal Processor DSP selected for this test has malfunctioned 1 Run test board UUCSS 2 Take the corrective action specified for Test 1298 g Error Type 769 770 the ATM switch is re...

Page 1019: ...loopback test The problem is in the ATM TRK circuit pack Replace the circuit pack The far end circuit pack or ATM switch fails the loopback test The problem is in the far end circuit pack or ATM switc...

Page 1020: ...he MUX and or the ATM switch are connected snugly Run test board UUCSS command If Test 1259 fails with Error Code 18 connect a fiber back to back in a looped mode one strand of fiber connecting the tr...

Page 1021: ...d see if the yellow LED flash goes away If it does the problem is off board If the yellow LED continues to flash replace the circuit pack 23 High level path Remote defect Indicator HP_RDI The far end...

Page 1022: ...e ATM TRK circuit pack is hyperactive sending an abnormal number of control messages to the processor Use the following command sequence for this ATM TRK circuit pack 1 busyout board UUCSS 2 reset boa...

Page 1023: ...SYS LINK System Link maintenance objects and follow the repair procedures indicated 2 Run test board UUCSS against the ATM TRK circuit pack n Error Type 2306 too many parity errors in data received f...

Page 1024: ...598 fails Follow the repair procedures suggested for that test Test 598 passes See the PKT BUS Packet Bus maintenance object and perform the specified repair There are no errors against the packet bu...

Page 1025: ...larly if other circuit packs on the packet bus report the same error See the PKT BUS Packet Bus maintenance object and the packet bus fault isolation and recovery sections of the maintenance manual fo...

Page 1026: ...cover by itself u Error Type 3843 The firmware on the circuit pack is reporting a resource that is to low This error does not affect the service and no action is required v Error Type 3999 circuit pac...

Page 1027: ...to talk to or disconnect particular time slots The test passes if software successfully sends the downlink network update messages It aborts otherwise CAUTION Though normally nondestructive this test...

Page 1028: ...1 minute intervals 1019 ABORT The test aborted because a test was already running on the port Retry the command up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals FAIL Internal system error Retry the command up to...

Page 1029: ...request timed out 2100 ABORT Could not allocate needed system resources 2500 ABORT Internal system error Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals FAIL The ATM circuit pack responded incor...

Page 1030: ...t 598 Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1144 ABORT The packet bus in the PPN has a major alarm against it Run display alarms and display errors Perform the PKT BUS repair procedures as...

Page 1031: ...ABORT Could not allocate the required system resources Retry the command up to 5 times at 1 minute intervals If the test continues to abort escalate the problem 2000 ABORT Sanity test timed out Wait 5...

Page 1032: ...y reset 0 NO BOARD No board detected Check the error log for Error 125 wrong board or Error 131 no board and perform the appropriate repair if needed Ensure that the board is properly translated and i...

Page 1033: ...st request timed out 2031 ABORT SCD failure Unable to sent down link message 2100 ABORT Could not allocate needed system resources 2500 ABORT Internal system error Retry the command up to 3 times at 1...

Page 1034: ...d 7 Transmit Network Processor failed 8 Memory read failed 9 Dual UART chip failed 10 LANHO receive parity error 11 LANHO FIFO over flow error 12 LAN bus time out 13 LANHO Xmit FIFO overflow error 14...

Page 1035: ...digital counter and sends it to the tone receiver for verification If the circuit pack passes the circuit check the software checks the packet path by sending a packet from the packet interface circui...

Page 1036: ...olds the ATM TRK circuit pack Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals 1015 ABORT ATM TRK circuit pack not busied out Busyout the ATM circuit pack Rerun the command 1033 ABORT ATM TRK cir...

Page 1037: ...ive tone clock on the port network and verify that a tone is reaching the ATM TRK circuit pack If not correct the condition Run test board UUCSS long If the test continues to fail replace the ATM TRK...

Page 1038: ...eplace the ATM TRK circuit pack Rerun test board UUCSS long 6 FAIL A previously established looparound was not released Run reset board UUCSS Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals If t...

Page 1039: ...nformation to the board Retry the command up to 3 times at 1 minute intervals If the test aborts with the same error code escalate the problem PASS The ATM TRK circuit pack is successfully updated wit...

Page 1040: ...rd DSP Test 1293 Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1002 ABORT Could not allocate time slots Traffic could be heavy or time slots could be out of service Run display errors and follow a...

Page 1041: ...rm is raised for Error Type 2817 or 1818 replace the circuit pack If a WARNING alarm is raised this is a non service affecting error and the circuit pack can still process calls XY8 PASS The test pass...

Page 1042: ...installed or tone detectors out of service Identify and correct any TTR LEV TTR Level errors listed in the Error Log Resolve any TONE PT Tone Generator errors listed in the Error Log Retry the test u...

Page 1043: ...ine circuit packs with vintage greater than 50 For circuit pack level problems see XXX BD The maintenance strategy for ports on the TN568 operating in 8 port digital mode is described in ADXDP PT ADX1...

Page 1044: ...ally occupied by the circuit pack is supplied by the board when inserted The TN568 is 2 slots wide the functional slot and a reserve slot The reserve blank slot to the left of the functional slot is a...

Page 1045: ...rts 12 ports each of which provides access to ISDN stations Voice and circuit switched data from the ISDN stations are carried on the Time Division Multiplex TDM Bus Signaling is carried over the Pack...

Page 1046: ...rocedures 0 Any Any Any test board PCSS sh r 1 1 a Any None MINOR ON 18 b 0 busyout board PCSS WARNING OFF release board PCSS 23 c 0 None WARNING OFF 257 d 65535 Control Channel Loop Test 52 MINOR ON...

Page 1047: ...etween the switch and this circuit pack Execute the test board PCSS command and refer to the repair procedures for the Control Channel Loop Around Test 52 e An on board hardware failure has been detec...

Page 1048: ...ervice when a threshold number of these errors is reported to the switch Clear the alarm via the following commands busyout board PCSS reset board PCSS test board PCSS long clear release board PCSS If...

Page 1049: ...ocedures l These errors are not service affecting No action is required These errors are reported by the circuit pack when it receives a bad control channel message from the switch The auxiliary data...

Page 1050: ...e documentation as Control Channel Loop Around Test 52 SAKI Sanity Test 53 Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation as SAKI Sanity Test...

Page 1051: ...f 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail verify the validity of the Packet Bus Run the Packet Bus maintenance test with the test pkt P long command If any Packet Bus tests fail refer to the PKT BUS P...

Page 1052: ...in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO BRI DAT WARNING1 1 The alarm level for ASAI adjuncts may be administered using the set options command The alarm level can be set indep...

Page 1053: ...or example 01 Full Name of MO BRI PORT MINOR test port PCSSpp l ISDN BRI Port BRI PORT WARNING test port PCSSpp sh ISDN BRI Port ABRI PORT MAJOR2 3 2 The alarm level for ASAI and Avaya adjunct ports m...

Page 1054: ...efer collectively to ports on the TN556 an TN2198 circuit packs which are connected to either BRI endpoints or ASAI or Avaya adjuncts For BRI endpoints each B channel may support voice or circuit swit...

Page 1055: ...problems For more information on the circuit pack and endpoints refer to the BRI BD ISDN BRI Line Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation the BRI SET ISDN BRI Endpoint Maintenance documentation and ASA...

Page 1056: ...1 a a Level 1 Status Inquiry 621 WRN MAJ MIN WRN2 OFF test port PCSSpp sh r 2 18 busyout port PCSSpp WRN OFF release port PCSSpp 130 b WRN ON test port PCSS sh 257 c c EPF Inquiry 622 WRN MAJ MIN WRN...

Page 1057: ...BRI LINE circuit pack detects that the EPF is in an over current condition The aux data field contains one of the following values blank this indicates that the EPF Status Inquiry failed due to an ove...

Page 1058: ...7 f This error occurs when broadcast signaling links associated with this port have too much link establishment related traffic This could occur if an endpoint on this port is sending link establishme...

Page 1059: ...en an SPID initialization request is made from an endpoint and the switch determines that the SPID value is invalid or is a duplicate of another SPID that is already initialized at Layer 3 on the port...

Page 1060: ...ots reserved for other connections If the NPE is not working correctly one way and noisy connections may be observed This test is part of a port s Long Test Sequence and takes approximately 20 to 30 s...

Page 1061: ...1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use escalate the problem 1005 ABORT This test is not valid for this type of trans...

Page 1062: ...calls associated with the port are in progress Failures of this test indicate either on board faults associated with the BRI PORT hardware on the circuit pack or problems with the LAN Bus which is use...

Page 1063: ...nsactions associated with ASAI or Avaya adjuncts on the port to be torn down Note that third party calls established by an ASAI or Avaya adjunct remain connected even though the port is taken out of s...

Page 1064: ...ode is returned at that point This test is not executed for ABRI PORT ATT PORT LGATE PT ATTE PT because the B channels associated with the port are not used by ASAI or Avaya adjuncts 2100 ABORT Could...

Page 1065: ...how a Loop Around Test is performed for the B channels The figure shows a terminal connected to a BRI line board using a TN556 If a TN2198 is used the terminal would be connected to a NT1 and the NT1...

Page 1066: ...em has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may b...

Page 1067: ...ated previously this test runs a TDM Loop Around Test on each B channel This indicates that the loop around failed on one of the channels Error Code 1 indicates that the TDM Loop Around Test failed on...

Page 1068: ...a BRI port at the physical layer that is Level 1 Level 1 can be in one of three possible states Activated Pending Activation or Deactivated The Activated state is the correct state for an ISDN BRI por...

Page 1069: ...evel 1 Status Inquiry Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1187 ABORT The board port or station may have been busied out by a technician 1 Look in the Error Log for Error Type 18 port bus...

Page 1070: ...en proceed to step 2 For the TN2198 verify that the connections are good between the switch and the NT1 Verify that the NT1 has power 2 As necessary check and repair the wiring between the circuit pac...

Page 1071: ...the endpoint or adjunct Execute the test port PCSSpp command and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry test to verify the repair If this test is still failing proceed to Step 2 2 For BRI en...

Page 1072: ...of all the tests Follow the repair procedures for any tests that fail Verify repair of the problem by executing the test port PCSSpp command and by determining that the Level 1 Status test passes If...

Page 1073: ...the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts repeatedly a maximum of five times reset the circuit pack via the busyout board PCSS and reset board PCSS commands 2 If the test...

Page 1074: ...unct verify that the wiring meets the configuration rules defined in DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring 555 204 111 It does not indicate a problem with the ISDN BRI circuit...

Page 1075: ...minute intervals a maximum of 5 times value FAIL The BRI LINE circuit pack is still detecting errors of this type The Error Code field contains the value of this counter 1 Retry the command at 1 minut...

Page 1076: ...flow Error Counter Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If the test aborts r...

Page 1077: ...int Identifier TEI values and layer 3 reinitialization This test is used only to send messages to the BRI PORT ABRI PORT ATT PORT LGATE PT ATTE PT and therefore should neither abort nor fail Table 10...

Page 1078: ...G2 2 The alarm level for ASAI and Avaya adjuncts may be administered using the set options command The alarm level can be set independently for Off Board and On Board alarms to WARNING MINOR or MAJOR...

Page 1079: ...le CONVERSANT Voice System These circuit packs contain 12 ports of line circuit interfaces each of which operates at 192 kilobits per second kbps with two B channels and one D channel as specified in...

Page 1080: ...of the results of maintenance testing of the ISDN BRI Set or the ASAI and Avaya Adjunct may be affected by the health of the ISDN BRI circuit pack and Port These interactions should be kept in mind w...

Page 1081: ...NG MAJOR WARNING2 OFF release station ext 130 b WARNING ON test port PCSS sh 257 c Any BRI Layer 3 Query 629 WARNING MAJOR WARNING2 OFF test station ext r 2 test data module ext r 2 351 d 0 None WARNI...

Page 1082: ...e 3840 4095 m n 0 None 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 2 Major alarms o...

Page 1083: ...air procedure for Test 629 When this error occurs for an ASAI or Avaya adjunct the Aux Data field indicates the state of the ASAI link or Avaya link and whether an invalid response or no response was...

Page 1084: ...and established states Software will suspend activity to this endpoint for 75 minutes when the endpoint is alarmed due to this problem note that service suspension does not occur if the endpoint is an...

Page 1085: ...by system technician When this error occurs an alarm is raised against the endpoint or adjunct Execute the test station extension short command and pay particular attention to the results of the Sign...

Page 1086: ...request System transaction capacity for adjunct or switch is exceeded 1 Re engineering of adjunct services my be required If problem persists escalate problem to the next tier 63 Service or Option Not...

Page 1087: ...3847 indicates that sets on the port do not support level 3 initialization Consult the Set Service documentation Service or Option Not Implemented 79 Service or Option Not Implemented Requested servi...

Page 1088: ...usy out and release the port 3 If the problem still persists replace stations on the port 4 If the problem still persists escalate to the next tier SWITCH RESOURCES NOT AVAILABLE 34 No circuit or chan...

Page 1089: ...ed traffic For BRI endpoints This cause value is not logged For ASAI or Avaya Adjuncts 1 See CallVisor protocol reference manual 2 If step 1 does not resolve the problem escalate to the next tier Serv...

Page 1090: ...ered to support the identical capabilities as the switch If there is a mismatch in the administered capabilities then readminister the switch and or the adjunct to establish a consistent set of desire...

Page 1091: ...atus Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence 65 Bearer Service Not Implemented Requested service not implemented in switch or endpoint 69 Requeste...

Page 1092: ...M is a level 3 message that conveys management and maintenance information between a communications system and a BRI terminal For endpoints of this type the signaling link is bound when the link is co...

Page 1093: ...e port network is out of service 1 Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus 2 After completing Step 1 execute the test port long PCSSpp command and review the results of the BRI Port Local LAN...

Page 1094: ...lease port PCSSpp command and run the test again If the error is present for BRI SET only then release the circuit pack via the release port PPCSS command and run the test again If the error is presen...

Page 1095: ...sary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1113 FAIL The signaling link is not bound to the adjunct or endpoint For BRI endpoints supporting...

Page 1096: ...ment of the signaling link 2 Examine the results of the Signaling Link Status Test 626 which is run as part of this command If this test aborts or fails follow the repair procedure for Test 626 3 If t...

Page 1097: ...d and run the test again If the error is present for BRI SET only then release the circuit pack via the release port PPCSS command and run the test again NOTE When you release the circuit pack you rel...

Page 1098: ...busyout and release the endpoint to resolve any endpoint alarms resulting from failure of this test 2 If the endpoint supports these procedures and the test continues to fail assume the endpoint is de...

Page 1099: ...ABRI PORT tests the words BRI SET ASAI ADJ ATT ADJ can be changed to BRI PORT ABRI PORT ATT ADJ 1005 ABORT The endpoint is not administered to support XID Testing 1 If the endpoint documentation refle...

Page 1100: ...release station command a If this error type is present for BRI PORT and BRI SET then release the port via release port PCSSpp command and run the test again b If the error is present for BRI BD BRI...

Page 1101: ...ed in the Hardware Error Log 2012 ABORT Internal System Error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 tim...

Page 1102: ...ommand If this test aborts or fails follow the repair procedure for the Signaling Link Status Test 3 Escalate problem if BRI Layer 3 Query Test continues to abort 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port...

Page 1103: ...both BRI BD and BRI PORT then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again NOTE When you release the circuit pack you release all ports associated with it If cer...

Page 1104: ...face 2069 ABORT The endpoint has returned an error response to the switch sent application message 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2000 FAIL No response is received from...

Page 1105: ...ts test continues to abort escalate the problem 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out of service 1 Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus 2 After completing Step 1 execute the...

Page 1106: ...via the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again If the error is present for both BRI BD and BRI PORT then release the circuit pack via the release board PPCSS command and run the test again...

Page 1107: ...e correct administered port address for the endpoint or adjunct under test the test passes see Service SPID Display which follows If after one minute nothing is displayed on the test set the test fail...

Page 1108: ...1 12 ext extension one and two one through 99999 SPID service order profile identifier Restricted Service Starting Display Column 1 8 14 25 31 PCSSpp ext1 SPID111111 ext2 SPID222222 Bound to First End...

Page 1109: ...o report air flow problems The Maintenance Tape Processor in a Standard system PPN the Duplication Interface circuit pack a PPN for a High or Critical Reliability system and the EPN Maintenance circui...

Page 1110: ...f the temperature sensors S1 through S4 there are actually two S3 sensors and two S4 sensors as well as the location of the fans the AHD1 circuit pack and the filters The figure also shows other envir...

Page 1111: ...fan A variable speed fan has two connectors a two pin connector for the 48 volt input power for backward compatibility and the five pin Molex connector for speed control and alarm circuitry The 48 vo...

Page 1112: ...A CARRIER A FILTER A H 631 DA 631 DB 631 DB CARRIER B F L O W S4 FILTER AC AC AC A FANS 3 FRONT 3 BACK F1 D S4 1 S2 S3 S1 631 DA AC F3 CARRIER C 631 A I R DB AC F2 631 DA 631 DA 631 DB 631 DB F4 CARRI...

Page 1113: ...the front fan located to the extreme left 4 Disconnect the power plug from the fan 5 Loosen and remove the other retaining screw on the fan 6 Remove the fan from the fan assembly CAUTION DO NOT TOUCH...

Page 1114: ...ly cover by pulling the cover outward Remove the power connector from each inoperative front fan 2 The following must be done to determine if the front fan or the rear fan has failed a Test the front...

Page 1115: ...fan assembly 4 Loosen and remove the retaining screw nearest the power plug on the defective fan DANGER 48 volt power is present on the fan plug 5 Disconnect the power plug from the defective fan 6 Lo...

Page 1116: ...the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test environment P sh r 1 1 Any Cabinet Temperature Query Test 122 MINOR ON test environment P sh r 3 257 Any Cabinet Temperature Query Test 122 MAJOR ON test...

Page 1117: ...ion of this test This test shows up in the test sequence only if there is a TN768 Tone Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested Cabinet Temperature Query Test for Non Variable Speed Fans 12...

Page 1118: ...th Error Code 2000 check for system powering problems with the A carrier PPN or EPN Look for and resolve all AC POWER and CARR POW alarms in a multicarrier cabinet system or DC POWER alarms in a singl...

Page 1119: ...tor Check that there is 48 volt DC between pins 3 9 11 and 2 8 10 If there is 48 volt DC power at the connector there should be power to the fans If the fans are not running replace the AHD1 If the fa...

Page 1120: ...enance objects first then rerun the test If the test still fails escalate the problem 5 If the fans are running at the high speed check the items on list that follows Any on of the items could be rest...

Page 1121: ...circuit pack the fans or the S3 or S4 sensors are defective Replace these items one at a time in the order listed Rerun the test between each replacement Failures can occur on the Maintenance Tape Pr...

Page 1122: ...wiring harness connector Verify that there is 48 volt DC between pins 3 9 11 and 2 8 10 If there is 48 volt DC at the connector there should be power to the fans If the fans are not running replace t...

Page 1123: ...ncorrectly reporting the temperature at the top of the cabinet Replace sensor S1 and rerun the test If the test still fails escalate the problem 3 FAIL The AHD1 circuit pack has reported both air flow...

Page 1124: ...ries and Test to Clear Values Notes a The memory card translation storage space is at least 98 full b This alarm has been downgraded set option MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run...

Page 1125: ...8 of its translation storage space This test runs during periodic and schedule maintenance on demand test card mem long save translation Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D...

Page 1126: ...owngrade the alarm to WARNING set option 3 Rerun the test 2012 2106 2114 ABORT Internal System Error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2013 2100 ABORT Could not locate the necess...

Page 1127: ...se 9 the memory card has no write protect switch and no equivalent software mechanism Software erase and write operations on a memory card take longer as the card usage increases Replace memory cards...

Page 1128: ...t 7 Verify the new circuit pack and memory card function test network control long 8 If the alarm resolves store the current system translations and announcements if applicable to the memory card save...

Page 1129: ...tines to run that might otherwise not run It also helps to prevent the loss of translations that were not saved by the save translation command and were also not saved because daily maintenance was pr...

Page 1130: ...hange system parameters maintenance Page 1 of 4 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS Product Identification 1000000000 First OSS Telephone Number 5551212 Abbrev Alarm Re...

Page 1131: ...ff Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any A...

Page 1132: ...ouncement file 116 Memory card capacity does not match system configuration 118 Uses announcement feature without available announcement file and memory card capacity does not match system configurati...

Page 1133: ...Data same as Note c above f Error Type 3329 Switch cannot load translations In a standard system the alarm invokes Emergency Transfer Follow the repair procedure for a standard system that appears be...

Page 1134: ...ult 12 Parameters were out of range due to software fault 13 Command aborted 14 Illegal magic number 15 Trapped driver when reading the memory card 16 Memory card is absent 17 Could not find second di...

Page 1135: ...translation and save announcements operations fail on demand test card mem long The test and relevant applications such as save translation and save announcements cannot run at the same time Order of...

Page 1136: ...5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem 2110 2111 ABORT ABORT Memory card not present Switch does not recognize the memory card 1 Insert a formatted memory card into the slot at the TN2...

Page 1137: ...e command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 If the problem persists escalate the problem 104 FAIL Corrupt and irrecoverable directories 105 FAIL Cannot write 0 to the memory card 106 FAIL Cannot e...

Page 1138: ...1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem 2110 2111 ABORT ABORT Memory card not present Switch does not recognize the memory card 1 Insert...

Page 1139: ...scalate the problem 2013 2100 none ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate t...

Page 1140: ...te the problem 2013 2100 none ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of five times 2 If the test continues to ab...

Page 1141: ...emory card The memory card is not formatted or the directories of the memory card are corrupted 1 Replace the memory card with a new formatted memory card 2 Retry the command at one minute intervals a...

Page 1142: ...ation capacity Raises a WARNING alarm Contains an announcement file for systems with announcement circuit pack Raises a WARNING alarm Reaches 98 of its reserved storage space Raises a WARNING alarm Ta...

Page 1143: ...es announcement feature without available announcement file and memory card does not match system configuration System translation reaches 98 of capacity Memory card uses announcement feature without...

Page 1144: ...lete 2 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 3 If the situation persists escalate the problem 2012 2106 2114 ABORT There is an Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute int...

Page 1145: ...irrecoverable directories 105 FAIL Cannot write 0 to the memory card 106 FAIL Cannot erase memory card 107 FAIL Cannot write data into memory card after erasing 1 Replace the memory card 2 Retry the...

Page 1146: ...r to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections AC POWER AC Power for DC Powered Systems CUST ALM Customer Provided Alarming Device or POWER Battery Battery Charger for DC Powered...

Page 1147: ...iers and carriers C D and E are the port carriers However carrier B can be recycled only if the Active Expansion Interface Link and Active Tone Clock circuit pack are in the A carrier Loss of the 631...

Page 1148: ...oltages Power Supply 5 48V 5V 165V Cabinet Position 631 WA yes no no no Left 631 WB no yes no no Right 631 AR yes no no no Left 631 BR no yes no no Right 631 DA yes no no no Left 631 DB no yes yes no...

Page 1149: ...ARRIER A FILTER A H 631 DA 631 DB 631 DB CARRIER B F L O W S4 FILTER AC AC AC A FANS 3 FRONT 3 BACK F1 D S4 1 S2 S3 S1 631 DA AC F3 CARRIER C 631 A I R DB AC F2 631 DA 631 DA 631 DB 631 DB F4 CARRIER...

Page 1150: ...AC POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT F3 631 DB 631 DB FUSE LOCATIONS FUSE LOCATIONS PACK IS IN SAME CARRIER FRONT OF CABINET ARE NOT VISIBLE FROM ON BACK OF CABINET AND THE 3 FANS ARE ACTUALLY AC F6 NOTE THE 63...

Page 1151: ...DC F4 F5 F6 20A AC 20A AC 20A AC 20A AC 20A DC FUSE TIP FUSE RETAINER FUSES F1 F7 ARE ILLUSTRATED AT THE LEFT FUSES F8 F9 ARE SYMMETRICAL AND CAN BE MUST BE TAKEN TO INSTALL THEM FUSE TIP FIRST INSERT...

Page 1152: ...Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 555 233 123 10 366 Issue 4 May 2002 Figure 10 15 631WA or 631WB AC Power Unit STATUS LEDS RED LOCKING LEVER LOCKING SLIDE OWER ORD OUTLET AMBER...

Page 1153: ...W Carrier Port Power Unit for AC Powered Systems Issue 4 May 2002 10 367 555 233 123 Figure 10 16 631AR or 631BR AC Power Unit STATUS LOCKING LEVER LOCKING SLIDE POWER CORD OUTLET LED ON OFF CIRCUIT B...

Page 1154: ...ier of a PPN system refer to Replacing power supplies and fans in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures before replacing the power unit 1 Set the power switch to OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Mov...

Page 1155: ...and set the power switch to ON Replacing a 631DA or 631DB AC Power Unit If the power unit to be replaced is in a control carrier of a PPN system refer to Removing Power and Restoring Power in Chapter...

Page 1156: ...CO TRK Maintenance documentation Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Notes a Where P is an appropriate port network number taken for the PORT field of the Error Log b Run the Power Un...

Page 1157: ...n for a description of this test e Refer to EXT DEV External Alarm Maintenance documentation for a description of this test f Refer to RING GEN Analog Ring Generator Maintenance documentation for a de...

Page 1158: ...pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system for the status of pair of power units in the specified carrier If both power units are on and functioning then the test passes If both power units are not on...

Page 1159: ...sing the test environment P command where P is the appropriate port network number 2 If the test fails follow the repair procedures described for Test 127 If problem persists follow normal escalation...

Page 1160: ...imum of 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to ABOR...

Page 1161: ...its in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures Otherwise use the recycle carrier PC command where PC is the appropriate port network and carrier in an attempt to bring back the power units for this c...

Page 1162: ...l shows a red status LED check for bent pins and cable placement in the affected carrier There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance Tape Processor Duplication Interface and EPN Maintenance c...

Page 1163: ...or a multicarrier cabinet system using an external DC power source refer to one or more of the following Maintenance documentation sections AC POWER AC Power for DC Powered Systems CUST ALM Customer P...

Page 1164: ...control carriers and carriers C D and E are the port carriers However carrier B in the EPN can be recycled only if the Active Expansion Interface Link and Active Tone Clock circuit pack are in the A c...

Page 1165: ...no yes yes no Right Side TN736 no no yes no TN752 no no yes yes TN755B no no no yes CARRIER A FILTER A H S2 S3 S1 CARRIER C A I R CARRIER B F L O W S4 FILTER CARRIER D CARRIER E A I R F L O W RING S3...

Page 1166: ...ir Procedures 555 233 123 10 380 Issue 4 May 2002 Figure 10 19 Power Distribution Unit for DC Powered Systems PDU 58890CF list measurements occupancy summary Page 1 Command Line command list measureme...

Page 1167: ...tems PDU8890CF 1 Circuit Breakers CB1 CB5 are located on the back of the PDU Power Distribution Unit Fans 3 Front 3 Back 644A Carrier C 645B 644A Carrier B 645B 644A Carrier A 645B S2 S3 S1 a i r f l...

Page 1168: ...58890CF 1 A R B R C R D R E R FLTA FLTB A L B L C L D L E L OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON TB2 48VDC Return OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 2A Circuit Breaker...

Page 1169: ...rier Port Power Unit for DC Powered Systems Issue 4 May 2002 10 383 555 233 123 Figure 10 22 644A Port Carrier Power Unit for DC Powered Systems STATUS LOCKING LEVER LOCKING SLIDE POWER CORD OUTLET LE...

Page 1170: ...outine Maintenance Procedures before replacing the port carrier power unit To replace the port carrier power unit follow the procedure below 1 If this is a 645B power unit set the power switch to OFF...

Page 1171: ...is not included in either the long or Short Test Sequences WARNING The Power Unit Recycle Test 126 is destructive For more information refer to the description of this test System Technician Demanded...

Page 1172: ...ocumentation for a description of this test NOTE This test only shows up in the test sequence if there is a TN768 Tone Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested Order of Investigation Short...

Page 1173: ...rrier cabinet system for the status of the pair of port carrier power units in the specified carrier If both port carrier power units are on and functioning then the test passes If both port carrier p...

Page 1174: ...port network number 2 If the test fails follow the repair procedures described for Test 127 If the problem persists follow normal escalation procedures PASS Both port carrier power units in the recycl...

Page 1175: ...status of the pair of port carrier power units in the specified carrier If both port carrier units are on and functioning the test passes If both are not on and functioning the test fails Table 10 14...

Page 1176: ...et If the carrier being tested is the 1A or 2A carrier or the 1B carrier in a High or Critical Reliability system see Troubleshooting Control Carrier Power Units in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance Proce...

Page 1177: ...einsert the circuit packs one at a time If the status LED shows red after reinserting a circuit pack replace the defective circuit pack If the status LED still shows red remove the Amphenol connector...

Page 1178: ...system or the EPN Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN multicarrier cabinet system If the status LEDs on both port carrier power units are not showing green the PR MAINT Maintenance Tape Processor DUPIN...

Page 1179: ...ance The CLAN TN799 circuit pack combines the functions of the PGATE and PI circuit packs into one circuit pack The PGATE or PI can be used with the CLAN to create an X 25 to TCP IP bridge for adjunct...

Page 1180: ...Control Channel Loop Test 52 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 20 257 d 513 e 4352 4357 MINOR ON 769 f 4358 1293 to 1295 g Any MINOR ON reset board UUCSS 1537 h Any MINOR ON 1794 i MINOR ON 1798 j 2049 k...

Page 1181: ...it pack does not affect service and can be ignored 1 Ignore this error unless the Control Channel Loop Test 52 fails 2 If Test 52 fails replace the circuit pack Repetitive failures of the Control Chan...

Page 1182: ...ers have overflowed 1 Attempt to clear the alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If the error recurs within 15 minutes replace the circuit pack j Error Type 1798 Unable to write translation RAM 1 Attempt to clear...

Page 1183: ...he socket was closed due to an error Errors are reported as log only Errors logged here are for the sockets that had no processor channels associated with them for example sockets to read SNMP data Th...

Page 1184: ...return NO BOARD List configuration command shows circuit pack and ports are installed properly If Then RSCL disconnects at link level Link fails Link cannot be reconnected quickly Switch raises MINOR...

Page 1185: ...orrespond to descriptions These errors do not affect service however they may cause reports of other errors that do affect service If Error Type 3843 begins to affect service it escalates to Error Typ...

Page 1186: ...machine that has an Interboard Link IBL aa Error Type 3862 Memory allocation failure By themselves these errors do not affect service System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Inve...

Page 1187: ...mmendation None 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem FAIL The...

Page 1188: ...rces to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem 1015 ABORT Port is not out of service 1 Busyout the circuit pack busyout board U...

Page 1189: ...st response within the allowable time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace th...

Page 1190: ...test response within the allowable time period 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS 3 If the problem persists replace...

Page 1191: ...ircuit pack problem packet bus problem problem with another circuit pack on the bus Table 10 150 TEST 597 Invalid LAPD Frame Error Counter Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 A...

Page 1192: ...rface Test 598 test board UUCSS long 3 If Packet Interface Test 598 fails refer to Packet Bus repair procedures PASS Circuit pack detects no errors Table 10 151 TEST 598 Packet Interface Test Error Co...

Page 1193: ...5 times 2 If the problem persists escalate the problem FAIL Circuit pack has detected a failure of the Packet Interface Test 598 1 Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 If the problem p...

Page 1194: ...vals up to 5 times 2 If command continues to fail examine the CLAN port measurements to determine which ports are heavily utilized and the processor occupancy of the circuit pack Low processor occupan...

Page 1195: ...e is successfully transmitted A failure may indicate a problem with This circuit pack The packet bus The packet interface circuit pack Table 10 153 TEST 601 Link Status Test Error Code Test Result Des...

Page 1196: ...refer to Packet Interface Test repair procedures 4 If the Packet Interface Test 598 passes refer to Packet Control Circuit Pack and Packet Bus repair procedures 3 FAIL Received no response to RSCL co...

Page 1197: ...ocumentation for related port information MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for ex...

Page 1198: ...n Hardware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier design...

Page 1199: ...em tones DTMF etc or detecting and generating necessary R2 MFC tones This error should accompany some percentage of failed calls If this error type is persistently logged then the call classifier circ...

Page 1200: ...tem is not heavily loaded then test the TDM BUS via the test tdm 1 2 command Refer to the TDM BUS TDM Bus Maintenance documentation for details 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of...

Page 1201: ...TN420 for A law systems 2 Test the active Tone Clock circuit pack in the port network This test is being executed via the test tone clock qualifier system technician command qualifier is the carrier o...

Page 1202: ...IL Forward or Backward MFC signals were not correctly generated or detected This impacts reception of incoming MFC calls 1 Run the short test sequence via the test port PCSSpp sh r 1 command 2 If the...

Page 1203: ...request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times F...

Page 1204: ...ion for related trunk information MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for example A...

Page 1205: ...and escalation Three trunk service states are specified in the DS1CO trunk maintenance They are out of service in which the trunk is in a deactivated state and cannot be used for either incoming or o...

Page 1206: ...tem Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generator field set to 4 Italy This alarm will be a MINOR alarm unless 75 or more trunks in this trunk group are out of service then the alarm will be upgr...

Page 1207: ...rror Type 257 The DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a hardware fault The Aux Data field contains the following error type 57392 no external release on PBX disconnect E030 Escalate the problem f Error...

Page 1208: ...he testing sequence For example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence NPE Crosstalk Test 6 One or more Network Processing Elements NPEs resides on each circuit p...

Page 1209: ...ort status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a max...

Page 1210: ...l circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not re...

Page 1211: ...hat are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board...

Page 1212: ...ot available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service sta...

Page 1213: ...ion or status trunk command to determine when the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and the port is not in u...

Page 1214: ...times 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors was found on the DS1 circuit pack loss of signal 1281 blue alarm 1793 red alarm 2049 yellow alarm 2305 or hyperactivity 1537 1 Look for the above...

Page 1215: ...ports on a circuit pack a 5 volt power problem is indicated If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective The 631DB p...

Page 1216: ...se busy board command 5 Issue the test board long command This should re establish the linkage between the internal ID and the port If this is not the case dispatch to check to ensure that there is a...

Page 1217: ...ecause system resources required to run this test were not available The port may be busy with a valid call Issue the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port...

Page 1218: ...nserted or the board is hyperactive see note below 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was foun...

Page 1219: ...aborted because system resources required to run this test were not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of...

Page 1220: ...f the trunk group to be tested Then change the entry in the Maintenance Test field on the form to y 2 Repeat the test 1020 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out of service 1 Look for DS1 BD erro...

Page 1221: ...me period 1 Enter the list configuration board PCSS command If the circuit pack is a TN767B vintage 8 or 9 a failure of test 314 causes a subsequent failure of test 7 due to a firmware bug Eventually...

Page 1222: ...nfig command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release bus...

Page 1223: ...ange FX or Wide Area Telecommunications WATS trunks TN438B Australia 8 port loop start TN447 United Kingdom 8 port ground start TN465 multiple countries 8 port loop start TN2138 Italy 8 port loop star...

Page 1224: ...op current 3 PBX On Hook Drop Message Open Tip Ring loop no loop current a CO Response CO goes to idle state see Note NOTE Except for the Netherlands Loop Start and UK Loop Calling Guarded Clearing tr...

Page 1225: ...ble 10 163 CO Trunk Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 57347 None 15 b any Port Audit Updat...

Page 1226: ...S l r 3 2561 d 57345 None 2817 a 57360 None 2817 a 57393 None 2817 d 57484 Dial Tone Test 0 MAJ MIN WRN2 OFF test port PCSS l r 1 3073 d 57376 None 3329 d 57408 None 3329 d 57484 Dial Tone Test 0 MAJ...

Page 1227: ...r type 1025 1281 as additional information for the system technician person The system technician person should check for the use of MFT Range extenders If there are extenders present and there are no...

Page 1228: ...that problem 769 57392 CO not releasing after call is dropped from PBX end off board alarm after several occurrences or the loop is not open after a disconnect on board alarm after several occurrences...

Page 1229: ...his error indicates an on board problem although the trunk may be functional On the TN2138 CO released the trunk at least 4 minutes after the PBX dropped the call This error code is log only and cause...

Page 1230: ...ou may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence For example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Notes a A demand test of Diagnostic...

Page 1231: ...te indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests Refer to the Status Commands section in Chapter 10 Maintenance Commands and Trouble Clearing Aids for a full descrip...

Page 1232: ...imum of 5 times 1005 ABORT Trunk has been administered as incoming only dial tone can only be obtained on outgoing trunks This is a normal condition 1018 ABORT Test has been disabled via administratio...

Page 1233: ...volt power problem is indicated If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective The 631DB power unit is used in a mediu...

Page 1234: ...od connection repeat test if wiring correction made 3 Locate another identical CO trunk and swap its wiring with one under test Repeat test on both trunks and determine if problem follows trunk or rem...

Page 1235: ...ble states You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 If the port status is idle then retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a user...

Page 1236: ...may cause it to fail with an off board fault 1 Repeat test If test passes ignore the original failure If test aborts follow the recommended procedures 2 Repeat test with CO line removed 3 If test fail...

Page 1237: ...ld be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board 1 Check to ensure that the board transl...

Page 1238: ...0 ABORT The port was seized by a user for a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service...

Page 1239: ...rvals a maximum of 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system may be oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors may be out...

Page 1240: ...te the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port was found to be transmitting in error This causes...

Page 1241: ...llowable time period 133 The 2804 Hz reflective loop around test aborted Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maxi...

Page 1242: ...the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the p...

Page 1243: ...ils for all ports on a circuit pack a 5 volt power problem is indicated If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present either the 631DB AC power unit or the 676B DC power unit may be defective...

Page 1244: ...this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board 1 Check to ensure that th...

Page 1245: ...on was successfully updated on the circuit pack User reported troubles on this port should be investigated by using other port tests and by examining trunk or external wiring If the trunk is busied ou...

Page 1246: ...em resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use display port PCSSpp to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk comm...

Page 1247: ...ircuit pack 1 Test the TN771 circuit packs 1901 ABORT This error occurs when the TN771 circuit pack uplinks a message that is not the proper response for this test The anticipated uplink messages are...

Page 1248: ...BORT No data returned from far end 1 The problem is with the far end system a technician at the far end should test the test line TN771 or ADFTC 1922 ABORT Steady unidentifiable tone from far end 1 Se...

Page 1249: ...71 circuit packs 1947 ABORT Noise with tone self check failed 1 Test the TN771 circuit packs 2000 ABORT The test timed out while waiting for a response from the TN771 circuit pack 1 Retry the command...

Page 1250: ...d by faulty test lines or switch paths If the measurements point to a facility problem report the results to the trunk vendor 8000 FAIL Measured transmission performance was in the marginal range as a...

Page 1251: ...ned in b to determine if there is an error b This error indicates that less than 25 of Trunk Group is available c This error indicates that a Port circuit pack in the system did not respond to a vinta...

Page 1252: ...determine if the circuit pack is inserted If not insert the pack If the circuit pack has already been inserted but the error persists replace the circuit pack Table 10 171 System Configuration Error...

Page 1253: ...2E11 12 2 3E11 13 0 1E12 13 1 2E12 13 2 3E12 14 0 1E13 14 1 2E13 14 2 3E13 15 0 1E14 15 1 2E14 15 2 3E14 16 0 1E15 16 1 2E15 16 2 3E15 17 0 1E16 17 1 2E16 17 2 3E16 18 0 1E17 18 1 2E17 18 2 3E17 19 0...

Page 1254: ...ntenance Circuit Pack 27 0 1A Network Control 27 1 2A Tone Clock 28 0 1A Tone Clock 28 1 2A01 28 2 3A01 29 0 1A Tone Clock 29 1 2A02 29 2 3A02 30 0 1A01 30 1 2A03 30 2 3A03 31 0 1A02 31 1 2A04 31 2 3A...

Page 1255: ...3D04 38 0 1D05 38 1 2D05 38 2 3D05 39 0 1D06 39 1 2D06 39 2 3D06 40 0 1D07 40 1 2D07 40 2 3D07 41 0 1D08 41 1 2D08 41 2 3D08 42 0 1D09 42 1 2D09 42 2 3D09 43 0 1D10 43 1 2D10 43 2 3D10 44 0 1D11 44 1...

Page 1256: ...47 2 3D14 48 0 1D15 48 1 2D15 48 2 3D15 49 0 1D16 49 1 2D16 49 2 3D16 50 0 1D17 50 1 2D17 50 2 3D17 51 0 1D18 51 1 2D18 51 2 3D18 52 0 1D19 52 1 2D19 52 2 3D19 53 0 1D20 53 1 2D20 53 2 3D20 56 0 1A03...

Page 1257: ...3A08 60 0 1A07 60 1 2A09 60 2 3A09 61 0 1A08 61 1 2A10 61 2 3A10 62 0 1A09 62 1 2A11 62 2 3A11 63 0 1A10 63 1 2A12 63 2 3A12 66 0 1B01 66 1 2B01 66 2 3B01 67 0 1B02 67 1 2B02 67 2 3B02 68 0 1B03 68 1...

Page 1258: ...71 2 3B06 72 0 1B07 72 1 2B07 72 2 3B07 73 0 1B08 73 1 2B08 73 2 3B08 74 0 1B09 74 1 2B09 74 2 3B09 75 0 1B10 75 1 2B10 75 2 3B10 76 0 1B11 76 1 2B11 76 2 3B11 77 0 1B12 77 1 2B12 77 2 3B12 78 0 1B13...

Page 1259: ...3B16 82 0 1B17 82 1 2B17 82 2 3B17 83 0 1B18 83 1 2B18 83 2 3B18 84 0 1B19 84 1 2B19 84 2 3B19 85 0 1B20 85 1 2B20 85 2 3B20 88 1 2A13 88 2 3A13 89 1 2A14 89 2 3A14 90 1 2A15 90 2 3A15 91 1 2A16 91 2...

Page 1260: ...essor Interface 98 0 1C01 98 1 2C01 98 2 3C01 99 0 1C02 99 1 2C02 99 2 3C02 100 0 1C03 100 1 2C03 100 2 3C03 101 0 1C04 101 1 2C04 101 2 3C04 102 0 1C05 102 1 2C05 102 2 3C05 103 0 1C06 103 1 2C06 103...

Page 1261: ...108 1 2C11 108 2 3C11 109 0 1C12 109 1 2C12 109 2 3C12 110 0 1C13 110 1 2C13 110 2 3C13 111 0 1C14 111 1 2C14 111 2 3C14 112 0 1C15 112 1 2C15 112 2 3C15 113 0 1C16 113 1 2C16 113 2 3C16 114 0 1C17 11...

Page 1262: ...5 1 2C18 115 2 3C18 116 0 1C19 116 1 2C19 116 2 3C19 117 0 1C20 117 1 2C20 117 2 3C20 other Unknown Circuit Pack 1 Development Laboratory only Table 10 171 System Configuration Error Log Entries Conti...

Page 1263: ...ce circuit pack whichever is specified for 1 minute In a High or Critical Reliability system the CPAD on the PPN is connected to the Maintenance Tape Processor on both carrier A and carrier B and the...

Page 1264: ...s the relay that activates the CPAD for 1 minute only within the port network specified If it takes longer than 1 minute to check that the CPAD has been activated the Repeat field on the test customer...

Page 1265: ...PAD via the Display System Parameter Maintenance screen form Compare these levels with the customer s specifications If Test 115 passes and the CPAD is not being activated check the connection of the...

Page 1266: ...BD Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation describes the circuit packs including the TN2401 TN794 NetPkt circuit pack and common set of tests The DATA BD MO is different from other XXX BD M...

Page 1267: ...e ext next 3 Select a Data Channel DATA CHL from the list list data Table 10 174 Data Channel Processor Circuit Pack Error Log entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test...

Page 1268: ...r Type 513 Circuit pack reported hardware failure 1 Install the circuit pack 2 Verify that alarm clears e Error Type 769 While not important an important error it can signal other errors 1 Look for ot...

Page 1269: ...errors in the order they appear in the table below If Error Type 3999 And traffic volume is Then Does not accompany Error Type 1538 Heavy Circuit pack is in service but sent at least half hyperactive...

Page 1270: ...escription Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1019 ABORT Test already...

Page 1271: ...al Command to Run Full Name of MO DATA CHL1 1 The test data module ext long command drops all sessions on all of the Data Channels Refer to Data Channel Reset Test 107 MINOR test data module ext l Dat...

Page 1272: ...d DATA CHL that resides on the TN777B Netcon or TN2401 TN794 NetPkt circuit pack in the specified carrier Table 10 177 Data Channel Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On...

Page 1273: ...tion Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Data Channel Reset Test 107 a X D Data Channel Dual Port Ram Test 108 a X D Data Channel Remote Maintenance Loop Aro...

Page 1274: ...5 b X X ND Control Channel Interface Test 92 b X X ND Control Channel Transmission Test 94 b X X ND 12 Volt Power Supply Test 701 c X X ND Memory Card Insertion Test 695 c X X ND Memory Card Format an...

Page 1275: ...ing over the DATA CHLs however existing connections are not and cannot be dropped Table 10 179 TEST 107 Data Channel Reset Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT Could not a...

Page 1276: ...DM Bus and Tone Clock circuit Tests 107 108 110 and 111 on the DATA CHL maintenance object can help to determine which data channel is defective NOTE If Error Code recommends busying out a CDR System...

Page 1277: ...and 111 are both PASS then there is a high probability that the target DATA CHL is not defective Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA CHL 1 Dete...

Page 1278: ...ity that the target DATA CHL is not defective Proceed with the remaining steps only if it is necessary to completely test the target DATA CHL 1 Determine if errors exist on links using target DATA CHL...

Page 1279: ...CHLs are administered list data module 2 If no other DATA CHLs are administered administer at least one 3 Determine if errors exist on links using target DATA CHL status link 4 If there are no errors...

Page 1280: ...e test results for Tests 110 and 111 for each DATA CHL 3 Remove DATA CHLs remove data module ext for which the results of Tests 110 and 111 were both FAIL 4 Replace the Netcon or NetPkt circuit pack a...

Page 1281: ...CHL or Netcon or NetPkt circuit pack are probably defective Busyout the links to all DATA CHLs busyout link Test the target DATA CHL test data module ext long If Test 107 result or Test 108 is FAIL re...

Page 1282: ...mean 1 of 2 problems d Target DATA CHL is busy and therefore not available for use e Internal system error If the results of Tests 110 and 111 are both PASS then there is a high probability that the...

Page 1283: ...stered administer at least one 5 Determine if links exist on all non target DATA CHLs status link 6 If links exist on all DATA CHLs busyout the links busyout link 7 Retry the command at 1 minute inter...

Page 1284: ...TA CHL not in use 2 Note the test results for Tests 110 and 111 for each DATA CHL 3 Remove DATA CHLs remove data module ext where Test results 110 and 111 were both FAIL 4 Replace the Netcon or NetPkt...

Page 1285: ...Time of Day clock on new circuit pack set time 5 Repeat the test 6 If Test 107 result is PASS and Test 108 result is FAIL 7 Replace the Netcon or NetPkt circuit pack when convenient 8 Repeat the test...

Page 1286: ...183 TEST 111 Data Channel Local Loop Back Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 4 ABORT Error Code 4 can mean 1 of 2 problems 1 Target DATA CHL is busy and therefore not available for...

Page 1287: ...inistered list data module 4 If no other DATA CHLs are administered administer at least one 5 Determine if links exist on all non target DATA CHLs status link 6 If links exist on all DATA CHLs busyout...

Page 1288: ...uit pack when convenient 5 Reset Time of Day clock on new circuit pack set time 6 Repeat the test 7 If Test 107 result is PASS and Test 108 result is FAIL replace the Netcon or NetPkt circuit pack whe...

Page 1289: ...hus there is a single DATA CON A High or Critical Reliability system has two Network Control circuit packs one in each of the two SPEs Thus there is a DATA CON on the Network Control circuit pack that...

Page 1290: ...nance software to run internally and to automatically clear the DATA CON errors and alarms System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Because the DATA CON uses the same set of tests...

Page 1291: ...ts For a description of this feature refer to ANN BD Announcement Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation Also if there are errors associated with the Announcement circuit pack refer to the ANN BD Main...

Page 1292: ...mine if Error Type 769 is logged again for the DAT LINE MO NOTE When displaying errors set the Active Alarms Only field to n If Error Type 769 reappears replace the DAT LINE circuit pack If Error Type...

Page 1293: ...rrors in the system By clearing error codes associated with the Digital Loop Around Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Order of Investigation...

Page 1294: ...Use status data module to determine when the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources t...

Page 1295: ...se to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maxim...

Page 1296: ...for testing 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid call Use status data module to determine when the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximu...

Page 1297: ...ate the problem if the test continues to abort 1006 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on this port Error Type 769 1 Refer to the procedure for Error Type 769 If Error Type 76...

Page 1298: ...esult Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The...

Page 1299: ...from the Network Control Data Channel 2005 ABORT The handshake between the data channel and the data line port failed 1 Look for DATA CHL errors in the Error Log If present refer to DATA BD Network Co...

Page 1300: ...ntenance documentation 2 Repeat this test 3 If the test fails again replace the Data Line circuit pack 2000 FAIL The test failed waiting for the transmitted data to be looped back 1 Look for DATA CHL...

Page 1301: ...that the power unit has a fault NOTE Physically removing a Carrier Port Power Unit from a single carrier cabinet system does not raise a DC POWER alarm The removal of the power unit is equivalent to...

Page 1302: ...is test NOTE Tests 117 and 118 only show up in the test sequence if there is a TN768 Tone Clock circuit pack in the port network being tested Table 10 190 Single Carrier Cabinet Power Error Log Entrie...

Page 1303: ...T System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowab...

Page 1304: ...ses power the system performs a Cold 2 restart to finish the login prompt appears at the administration terminal c Rerun the test If the test still fails proceed with Step 3 3 The DUPINT Duplication I...

Page 1305: ...rcuit Pack Maintenance documentation for circuit pack level errors See also DID TRK DID Trunk Maintenance documentation for related trunk information MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command t...

Page 1306: ...the in line errors log initialization tests periodic tests system technician demand tests and alarms escalation and elimination Two trunk service states are specified in the DID DS1 trunk maintenance...

Page 1307: ...se trunk grp mbr 130 d None WARNING ON test trunk grp mbr 257 e 57474 57473 513 f 57392 None MIN MAJ2 2 This alarm will only be raised when the System Parameter Country form has the Base Tone Generato...

Page 1308: ...ated external release on PBX disconnect Escalate the error h DS1 Interface circuit pack is out of service Look for DS1 BD errors in Hardware Error Log Refer to the DS1 BD DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack Mainte...

Page 1309: ...t PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use t...

Page 1310: ...ust wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously exist...

Page 1311: ...m steps 1 2 and 3 are cleared Replace the board only if the test fails PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other...

Page 1312: ...h a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state i...

Page 1313: ...en the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times 1018 AB...

Page 1314: ...the appropriate action When the TONE errors have cleared rerun the test 5 If the retry passes and troubles have been reported coordinate isolation with the CO Make sure that the switch the CO and any...

Page 1315: ...o board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the lIst config command and resolve any problems that ar...

Page 1316: ...us trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle b...

Page 1317: ...to in service 3 Retry the test command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is...

Page 1318: ...25 MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for example A B C D or E and SS is the addres...

Page 1319: ...nnection involves the connection between the trunk circuitry and the TDM Bus of the system It operates the switchhook connection to the TDM Bus Four tests are implemented to diagnose the health of a D...

Page 1320: ...t timing Additional in line testing is performed while a call is in progress Thus in line errors may occur during operation See Error Log table for a description of these errors These errors may be re...

Page 1321: ...57473 None WRN OFF 257 i 57474 None WRN OFF 257 j 57475 None WRN OFF 513 k 57392 None MAJ MIN WRN2 OFF 510 l 57393 None 769 Any Port Diagnostic 35 MAJ MIN WRN2 ON test port PCSSpp r 3 1025 Loop Aroun...

Page 1322: ...l digits too soon after seizure on a wink start trunk 1 Verify trunk administered wink immediate start parameter 2 Refer problem to CO e This is a software audit error that does not indicate any hardw...

Page 1323: ...lease This event only happens after the occurrence of Error Type 513 The CO released the trunk four minutes after the PBX dropped the call This event decrements the severity error count of Error Type...

Page 1324: ...Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension attendant number or trunk group member number of the port Use the status station status attendant or status trunk command to dete...

Page 1325: ...test has been aborted Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension attendant number or trunk group member number of the port Use the status station status attendant or status...

Page 1326: ...for EXP INTF errors in the error log If present refer to the EXP INTF Maintenance documentation 2 Look for TDM BUS errors in the error log If present refer to the TDM BUS Maintenance documentation 3 L...

Page 1327: ...the problem 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension attend...

Page 1328: ...ntervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use escalate the problem 1018 ABORT Test disabled via administration Verify that the Maintenance Tests field on th...

Page 1329: ...ective 2804 Hz tone test failed Poor quality transmission was detected to or from the port The problem may be off board CAUTION The port may still be operational or the fault may be off board connecti...

Page 1330: ...645B power unit is used in a medium cabinet powered by a DC power source The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack or a 631DB AC power unit but not both types of power units To...

Page 1331: ...Translate the board if necessary 2 Issue the busyout board command 3 Issue the reset board command 4 Issue the release busy board command 5 Issue the test board command This should re establish the li...

Page 1332: ...o determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is un...

Page 1333: ...led by trunk group administration Verify that the Maintenance Tests field on the Trunk Group Form is set to n To enable the test issue the change trunk group x command where x equals the number of the...

Page 1334: ...n this port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining connections 2 Refer problem to the CO 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board 1 Check to en...

Page 1335: ...e 10 200 TEST 36 Port Audit Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute inter...

Page 1336: ...is in service 1 Enter status command to verify that the trunk is in service If the trunk is in service no further action is necessary If the trunk is out of service continue to Step 2 2 Enter release...

Page 1337: ...rtion rather it is driven by successful registration of the endpoint It is maintained via a set of explicit TCP IP ping requests and errors reported by the User Manger software which terminates the H...

Page 1338: ...The test attempts to send a PING packet to the endpoint IP address as reported during registration The PING packet originates with the C LAN board through which the endpoint is registered If the PING...

Page 1339: ...e terminal has unregistered IP terminal only i Error Type 2305 this error indicates that there was an unsolicited Link Reset even though switch software believed the terminal to be functional and in s...

Page 1340: ...the local C LAN through which the signaling originates and the endpoint s IP address It then requests the local C LAN to execute a PING on the endpoint s address If the PING is successful the test pas...

Page 1341: ...ation failed Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times Investigate any C LAN ethernet port errors 1007 FAIL The system could not PING the registered endpoint via the C LAN Verify that at l...

Page 1342: ...present then release the port via the release station extension command and run the test again Make sure that the terminal is connected Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 3...

Page 1343: ...it timed out 2 ABORT ID request fails health bit returned from voice terminal is bad IP Terminal only Make sure voice terminal is connected and repeat test If test fails replace voice terminal and rep...

Page 1344: ...ta Adaptor DA All other devices currently supported by Digital Line circuit packs communicate on the primary information channel Figure 10 26 shows examples of digital line connectivity Only the TN754...

Page 1345: ...mation Channel Voice Physical Connection Digital Line Data Terminal TN2136 Digital Line Circuit Pack Secondary Information Channel Data Italtel Digital Telephone Model 1 2 Data Terminal IDCP CCITT V24...

Page 1346: ...esented as background information to help understand how maintenance software interacts with terminal parameter downloading Terminal Types The following terminals can be downloaded for Definity G3V3 a...

Page 1347: ...rameters are downloaded to programmable terminals Nonvolatile Memory Nonvolatile memory is used to store downloadable parameters in programmable terminals Therefore once the terminal has been download...

Page 1348: ...ns and when a port is inserted in software as a result of board insertion or translation change Automatic Download Actions 1 System Reboot Restart A global download action is started when periodic mai...

Page 1349: ...ty to an EPN is reestablished after that EPN was down b Add a station to the system with add station or change station c A TTI port is activated 5 Audits As part of periodic maintenance the hardware s...

Page 1350: ...k The first three green call appearance LEDs on the 84xx 603x terminal will be turned on for three seconds if the station was successfully downloaded as a result of an entry of a Refresh Terminal Para...

Page 1351: ...ype Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 a 40987 None WARNING OFF 1 b 1 to 20 None WARNING OFF 18 c 0 busyout port PCSSpp WA...

Page 1352: ...ack to the switch If the problem still exists replace the circuit pack Once the problem has been resolved the alarm will be retired after a predetermined amount of time c This error type is logged whe...

Page 1353: ...If the voice terminal still does not operate then check for a short in the wiring a damaged jack an incorrect type of voice terminal or a defective voice terminal Once the problem has been resolved it...

Page 1354: ...esented to the terminal to go into loop back mode Then data is sent to the terminal and when received back checked for consistency This test is run as a part of the craft command test long procedure I...

Page 1355: ...port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port Use status station or status attendant to determine the servic...

Page 1356: ...e state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain test You must wait until the port is idle before resetting Attendants are always in...

Page 1357: ...Run circuit pack tests to check the tone generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSSpp command 2 Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator c...

Page 1358: ...t may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this terminal Check the results of Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Test 13 If that test fails suspect the Digital Line circuit pack If t...

Page 1359: ...g the test 1 Check if port is being used If possible disconnect by toggling disconnect button on DTDM Retry command after 1 minute WARNING This action will drop the call in progress 2 If the test cont...

Page 1360: ...TTR TTR Level Maintenance documentation 2 Look for TONE PT errors in the Error Log If present refer to TONE PT Tone Generator Maintenance documentation 3 If neither condition exists retry the command...

Page 1361: ...capability the voice terminal must be manually unplugged for 30 seconds and then plugged back in to restore the PTC A message is returned reporting that either the PTC was successfully turned on succ...

Page 1362: ...the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting Attendants are always in use off hook if the handset is plugged in and the port...

Page 1363: ...tered A Conference Test is done next for the primary information channel This test is the same as Conference Test 6 Only one value Pass Fail or Abort is generated as a result of four tests run If any...

Page 1364: ...he command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extensio...

Page 1365: ...able to use this port 1 Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSSpp command 2 Resolve any problems that are detected...

Page 1366: ...ion extension command and run the test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 3 ABORT Station may be in ready for service or ou...

Page 1367: ...rt is a TTI port using either the display port command the display shows that the port is a TTI port or the list config command the display shows a t for the port 2 If either list config or display po...

Page 1368: ...service and every time the station s state changes from other states to in service Table 10 216 TEST 17 Station Digital Audits Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 ABORT Switchhook...

Page 1369: ...lay shows that the port is a TTI port or the list config command the display shows a t for the port 2 If either list config or display port indicate that the port is not a TTI port escalate the proble...

Page 1370: ...upported only on TN464 circuit packs The DS1 DIOD maintenance object monitors and maintains a DIOD trunk port on a TN464 UDS1 Interface circuit pack See UDS1 BD in this chapter for more information ab...

Page 1371: ...g Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test trunk grp mbr 1 a 57408 1 a 57487 57476 57477 57485 15 b Any Port Audit and Update Test...

Page 1372: ...runk to the out of service state No calls can be made on this trunk except the Facility Access Test Call For details on this feature refer to Facility Test Calls section in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenan...

Page 1373: ...Rotary Dial interdigit time is too short The DS1 interface circuit pack detects a hardware error on the DS1 DIOD trunk The trunk can not communicate with the far end because it is unable to interpret...

Page 1374: ...cuit pack has one SCOTCH NPE chip instead of several NPE chips The NPE controls port connectivity and gain and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that...

Page 1375: ...ystem may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors The status health command can be used to determine if the system is experiencing heavy traffi...

Page 1376: ...em resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1 circuit pack 12...

Page 1377: ...mmand at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be in use on a valid call Use the status station or status trunk c...

Page 1378: ...Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2053 ABORT At least one of the following errors is found on the DS1 circuit pack 1281 Loss of signal 1793 Blue Alarm 2049 Red Alarm 2305 Y...

Page 1379: ...disabled Table 10 220 TEST 36 Port Audit and Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal System Error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2...

Page 1380: ...calate the problem 1005 ABORT Test failed due to incompatible configuration administered in trunk group form 1 Look at the trunk group administration form and see whether the trunk is incoming only po...

Page 1381: ...rdware Error Log and follow the procedures given in the appropriate DS1 BD or UDS1 BD maintenance documentation for the listed error types FAIL The trunk cannot be seized for an outgoing call 1 Verify...

Page 1382: ...E and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located for example 01 02 etc Full Name of MO DIOD BD2 2 Where 1 is Long s is Short and r is repeat Refer to the XXX BD Com...

Page 1383: ...nswer Message Close loop a CO Response Trip ringing provide loop current 3 PBX On Hook Drop Message Open Tip Ring loop no loop current a CO Response CO goes to idle state see Note C Direct Inward Dial...

Page 1384: ...uence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 15 b any Port Audit Updat...

Page 1385: ...fter call is dropped from PBX end TN747B or the loop is not open after a disconnect TN765 After several occurrences an off board TN747B or on board TN465 warning alarm is generated Refer problem to CO...

Page 1386: ...earing error codes associated with the NPE Crosstalk Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence For example you may also clear errors generated from...

Page 1387: ...is idle before retesting 1 If the port status is idle then retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test...

Page 1388: ...r any errors found and repeat test 2 If error has still not cleared refer problem to CO 2002 FAIL Seizure portion of test failed due to hardware problem Fault is usually caused by a disconnected trunk...

Page 1389: ...urces required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk...

Page 1390: ...ort Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until th...

Page 1391: ...pp command to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use the status trunk command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then th...

Page 1392: ...t pack is present then the OLS631DB AC power unit may be defective The system may contain a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack OR an OLS631DB AC power unit BUT NOT BOTH TYPES OF POWER UNITS NOTE T...

Page 1393: ...Could not allocate necessary system resources to run the test 1 Retry at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run the test FAIL Int...

Page 1394: ...are the add change duplicate remove and set commands These commands are frequently used by customer administrators while performing routine administration of DEFINITY MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level...

Page 1395: ...feature improves the operation of daily maintenance by allowing maintenance routines to run that might otherwise not run It also helps to prevent the loss of translations that were not saved by the s...

Page 1396: ...m parameters maintenance Page 1 of 4 MAINTENANCE RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS OPERATIONS SUPPORT PARAMETERS Product Identification 1000000000 First OSS Telephone Number 5551212 Abbrev Alarm Report y Seco...

Page 1397: ...4D and is handled by system software The TN464 is covered in the UDS1 BD UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack section of Chapter 9 Each trunk and line have their own maintenance strategies However they all dep...

Page 1398: ...n the United States of America with 1 544 Mbps DS1 service The TN767E and 120A1 CSU Module support on demand loopback tests that assist in the detection of faults between the TN767E circuit pack and t...

Page 1399: ...1 a 0 Circuit pack removed or SAKI Test 53 MIN WRN ON 18 b 0 busy out board UUCSS WARNING OFF release board UUCSS 23 c 0 WARNING OFF add ds1 UUCSS 12 5 d None MINOR ON Continued on next page CPE LPBK...

Page 1400: ...su loopback tests 1311 m Any Equipment Loopback Test 1210 MIN WRN OFF test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback test 1312 n Any Repeater Loopback Test 1211 MIN WRN OFF test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback...

Page 1401: ...Any Major Alarm Inquiry Test 142 MIN WRN OFF test board UUCSS 2817 Minor Alarm Inquiry Test 143 MIN WRN OFF test board UUCSS 3073 to 3160 r Any Slip Alarm Inquiry Test 144 MIN WRN OFF test board UUCS...

Page 1402: ...dpoints associated with the circuit pack from their trunk groups b Execute the remove ds1 UUCSS and change circuit pack UUCSS commands If all the administration conditions are met for this circuit pac...

Page 1403: ...anel on back of the carrier Otherwise change the Near End CSU Type field using the change ds1 form to other If this error remains after plugging the CSU Module T1 Sync Splitter into the board s connec...

Page 1404: ...RLB failure This error occurs when the Integrated CSU I CSU Module Repeater Loopback RLB test fails This test is executed during I CSU T1 Sync Splitter power up reset i e the TN767E board is physical...

Page 1405: ...tate If the error recurs after 15 minutes then escalate this problem r For later releases of G3V4 and beyond only error 3073 will show that this board is receiving Slips and the AUX data shows the las...

Page 1406: ...ician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in Table 10 230 By clearing error codes associated with the NPE Connection Audit Test for exa...

Page 1407: ...CSU Repeater Loopback Test 1211 X D CPE Loopback Jack Test 1212 X D Far CSU Loopback Test 1213 X D One Way Span Test 1214 X D Inject Single Bit Error 1215 X D End Loopback Span Test 1216 X D 1 D Dest...

Page 1408: ...with their translation 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an...

Page 1409: ...e test result 4 list config shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circu...

Page 1410: ...1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to see if the board is hyperactive If this is the case the board is shut down Reseat...

Page 1411: ...s only to DS1 Interface circuit packs It means the DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system and therefore it cannot be reset without major system disruptions 1 If the circuit pack...

Page 1412: ...it pack failed to restart 1 Execute the command again 2 If the problem persists escalate this problem PASS The circuit pack initializes correctly 1 Run the Short Test Sequence 0 NO BOARD The test coul...

Page 1413: ...f system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system...

Page 1414: ...code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the ci...

Page 1415: ...herwise skip this step 3 Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 4 Check the physical connectivity of DS1 Interface circu...

Page 1416: ...when combined with the functionality provided by the TN767E circuit pack provides functionality equivalent to an external standalone ESF T1 CSU The 401A T1 Sync Splitter when combined with the functi...

Page 1417: ...m and an I CSU T1 Sync Splitter error co exist the Loss Of Signal alarm condition will take priority and the board and all trunks on the board will be put in the out of service state Errors will be lo...

Page 1418: ...yperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack wi...

Page 1419: ...ork Interface cable is plugged into the CSU Module s T1 Sync Splitter s NETWORK jack 1300 FAIL The CSU Module or the T1 Sync Splitter is missing The Near End CSU Type field on the add ds1 form has bee...

Page 1420: ...field on the add ds1 form has been administered as integrated but the DS1 circuit pack is not a TN767E or later suffix DS1 board 1 If the CSU Module or the T1 Sync Splitter is to be used and the Near...

Page 1421: ...litter and running the test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback tests command again 3 If the ELB test continues to fail then replace the TN767E board and run test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback tests aga...

Page 1422: ...n the test again 3 If the test continues to fail with this error code the problem could be in the I O cable between the backplane and the CSU Module T1 Sync Splitter 1321 FAIL DTE LOS loss of signal w...

Page 1423: ...Module or the 401A T1 Sync Splitter 5 If the test continues to fail with this error code escalate this problem 1323 FAIL A service affecting CSU Module T1 Sync Splitter audit failure was detected by...

Page 1424: ...alarm and places the trunks back into the service state before the Blue alarm occurs PASS DS1 signal is present and the physical link is healthy In addition no Integrated CSU errors are detected 0 NO...

Page 1425: ...nce software treats this the same as a Blue Alarm Payload Loopback Alarm The Payload Loopback PLB is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the switch DS1 into a loopback mode PLB Alarm is activated w...

Page 1426: ...system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation All of the trunks for the DS1 in...

Page 1427: ...h to diagnose the DS1 endpoint PASS Remote DS1 endpoint is in service Neither a Blue alarm nor a Line Loopback alarm nor a Payload Loopback alarm is detected in the DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOA...

Page 1428: ...l trunks of the circuit pack into the out of service state The inquiry test will be run every 10 minutes until the Red alarm is cleared When the Red alarm is cleared the DS1 Interface circuit pack wil...

Page 1429: ...ing a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivit...

Page 1430: ...ble 4 If this continues to fail escalate this problem 1 FAIL The DS1 interface circuit pack detected a loss of multiframe alarm LMA An out of frame condition occurred on the DS1 interface circuit pack...

Page 1431: ...nterface if it is not already administered 2 If board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive If this is the case the board is shut down Reseati...

Page 1432: ...m Once the Yellow alarm is confirmed the maintenance software places all trunks on the circuit pack into the out of service state The Inquiry Test will be run every 10 minutes until the Yellow alarm i...

Page 1433: ...e properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will tr...

Page 1434: ...te Multiframe Alarm nor F5 State Alarm is received from the remote DS1 endpoint 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no...

Page 1435: ...pack takes 10 seconds to recognize and report a Major alarm and 10 seconds to recognize and report that a Major alarm condition is cleared When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Major alarm it...

Page 1436: ...rning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactiv...

Page 1437: ...the local DS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test PASS No Major alarm is detected in DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This co...

Page 1438: ...kes 10 minutes to recognize and report a Minor alarm and 10 minutes to recognize and report that a Minor alarm condition is cleared When the DS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Minor alarm condition...

Page 1439: ...n hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack...

Page 1440: ...cable 5 If this continues to fail escalate this problem PASS No Minor alarm is detected in DS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This co...

Page 1441: ...eceives the SLIP COUNT message the Slip Alarm Inquiry Test is initiated to query the slip counters on DS1 Interface circuit pack and total the slip counts in the maintenance software If the count of s...

Page 1442: ...hen hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pa...

Page 1443: ...istered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 4 If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint I...

Page 1444: ...tion for details A Minor alarm against the DS1 Interface circuit pack is raised but all trunks of the DS1 Interface circuit pack are still in the in service state PASS No Slip alarm is detected on the...

Page 1445: ...turning a no board result 3 busyout and release have no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occu...

Page 1446: ...ent 3 Verify that both endpoints and all intermediate equipment of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode framing mode and line coding 4 If the DS1 interface circuit pack connects...

Page 1447: ...inistration form Translation for the CSU Module includes the following data Transmit LBO Receive ALBO Supply CPE Loopback Jack Power and so forth 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID t...

Page 1448: ...SS command to verify the DS1 Interface circuit pack translation PASS Translation data has been downloaded to the DS1 Interface circuit pack successfully 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the intern...

Page 1449: ...5 times 1005 ABORT DS1 Board Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current configuration To run this Test the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24 channel operation The Bit Rate f...

Page 1450: ...is in line loopback or payload loopback mode Only one long duration loopback span test can be active at a given time Thus if a loopback span test is already active that test must be terminated via th...

Page 1451: ...ivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15...

Page 1452: ...tern was transmitted and received successfully up to the TN767E DS1 board edge 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no...

Page 1453: ...ace circuit pack are restored to the in service state after the release board command is entered Table 10 245 TEST 1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation AB...

Page 1454: ...dicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test Far CSU Loopback Test or the One Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in line loopback or payload loopback mode Only one long duration loopback sp...

Page 1455: ...hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack w...

Page 1456: ...n was transmitted and received successfully over the connection from the TN767E DS1 board to the near edge of the 120A1 CSU Module T1 Sync Splitter 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID...

Page 1457: ...back tests command All trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running the RLB Test When the RLB Test is initiated m...

Page 1458: ...nd to put all trunks or ports of the DS1 Interface circuit pack into the out of service state 2 Retry the command 1039 ABORT The DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system Executing...

Page 1459: ...rcuit pack are returning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed N...

Page 1460: ...s no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the DS1 inter...

Page 1461: ...in the received test pattern and returns a PASS result to indicate that the pattern was successfully sent If the loopback is not established within the 10 seconds the test returns FAIL The status of t...

Page 1462: ...k via the following command sequence 1 Issue the disable synchronization switch command 2 Next issue the set synchronization UUCSS command 3 Lastly issue the enable synchronization switch command 1950...

Page 1463: ...ored to normal operation All of the trunks for the DS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the in service state Hyperactivity is often caused by the associated facility In such a case faults s...

Page 1464: ...enters the test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test command or the release board UUCSS command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrec...

Page 1465: ...to verify the loopback has been established transmits a framed 3 in 24 test pattern begins counting bit errors in the received test pattern and returns a PASS result If the loopback is not established...

Page 1466: ...ion If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence 1...

Page 1467: ...en hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pac...

Page 1468: ...ce strategy associated with that loopback PASS The Far CSU Loopback test has successfully began executing The test will continue to run until the system technician enters test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopb...

Page 1469: ...hin the received pattern The status of the One Way Span test will be available in the hardware error log via error type 3902 Several distinct aux values will be used to give the user information of th...

Page 1470: ...ion If the DS1 Interface circuit pack needs to be tested set the synchronization reference to another DS1 Interface circuit pack or to the Tone Clock circuit pack via the following command sequence 1...

Page 1471: ...out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation All of...

Page 1472: ...eady administered 2 If board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine if the board is hyperactive If this is the case the board is shut down Reseating the board will re init...

Page 1473: ...Inject Single Bit Error Test The list measurements ds1 summary command displays the number of bit errors detected Loopback Span Test Bit Error Count field Injecting this single bit error should increm...

Page 1474: ...d from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for...

Page 1475: ...trunks or ports on the DS1 Interface circuit pack must be busied out via the system technician busyout board command before running this End Loopback Span Test 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate th...

Page 1476: ...and at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1005 ABORT End Loopback Span Test cannot be executed in the current configuration To run this the TN767E or later suffix DS1 must be administered for 24...

Page 1477: ...ack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the DS1 interface circuit pack is restored to...

Page 1478: ...serted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the DS1 interface if it is no...

Page 1479: ...led the status LEDs are always off and this test aborts Table 10 252 TEST 1227 ICSU Status LEDs Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command a...

Page 1480: ...ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations ar...

Page 1481: ...documentation for related line information MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for e...

Page 1482: ...to station call Calls originating from a hybrid station do not require a DTMR port The Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Port maintenance object defines a set of tests to verify that the DTMF digits d...

Page 1483: ...its translation Testing the DTMR port is sufficient to reload its translation If testing the DTMR port does not clear the error then the Tone Detector circuit pack containing the defective DTMR port...

Page 1484: ...Detection Verification Test 42 X X ND Tone Detector Audit Update Test 43 X X ND Table 10 253 TEST 42 Tone Detection Verification Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation none ABORT The s...

Page 1485: ...eriod 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2006 ABORT DTMF detection failed This could be caus...

Page 1486: ...0 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at one minute i...

Page 1487: ...e shadowed memory range This means that The TN792 can replace the TN772 Duplication Interface pack however it is not compatible with TN772 If one Duplication Interface circuit pack is upgraded from TN...

Page 1488: ...l cable is not attached optical cable is attached incorrectly optical cable is broken transmit or receive hardware on one or both circuit packs is malfunctioning one of the DUPINT circuit packs is bad...

Page 1489: ...one Clock circuit packs know which Tone Clock is supposed to be active and additional leads that control which SPE is active The system software can request that either the SPE Select lead or Tone Clo...

Page 1490: ...ocessor by attaching the administration terminal to the connector marked TERM on the active carrier This connection should only be made if the administration terminal fails to function since a problem...

Page 1491: ...cket Bus Packet Bus TDM Bus A TDM Bus A Pkt ctrl Pkt ctrl B carrier A carrier DUP A to MTP B DUP A to MTP B SPE select lead SPE select lead Tone Clock select lead Tone Clock select lead 1 2 2 T O N E...

Page 1492: ...Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate t...

Page 1493: ...nvestigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below By clearing error codes associated with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test for example you may also clear erro...

Page 1494: ...cation Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Maze Test 277 X X X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test 275 X X X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test 276 X X X X...

Page 1495: ...2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2008 2009 201...

Page 1496: ...owable time period 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times FAIL The Duplication Interface circuit pack is receiving an abnormal number of corrup...

Page 1497: ...ce circuit pack There is no service disruption when this test is run on Duplication Interface B Table 10 263 TEST 273 Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Sanity Circuit Test Error Code Test Result Desc...

Page 1498: ...The sanity timer circuit on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective The Duplication Interface circuit pack should be replaced 1 Follow the procedure for replacing Common Control circuit pa...

Page 1499: ...circuit pack The test passes if the data sent matches the data received This test does not check the physical serial channel that is printed on the backplane or carried by the ICC Table 10 264 TEST 2...

Page 1500: ...ck A or the Duplication Interface circuit pack A in the case of Duplication Interface circuit pack B 1 Refer to NO BOARD description for the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test 315 PA...

Page 1501: ...tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective 1 If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack A then the circuit pack must be replaced to restore duplication If this is Duplicati...

Page 1502: ...als a maximum of 5 times FAIL The tested UART on the Duplication Interface circuit pack is defective 1 If this is Duplication Interface circuit pack A then the circuit pack must be replaced to restore...

Page 1503: ...quired to run this test are not available 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute int...

Page 1504: ...Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 2000 ABORT Response to the test request...

Page 1505: ...fails with a NO BOARD then refer to NO BOARD on the next page of this table 3 No response is being received from the Duplication Interface circuit pack or Maintenance Tape Processor If Duplication In...

Page 1506: ...To do this issue the test duplication interface A command If Test 280 fails on Duplication Interface A and Test 315 has just failed on Duplication Interface B Duplication Interface circuit pack A is d...

Page 1507: ...ode the response to the board query downlink messages consists of several CCMS uplink messages that identify the true board code vintage suffix emulation type and the number of reserved slots it needs...

Page 1508: ...D board with a different configuration and rejects the board MAPD_DCP_STA and MAPD_ ASAI_STA are the only two types of terminals are allowed on a MAPD board Therefore while administering ports on MAPD...

Page 1509: ...ease port PCSSpp command b The circuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 21 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack Table 10 270 Digital Line Error Log Ent...

Page 1510: ...e station The off hook should have moved the station to ready for service No technician action is necessary f No terminal is connected to the Digital Line board No maintenance action is required g The...

Page 1511: ...nnel the station and the DTDM are taken out of service Table 10 271 TEST 9 Digital Line NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 ABORT During testing of the primary infor...

Page 1512: ...e 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system is under heavy traffic conditions or has time slots out of...

Page 1513: ...tation is available for testing 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1 2 FAIL The Ne...

Page 1514: ...the primary information channel This test is the same as Conference Test 6 The four tests will generate only one resulting value Pass Fail or Abort If any test fails or aborts the test sequence stops...

Page 1515: ...5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension or attendant number of the port...

Page 1516: ...may range from noticing nothing to not being able to use this port 1 Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator circuit pack and the Tone Detector circuit pack using the test board PCSSpp comm...

Page 1517: ...ension command and run the test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 3 ABORT Station may be in ready for service or out of se...

Page 1518: ...TI port the abort is correct and no action is necessary FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times PASS The message to light all of the station lamps was...

Page 1519: ...jor alarm A manual OFF position to the left generates a Warning alarm Unless a technician is currently working on the system the switches should be left in the auto position On a high or critical reli...

Page 1520: ...er Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the a...

Page 1521: ...PN Maintenance circuit pack controls Emergency Transfer The system software does not have control of Emergency Transfer within a cabinet if the switch es is are in the manual ON or manual OFF state fo...

Page 1522: ...ts the error types and MOs that may cause Emergency Transfer If any or all of these errors appear in the log then refer to the appropriate Maintenance documentation and resolve those problems first If...

Page 1523: ...Switch 2 Expansion Interface Link Switch 3 Tone Clock Switch within the EPN 4 EPN Reset The EPN Sanity Audit feature activates only when all existing maintenance operations have failed to detect the...

Page 1524: ...been reset as part of the recovery procedure e This error occurs whenever the EPN is unable to send up link control messages but recovers after the control channels of the TDM Bus in the EPN are switc...

Page 1525: ...error all of the logs were cleared and re initialized Any alarms that were active at the time of this error have been cleared There is no associated test for this error If the error persists escalate...

Page 1526: ...3vs systems respectively The PGATE or PI can be used with the CLAN to create an X 25 to TCP IP bridge for adjunct and DCS connections Control LAN Congestion Controls The switch activates congestion co...

Page 1527: ...ry Test 1282 fils refer to its repair procedure Table 10 278 ETH PT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence...

Page 1528: ...ons on a port are down 1 Test the port test port UUCSSpp short 2 Refer to Session Status Test 1286 repair procedure to verify repair f Error Type 1793 1920 system software received an indication that...

Page 1529: ...ian Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Investigate errors in the order they appear in the table below Table 10 279 System Technician Demanded Tests ETH PT Order of Investigation ShortTest Seq...

Page 1530: ...alls and links associated with the port to be torn down 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test response within the allowable time period 1 If the problem persists reset the circuit pack busyout...

Page 1531: ...this ethernet port 2 If there are no reachable destinations from this port i e no routes administered on ethernet administer a route and retry 3 Escalate if the problem persists 1005 ABORT Incorrect t...

Page 1532: ...syout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS 2 If the test fails again replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 3 times...

Page 1533: ...ernet ports replace the circuit pack 1007 FAIL Ping to the destination failed due to the destination down 1 Verify that at least one destination reachable through this port is up Ping this destination...

Page 1534: ...1 Verify whether Ethernet link is in service status port UUCSSpp or status link n 2 If the Ethernet link is not in service release the link release link n or release port UUCSSpp 3 Repeat the test 4 E...

Page 1535: ...ils verify that the cable properly is secured to Ethernet port and to the bus 3 Verify the CLAN circuit pack link integrity LED is glowing 4 Retry the test 5 If problem persists refer to Ethernet Loca...

Page 1536: ...status link n 2 If the Ethernet link is not in service release the link release link n or release port UUCSSpp 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit...

Page 1537: ...ns are down ALL DOWN 1 Test the port test port UUCSSpp to verify the Ethernet Local Looparound Test 1278 result 2 If test passes wait for system software to indicate ALL UP 3 If the test fails check t...

Page 1538: ...TN748 TN420 or TN744 Tone detection boards The TN2182 provides Mu law or A law tone detection capability Since the TN2182 also provides Tone Clock function only one or two if your system is duplicated...

Page 1539: ...board type and location If the board is TN744 then do Steps 2 4 if it is TN2182 do Steps 5 12 2 Execute 3 commands busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS Reset is required to r...

Page 1540: ...TN2182 s DSPs 11 If all tests pass and the alarm does not resolve retest with test tone UUCSS long clear 12 If the test passes terminate the repair process If it fails replace the board b The ETR PT l...

Page 1541: ...ly MFC tones are tested Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Tone Detection Verification Test 42 X X ND Tone Detection Audit Update Tes...

Page 1542: ...aximum of 5 times 2006 ABORT This abort code indicates that the active Tone Clock circuit pack or a Tone Detector circuit pack may not be functioning properly On G3r V2 systems this abort can also be...

Page 1543: ...y but capacity will be reduced In order to restore performance to normal replace the circuit pack containing the defective port Follow the procedures described in the TONE BD section for replacing a t...

Page 1544: ...Test Result Description Recommendation none ABORT The system was not able to allocate all the resources needed for this test 1 Wait 1 minute and repeat the command a maximum of 5 times 2000 ABORT Resp...

Page 1545: ...he board test board UUCSS long 4 If the test passes terminate the repair process If the test fails replace the board Follow the procedures in TONE BD 5 Check to see if the board is duplicated list cab...

Page 1546: ...tandby side set tone 10 Test the alarmed board test tone UUCSS long This resets the board and is required to reload on board RAM associated with the TN2182 s DSPs 11 If all tests pass and the alarm do...

Page 1547: ...ber optic cable The TN776 supports circuit switched connections and the control channel to and from the EPN The TN570 also supports packet switched connections for those systems that use the Packet Bu...

Page 1548: ...ink PCSS command where PCSS is the address of either Standby Expansion Interface circuit pack System Technician may prevent the system from switching Expansion Interface Links by using the busyout boa...

Page 1549: ...ellow LED on solid or blink a pattern two seconds on 200 milliseconds off The Standby Expansion Interface circuit packs have the yellow LEDs off Notes a This flashing code corresponds to error codes 7...

Page 1550: ...sion Interface circuit pack is neither active nor standby When testing Expansion Interface circuit packs to investigate problems tests should always be run on both circuit packs of an Expansion Link T...

Page 1551: ...ircuit pack The defective Tone Clock circuit pack should be replaced instead The Expansion Interface circuit packs are more sensitive to a defective system clock than the rest of the components of the...

Page 1552: ...hen the EPN went down the problem was probably that the synchronization on line reference became invalid Since reference switching was disabled the Tone Clock did not switch from the invalid reference...

Page 1553: ...r if the 2B 3B Tone Clock circuit pack was really the source of the problem and not the Expansion Interface circuit pack then the Expansion Interface Link s goes down again the next time a Tone Clock...

Page 1554: ...soon as possible See Warning WARNING If the defective Tone Clock circuit pack is left as the Standby Tone Clock then a scheduled Tone Clock switch causes the same EPN to go out of service again If rep...

Page 1555: ...o to the front of the cabinet and inspect the yellow LED If the yellow LED is on steady this Expansion Interface circuit pack and the lightwave transceiver are functioning properly If the yellow LED i...

Page 1556: ...Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 0 Any Any Any test board PCSS 1 Any Expansion Interface Local TDM Loop Around Test 240 MAJ ON test board PCSS r 2 2 Expansion I...

Page 1557: ...2049 h Any Reset Test 336 MIN ON reset board PCSS r 1 2305 i 118 None WRN OFF 25611 j Any None MIN ON 28171 k Any None MIN ON 30731 Any Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test 589 MIN OFF test board...

Page 1558: ...nother way to resolve or prevent this alarm is to use the change circuit pack command to remove the EI circuit pack administrative entry for this slot after the EI circuit pack has been removed from t...

Page 1559: ...t the EI circuit pack reporting the errors 6 Wait five minutes Then check the Error Log to see if new errors of type 257 have been detected 7 If errors are present replace the EI circuit pack or trans...

Page 1560: ...er k Error Type 2817 indicates an on board failure of EI circuitry related to transmission of data to the fiber interface If this error has generated a minor alarm replace the EI circuit pack or trans...

Page 1561: ...will take 15 minutes for the counter to be cleared if the alarm was raised o Error Type 3841 indicates that the EI TN570 only has reported a loss of lock with the backplane system clock p Error Type 3...

Page 1562: ...rcuit pack The EPN served by this link was most probably not providing service when this error was logged If this is a high or critical reliability system the system should have switched to the Standb...

Page 1563: ...recovery strategy The software has forced an Expansion Interface switch because the new Expansion Interface Link contains new features which support EPN recovery in case of a bad tone clock board Thi...

Page 1564: ...System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order they are presented in the table below By clearing error codes associated with the Expansion Interfa...

Page 1565: ...est was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available Someone may be doing something on this Port Network Interface 1 Retry the...

Page 1566: ...peat the reset board command c If the reset command returns the message Board not Assigned the EPN Maintenance circuit pack may be holding the Expansion Interface circuit pack reset First try to reset...

Page 1567: ...me up reset one or both Expansion Interface circuit packs on the link 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Check the error log for wrong board error 125 or no board error 131 Resolve either...

Page 1568: ...t fails 3 Verify that fiber transmit and receive ends have not been crossed when connected to the lightwave transceiver 4 The problem may be due to a synchronization timing loop Use the status sync co...

Page 1569: ...rms on EPN objects might have been resolved if the EPN went down Refer to the documentation for descriptions of any of the error types occurring at about same time as the EXP LINK error types Resolve...

Page 1570: ...his loopback is internal to the circuit pack this test does not interfere with the normal fiber data stream 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Check the error log for wrong board error 125...

Page 1571: ...If this test passes or aborts with Error Code 2 this test is considered to have passed For Error Code 2 issue the set tdm PC command where P is the network containing the Expansion Interface circuit p...

Page 1572: ...Verify that there is at least one Tone Detector on this network If not this test always aborts for this Expansion Interface circuit pack This does not harm the system in any way 2 Look for TONE PT err...

Page 1573: ...orted because the system could not allocate time slots FAIL The test tone was not detected correctly after being looped through the Expansion Interface circuit pack 1 If error type 2305 has been logge...

Page 1574: ...other Expansion Interface circuit pack tests if the Expansion Interface Link is not functioning correctly 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Check the error log for wrong board error 125 o...

Page 1575: ...erify that there is at least one Tone Detector on this network If there is not at least one Tone Detector this test always aborts for this Expansion Interface circuit pack This does not harm the syste...

Page 1576: ...nterface circuit pack provides a link This determines if the dial tone is being supplied 2 Check for disconnected transmit or receive fibers on both ends of the fiber 3 If Test 238 is failing refer to...

Page 1577: ...he same Expansion Interface circuit pack again and into the originating cabinet If the test tone is detected by a tone detector the first part of the test passes The second portion of the test applies...

Page 1578: ...ervice due to TDM BUS errors Refer to TDM BUS TDM Bus Maintenance documentation to diagnose any active TDM BUS errors 1 If system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at...

Page 1579: ...EPN 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in an Expansion Port Network Port Network 2 or 3 has a major alarm against it This test needs to use the alarmed port network s Packet Bus 1 Resolve the Packet Bus alarm...

Page 1580: ...at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1 FAIL The test did not detect the test tone through the loop around connection NOTE If the circuit pack is a TN570 the packet portion of this test was not r...

Page 1581: ...trol circuit pack 2 If the Packet Control circuit pack checks out OK issue the test board PCSS long command on the Expansion Interface circuit pack 3 If Test 242 continues to fail replace the Expansio...

Page 1582: ...s Test 241 this condition indicates either a faulty lightwave transceiver or a faulty fiber cable To determine if either a lightwave transceiver or the fiber itself has failed execute the Expansion In...

Page 1583: ...cted by the test 1 Check the error log for wrong board error 125 or no board error 131 Resolve either of these issues if applicable 2 Check that the board is properly translated and inserted If so che...

Page 1584: ...repeat the Short Test Sequence 5 If test continues to fail replace the circuit pack or transceiver PASS The Expansion Interface circuit pack did respond correctly to the test Communication from softw...

Page 1585: ...Expansion Interface circuit pack to be reset is part of the Active Expansion Interface Link the system does not allow the busyout and instructs system technician to switch Expansion Interface Links vi...

Page 1586: ...le time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 9999 ABORT Expansion Interface circuit pack reset...

Page 1587: ...ting the test maint P long command on the maintenance board in the same EPN 2 If Step 1 was not successful in releasing the Expansion Interface circuit pack temporarily remove the EPN maintenance circ...

Page 1588: ...CAUSE the EPN went down When there is no Tone Clock generating the system clock on an EPN then an Expansion Interface circuit pack can only be reset once All subsequent reset attempts fail It is also...

Page 1589: ...s reset at a time when service is least disrupted by losing use of the EPN 2 If the reset fails with the same error code execute the test tone clock PC command where P is the network that contains thi...

Page 1590: ...n Interface Link will be unavailable until this problem is resolved 1 Attach lightwave transceiver to 25 pair backplane connector in slot belonging to Expansion Interface circuit pack 2 Reset the circ...

Page 1591: ...er tests on this Expansion Interface circuit pack are not passing or other errors have been logged against this circuit pack the lightwave transceiver and or the Expansion Interface circuit pack shoul...

Page 1592: ...ce circuit pack to be tested is part of an Active link from PPN to either EPN the path shown in Figure 10 31 is used If the Expansion Interface circuit pack to be tested is on either EPN and is part o...

Page 1593: ...cuit Pack Issue 4 May 2002 10 807 555 233 123 Figure 10 32 Expansion Interface Packet Interface Test EPN to EPN PKT CTRL EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF EXP INTF Packet Bus PPN Packet Bus...

Page 1594: ...te end of the fiber 1 If Expansion Interface is busied out issue the release board PCSS command 2 Examine the results of Tests 237 and 238 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in an EPN Port Network 2 or 3 has a...

Page 1595: ...m of 3 times 1421 ABORT This abort code is valid and can appear only when the Expansion Interface circuit pack addressed in the test command is one which terminates the link between two the EPNs It in...

Page 1596: ...the Packet Control circuit pack look for PKT CTL errors 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times 25...

Page 1597: ...ests pass the failure may be in either the PPN Expansion Interface circuit pack or the connected Expansion Interface circuit pack under test or on the EPN Packet Bus If a duplicate Expansion link exis...

Page 1598: ...PPN to the EPN and if a duplicate Expansion link exists make that the Active link using the set expansion link PCSS command Execute the test board long command on the original PPN Expansion Interface...

Page 1599: ...r to the PKT CTRL Maintenance documentation for recommended maintenance procedures 2 If all Packet Control circuit pack tests pass the failure may be in the Expansion Interface circuit packs of the EP...

Page 1600: ...st The set expansion link command has no error codes to return It displays one of following messages upon completion 1 Command completed successfully Link switch was successful This may be verified by...

Page 1601: ...es of blank and 1 through 10 mean that the link is down due to a defective Expansion Interface Link Look for and resolve Expansion Interface circuit pack errors c Aux Data values of 30 through 40 mean...

Page 1602: ...on Link To restore normal service the system had to reset the Expansion port network served by the Expansion Link Error type 10004 should have been logged against the Expansion Interface circuit pack...

Page 1603: ...n carrier A monitors the EXT DEV alarm leads and provides status to the Maintenance processor TN786B or TN2404 TN790 in the active SPE In the EPN the Maintenance Board TN775 monitors the EXT DEV alarm...

Page 1604: ...UU r2 or 6 1 or 5 Any External Device Alarm Test 120 MAJOR MINOR2 2 One port generates a MAJOR alarm the other port generates a MINOR alarm OFF test environment UU r 2 or 6 Multicarrier Cabinet Tests...

Page 1605: ...ator section for a description of this test Notes a Refer to DC POWER Single Carrier Cabinet Power section for a description of this test b Refer to EMG XFER Emergency Transfer section for a descripti...

Page 1606: ...of 5 times 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to ABORT wi...

Page 1607: ...is reporting the alarm This circuit pack should be replaced There are failures that can occur on Maintenance circuit pack s that will not be detected by their respective maintenance but which will ca...

Page 1608: ...also be administered as external device alarms NOTE An unadministered maintenance board external device alarm port that is sensing a contact closure will have an entry in the Error Log and in the Alar...

Page 1609: ...order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system By clearing error codes associated with the Battery Battery Charger Query Test you may also clear errors generated from other t...

Page 1610: ...ipment is not available Look for and resolve all Expansion Port Network problems with this cabinet 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the...

Page 1611: ...ircuit pack and rerun the test 3 If the test still fails then there is a problem with the analog external device alarm port or the Maintenance circuit pack that is reporting the alarm This circuit pac...

Page 1612: ...arm or the administered Maintenance circuit pack connected to the device reports no alarm then the External Device may not be properly reporting the problems or the External Device may not be properly...

Page 1613: ...alarm is raised For all other problems a MINOR alarm is raised The software vintage can be displayed via the list configuration software vintage long command The Flash Data Consistency Test is run on...

Page 1614: ...72 74 80 82 9 15 17 86 160 192 288 320 416 448 4 6 12 14 20 22 36 38 44 46 52 54 68 70 8 or 16 Flash Data Consistency Test 421 MAJOR OFF upgrade software 76 78 84 86 132 164 196 260 Table 10 302 Flash...

Page 1615: ...tandard system 292 324 388 420 452 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures Orde...

Page 1616: ...tem is heavily loaded and the test is not allocated sufficient time to run 1 Rerun the test when the system is less busy and is not running standby maintenance 1029 1030 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016...

Page 1617: ...ard mem long again to resolve the alarms 4 FAIL The load vintages are different in both SPEs 1 Determine the desired software release by issuing the list configuration software long command Obtain the...

Page 1618: ...save and announcement save pass on both SPEs run test card mem long to resolve the alarms 12 FAIL Load vintages and announcements are different in both SPEs The Active SPE has the most current announc...

Page 1619: ...4 Be sure to issue the save announcements command 32 FAIL The update files are different in both SPEs The update file on the Active SPE is most current 1 Have INADS issue the copy update file command...

Page 1620: ...Issue save announcements to save announcements on both SPEs 2 Have INADS issue copy update file to copy the update file from the Active to the Standby SPE 3 Run test card mem long to resolve the alar...

Page 1621: ...running test card mem long check for Error Codes 32 or 64 Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code 48 FAIL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs The Activ...

Page 1622: ...The update file on the Standby SPE is the most current 1 If you are on site with the switch replace the Active SPE memory card with the Standby SPE memory card If you are not on site with the switch i...

Page 1623: ...IL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs The Standby SPE has the most current update file and the Active SPE has the most current announcements 1 Issue the save announcements c...

Page 1624: ...cedure under the applicable error code 80 FAIL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs The Standby SPE has the most current update file and announcements 1 Issue save announcemen...

Page 1625: ...e error code 128 ABORT The Translation memory card in the Active SPE is missing 132 FAIL The load vintages are different in both SPEs and the translation memory card is missing in the Active SPE 1 Fol...

Page 1626: ...re different in both SPEs and the translation memory card is missing in the Standby SPE 1 Follow the procedures for Error Code 132 288 FAIL The update file in the Active SPE is more current and the tr...

Page 1627: ...n memory cards are missing in both SPEs The update file in the Active SPE is more current 1 Follow the procedures for Error Code 164 448 FAIL The update file in the Standby SPE is more current and the...

Page 1628: ...The image is then copied to FLASH memory This feature eliminates having to physically remove the circuit pack and sending it to the factory for a firmware update These procedures apply to these circu...

Page 1629: ...r Self download or Remote download Single Multiple same type Copying a new firmware image file onto a source circuit pack using the File Transfer Protocol FTP Copying the image to the target circuit p...

Page 1630: ...remote EPNs only for remote downloads only PC or other server IP connectivity to the source board IP connectivity to the World Wide Web File transfer protocol FTP software program NOTE Not all GUI bas...

Page 1631: ...s 6 Select the circuit pack you want to upgrade then the firmware images that you need there may be more than one depending on the circuit pack For example the tn2501ap_f05 bin filename is for the TN2...

Page 1632: ...he files 1 Log onto the switch using superuser or services login and password 2 Type enable filesystem board UUCSS login ftplogin ftppassword size actual_size where ftplogin is any temporary login for...

Page 1633: ...mporary login for this FTP session for example broncos 5 Type bin and press Enter This transfers files in binary format 6 If you are downloading to the TN2501AP VAL circuit pack only type cd and press...

Page 1634: ...____________________ Target Board Code ______ Suffix __ Firmware Vintage ___ Schedule Download _ Remove Image File After Successful Download _ Start Date Time __ __ ____ __ __ Stop Date Time __ __ ___...

Page 1635: ...lay only field for TN799DP C LAN and TN2501AP VAL Schedule Download Type y to schedule the firmware download for another time Type n to start the firmware download immediately after completing the for...

Page 1636: ...rom the carrier b Pull the circuit pack out approximately 1 2 inches 2 54 to 5 08 cm c Re insert the circuit pack into the carrier d Close the latch securely Start Date Time Type the date and time tha...

Page 1637: ...esults screen Screen 10 7 appears Screen 10 7 Test Results screen 2 Look in the Result field for FAIL conditions 3 If the test does not pass refer to the Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values sec...

Page 1638: ...lesystem board UUCSS command status firmware download Page 1 of 1 STATUS FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD Source Board Location 01C02 Firmware Image File Name tn2501ap_f05 bin Target Board Code TN2501 Suffix AP Firm...

Page 1639: ...abort a scheduled pending firmware download 1 Type disable firmware download and press Enter This command Continues to download the firmware image file to circuit pack in progress Aborts the remainder...

Page 1640: ...f the source circuit pack does not have enough available memory delete old files remove file board UUCSS filename or wait until there is less traffic on the board CAUTION The ftplogin and ftppassword...

Page 1641: ...ew firmware image file is listed in the File Directory Name field Screen 10 9 List Directory screen Schedule download 1 Fill in all of the fields in Table 10 306 except the Target Location field NOTE...

Page 1642: ...press Enter The System Configuration screen Screen 10 10 appears Screen 10 10 System Configuration screen b Look for the P suffix in the Code column and note the circuit pack s UUCSS address in the Bo...

Page 1643: ...the header on the new firmware image file to ensure that the firmware download runs as you intend 1 Type test firmware download and press Enter The Test Results screen Screen 10 11 appears Screen 10...

Page 1644: ...able the filesystem 1 Type remove file board UUCSS filename and press Enter to remove image files from the source board status firmware download Page 1 of 1 STATUS FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD Source Board Locat...

Page 1645: ...ds This section contains three troubleshooting sections Reset 1 or 2 Test firmware download Backing out of a firmware download Reset 1 or 2 If the system does a reset 1 or 2 and no alarms are present...

Page 1646: ...n 10 14 appears Screen 10 14 Display Firmware Image s screen 2 Check the date and time stamps to determine whether to revert back to Image 1 or Image 2 In the example that follows we are reverting bac...

Page 1647: ...arge ESD be sure to wear a grounding strap while handling the circuit pack CAUTION For TN2501AP VAL ensure that both the top green and top amber LEDs are out a Release the latch handle to free the cir...

Page 1648: ...e the error use the test firmware download command The Aux Data specifies the error that resulted from the resource not being available See Table 10 308 for more details Table 10 307 FW DWNLD Maintena...

Page 1649: ...etry the download 5 Header message failed Check for system wide problems clear all errors and retry the download 6 Download Map timer expired Check for system wide problems clear all errors and retry...

Page 1650: ...lations and retry 2 Incorrect target board for download schedule verify board location and schedule 3 Target failed to go into DL Mode retry 4 Target received bad file header 5 Bad image checksum on i...

Page 1651: ...ownload if fail then escalate 24 A download is already in progress Internal firmware error on target board retry download if fail then escalate 30 A start download sequence error Internal firmware err...

Page 1652: ...there are FW DWNLD errors to be resolve and alarms to clear 1 This test verifies that the information on the FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD screen is correct It also verifies that the source board is of the correc...

Page 1653: ...the source board has a bad CRC FTP a good firmware image file to the source board 4 FAIL Firmware image file name is too long Rename the image file to a file name of the correct size FTP the new image...

Page 1654: ...en changed after the schedule was entered Execute list config verify the source board location Execute change firmware download and enter the correct location on the screen PASS Firmware download to t...

Page 1655: ...nd to detect call progress tones are essential for maintenance of other circuit packs for example Tone Clock The GPTD maintenance feature defines a set of tests to ensure that the general purpose tone...

Page 1656: ...basis So the H 323 D channel is actually a TCP IP signaling channel Layer 1 and 2 of this signaling channel can be monitored by IP PING testing Performance in terms of voice latency for a signaling g...

Page 1657: ...removed from service release port UUCSSpp on a specific H 323 B channel increases the trunk group capacity by one No physical piece of hardware is actually added to service status trunk grp mbr use to...

Page 1658: ...Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 grp is the signaling group number 1 166 the te...

Page 1659: ...service to provide media connections for the trunk members of the signaling group g Error Type 1794 The Sig Group reported that the far end has detected excessive packet latency or loss h Error Type 2...

Page 1660: ...other tests in the testing sequence CLAN Ethernet Status Test 1386 This test is non destructive This test checks the status of the CLAN ethernet port that originated this signaling group If the CLAN...

Page 1661: ...ow LED is off Reset the circuit pack by issuing the busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS commands 2 If this result occurs again replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT The necessa...

Page 1662: ...s not successful the test fails NOTE Multiple failures of this test can take the H 323 signaling group out of service If the PING is successful this test looks at the PING round trip delay If a round...

Page 1663: ...s port 2 Repeat the test 3 If the test aborts with Error Code 7 while step 1 verified escalate the problem 1125 ABORT Link is not in service 1 Check if the link is in service or not If the link is not...

Page 1664: ...translations and retest 2802 ABORT Different IP address pinged than software had allocated for the test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times 7 89 1007 FAIL PING to the destin...

Page 1665: ...Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT The necessary system resources to execute the test could not be allocated 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2500 ABORT Intern...

Page 1666: ...ch terminates the H 323 signaling portion of each endpoint The MO follows standard maintenance methodology and supports test busyout release and status commands Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Val...

Page 1667: ...ician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system By clearing error codes associated with the Si...

Page 1668: ...peer to peer IP layer connection This nondestructive test runs due to in line errors during periodic and schedule maintenance and on demand Table 10 319 TEST 1372 Registration Status Inquiry Error Cod...

Page 1669: ...3 times 2 Investigate any C LAN ethernet port errors 1007 FAIL The system could not PING the registered endpoint via the C LAN 1 Verify that at least one destination reachable through this port PING...

Page 1670: ...ic and schedule maintenance and on demand Table 10 321 TEST 1374 Media Path PING Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2100 ABORT Could not locate the necessary system resources to ru...

Page 1671: ...ntation for related line information MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for example...

Page 1672: ...three pairs of wires an analog voice pair a transmit receive pair and a power pair Figure 10 33 Hybrid Station Interactions MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the po...

Page 1673: ...f these service states follows Out of Service The port and thus the station have been removed from service A busyout of a port causes it to be out of service Ready for Service Once a port on the circu...

Page 1674: ...61 18 c 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 130 d None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 257 e 40988 None MIN WRN2 2 Major or Minor alarms on this MO may be downgraded to Warning alarm...

Page 1675: ...damaged jack and make sure the voice terminal is a Hybrid set Once the problem has been resolved the alarm is retired after a predetermined period of time f This indicates that the voice terminal has...

Page 1676: ...is The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections If the NPE is not working correctly...

Page 1677: ...us is idle then retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test This could be due to a failure to seize the...

Page 1678: ...BORT Test disabled via administration This only applies to analog stations The default for this field is y so you may want to determine why it has been turned off for this station 1 To enable test set...

Page 1679: ...ly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be investigated using other port tests and examining station trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate...

Page 1680: ...ectronic Power Feed Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal System Error 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources requ...

Page 1681: ...ower to the station The system technician should check for a short in the wiring a damaged jack a defective voice terminal or an incorrect type of terminal 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the int...

Page 1682: ...el and noise level of the conferenced output are then measured using a GPTD and checked to verify that they are within an acceptable range The second half of the Conference Test checks the operation o...

Page 1683: ...one Generator Maintenance documentation 3 If neither condition exists retry the test at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The tes...

Page 1684: ...e GPTD BD the TONE BD and the TONE PT 1 This error can be caused by a disconnected terminal First ensure that the terminal is connected and the wiring is OK 2 Then issue display port and status statio...

Page 1685: ...est fails for all ports on a circuit pack a 5 volt power problem is indicated If a TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is present the 631DB AC power unit may be defective The 631DB power unit is us...

Page 1686: ...inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use the list config command and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be co...

Page 1687: ...ible states You must wait until the port is idle before retesting Attendants are always in use off hook if the handset is plugged in and the port is not busied out 1 If the port status is idle then re...

Page 1688: ...omplaints still exist investigate by using other circuit pack tests and by examining the station wiring and connections 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This c...

Page 1689: ...a release port PCSSpp or release station extension and then run the test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT...

Page 1690: ...passed The hybrid circuit pack is sending and receiving proper messages to and from the voice terminal 1 If problems still exist investigate using other circuit pack tests and by examining the statio...

Page 1691: ...intervals a maximum of 5 times 3 ABORT The station is in a ready for service or an out of service state This may be due to wiring or an unplugged or defective set 1 Make sure terminal is connected an...

Page 1692: ...aximum of 5 times PASS Hybrid Line Lamp Updates completed successfully 1 If complaints still exist investigate by using other circuit pack tests and by examining the station wiring and connections 0 N...

Page 1693: ...he test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The po...

Page 1694: ...nd Trouble Clearing Aids for a full description of all possible states You must wait until the port is idle before retesting Attendants are always in use off hook if the handset is plugged in and the...

Page 1695: ...the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are corre...

Page 1696: ...times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use display port PCSSpp to determine the station extension number of the port Use s...

Page 1697: ...oard is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Use list config and resolve any problems that are found 2 If the board was found to be correctly inserted in step 1 issue the...

Page 1698: ...a result of the test inads link command being issued Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values The Hardware Error Log entries are described as part of the INADS Link Test description Short and Long T...

Page 1699: ...recognizes this special test inads type of alarm and automatically opens and then closes a trouble ticket which indicates that the reason for the trouble ticket is a command is in progress or the sys...

Page 1700: ...are correct via the Maintenance Related System Parameters Form 3 Enable alarm origination via the Maintenance Related System Parameters Form and test the PR MAINT Maintenance Tape Processor by issuin...

Page 1701: ...minutes for the present command to finish 2 Review the results of the present command by viewing the Error Log and selecting the category inads link 11 0 The switch is trying to report alarms to INAD...

Page 1702: ...r Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Indicates that an alarm was raised but an associated error was not entered into the hardware error log due to a moment...

Page 1703: ...s not reset the I O Processor 3 times 1 Reset the I O Processor reset io processor 2 Refer to the repair procedures for Test 704 System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes The I O P...

Page 1704: ...utes Table 10 333 TEST 703 Demand Reset Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1362 ABORT I O Processor is in service 1 Determine status of the I O Processor display alarms 2 If the I...

Page 1705: ...erminate generic RTP streams used to carry packetized audio over an IP network As part of the overall H 323 implementation the TN2302 circuit pack handles the audio streams while the TN799 C LAN handl...

Page 1706: ...S 23 c 0 Board administered but not inserted WARNING OFF add ds1 UUCSS 125 d none Wrong board MINOR ON 257 e 65535 Control Channel Loop Test 52 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 20 513 f 4352 4353 4355 43...

Page 1707: ...edPro circuit pack is inserted in the correct slot OR 2 Completely remove the IPMEDPRO from the system using the following steps a Remove the administered IP Interface associated with the circuit pack...

Page 1708: ...Ps out of service and then to reset the FPGA The reset of the FPGA will cause an uplink response as to whether the reset passed or not There are several error conditions that can be sent up in the err...

Page 1709: ...hat can be sent up in the error message for this problem they will all be treated as the same failure by switch software For the repair procedure see Associated Test 1406 n Error Type 3073 is associat...

Page 1710: ...code and vintage and verifies its records Table 10 335 System Technician Demanded Tests Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Non...

Page 1711: ...successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board...

Page 1712: ...the Media Processor IP interface 2 Execute the command again 1 FAIL The circuit pack failed to reset 1 Execute command again 2 If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2 2000 FAIL The circuit...

Page 1713: ...ess Query Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2100 ABORT Insufficient system resources to...

Page 1714: ...nnected and you cannot talk on the network PASS The Ethernet port is connected and you can talk on the network 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be d...

Page 1715: ...e test It runs due to in line errors during periodic and scheduled maintenance and on demand Table 10 340 TEST 1379 Ping Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 2 ABORT Internal Error...

Page 1716: ...d not match the number sent normally one ping sent This means that no ping responses were received from the gateway defined on the ip interfaces form for the Media Processor 1 Retry the command at 1 m...

Page 1717: ...the TN2302 tests ok Otherwise it fails with no fail code or AUX data This test verifies the status of the TSI device on the TN2302 circuit pack If the device is bad software sets an appropriate count...

Page 1718: ...ommand If the board continues to fail replace the board 8192 8328 FAIL The FPGA DSP test failed 1 Issue the busyout board UUCSS command 2 Issue the reset board UUCSS command 3 Issue the release board...

Page 1719: ...to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Adm...

Page 1720: ...that can carry Wideband traffic The ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port ISDN LNK and the associated DS1 UDS1 ISDN Trunk ISDN TRK or PRI endpoint port PE BCHL use ports on a TN767 or TN464B or later DS1 UDS1...

Page 1721: ...dpoint ports B channels since no call control information can be conveyed to the far end switch without it Stable calls may remain operational but no new calls can be made The ISDN PRI Signaling Link...

Page 1722: ...nce first If all tests pass run the long test sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 c 18 0 busyout port PCSSpp...

Page 1723: ...the NPE Crosstalk Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence The command line entry to test the ISDN LNK MO is test port PCSSxx sh or l where xx is 2...

Page 1724: ...ommand 1001 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots...

Page 1725: ...ing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at...

Page 1726: ...I terminal adapter associated with this D channel port is detached from the circuit pack This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled To complete test on this port either 1 Re at...

Page 1727: ...channel The ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port is the port on a TN464C or later UDS1 Interface circuit pack that carries D channel messages to the processor The ISDN PRI interface uses out of band signaling...

Page 1728: ...channels may use any of the ports 1 15 or 17 31 but the ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port must be the 16th port In certain configurations NFAS the 16th port may be used as a B channel Refer to the ISDN PR...

Page 1729: ...ntrol Circuit Pack TN778 UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack TN464 Primary Signaling Link Voice or Data Voice or Data Voice or Data Voice or Data Port 0 Port 1 Port 15 Port 16 Port 17 Port 31 32 Channel TN464...

Page 1730: ...errors execute the long test sequence for the D channel ISDN SGR Investigate any errors if there are none execute a long test sequence for the UDS1 circuit pack UDS1 BD and investigate any errors If...

Page 1731: ...between a remote endpoint and the local call processing software Maintenance will not start any testing or generate any alarms in response to this error g Receive FIFO Overflow error This error occurs...

Page 1732: ...is detached from the circuit pack This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled To complete test on this port either 1 Re attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter and retry te...

Page 1733: ...t in the out of service state Use the busyout port PCSSpp command to place it in the out of service state and repeat this test CAUTION The busyout will prevent new call originations on all B channels...

Page 1734: ...ommand at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times FAIL The Loopback test has failed 1 If this test fails repeatedly wait until all of the ports on the board are idle not in use and reset the circuit p...

Page 1735: ...nnel depending on the type of Signaling Group used as described below For 32 channel interfaces ports 1 15 and 17 31 on the circuit pack are used as B channels The 16th port may be used as a B channel...

Page 1736: ...S Simplex If a Packet Control circuit pack is used then only the TN464C or later circuit pack may be used to carry the D channel however other DS1 UDS1 interface circuit packs may be used to carry onl...

Page 1737: ...connection DS1 UDS1 interface circuit pack Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port 23 Primary signaling link port 24 ISDN TRK ISDN TRK ISDN LNK Port r11h2p3 LJK 072501 Switch PI circuit pack TN765 D...

Page 1738: ...nnel TDM bus Logical connection Physical connection DS1 UDS1 interface circuit pack DS1 UDS1 interface circuit pack DS1 UDS1 interface circuit pack Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port 1 Voice or d...

Page 1739: ...on UDS1 interface circuit pack UDS1 interface circuit pack UDS1 interface circuit pack Port 0 Port 0 Port 0 Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port 31 Voice o...

Page 1740: ...connection Physical connection DS1 UDS1 interface circuit pack Port 1 Port 2 r11h2p7 LJK 072501 DS1 UDS1 interface circuit pack DS1 UDS1 interface circuit pack Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port...

Page 1741: ...t pack UDS1 interface circuit pack Port 0 Port 0 Port 0 Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port 1 Voice or data port 31 Voice or data port 31 Voice or data port 31 Voice or data p...

Page 1742: ...DN PLK D Channel Prim ary Signaling Link Port 24 ISDN TRK B Channel Voice or Data Port 23 TN464 C or later Physical connection Logical connection 24 Channel Packet Bus D C hannel B C hannels TD M B us...

Page 1743: ...4 B C h a n n e ls B C h a n n e ls B C h a n n e ls T N 4 6 4 C o r la te r P hy s ic a l c o n n e c tio n L o g ic a l c o n n e c tio n IS D N T R K B C h a n n e l Vo ic e o r D a ta P o r t 1 I...

Page 1744: ...T R K B C h a n n e l I S D N T R K B C h a n n e l I S D N T R K B C h a n n e l I S D N P L K D C h a n n e l I S D N T R K B C h a n n e l P r im a r y S ig n a lin g L in k V o ic e o r D a t a V...

Page 1745: ...N464 UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack TN464 B Channels B Channels B Channels TN464 C or later Physical connection Logical connection ISDN TRK B Channel Voice or Data Port 1 ISDN TRK B Channel Voice or Data...

Page 1746: ...D N P L K D C h a n n e l IS D N T R K B C h a n n e l P rim a r y S ig n a lin g L in k Vo ic e o r D a ta Vo ic e o r D a ta Vo ic e o r D a ta Vo ic e o r D a ta P o r t 0 P o r t 1 P o r t 1 5 P...

Page 1747: ...is no test to clear these errors The error counter is decremented by 1 every 15 minutes Table 10 348 ISDN PRI Signaling Group Error Log Entries Error Codes Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off...

Page 1748: ...Hardware Check in the test sequence When the link does recover the B channels will be negotiated back to the In Service state and their alarms will be retired When this error occurs the state of the...

Page 1749: ...to receiving them They provide added data that may prove useful when tracking down obscure networking and routing problems The following table provides more information Table 10 349 Descriptions of E...

Page 1750: ...nk Service States sections of ISDN TRK for recovery suggestions 3858 The switch sent an ISDN message to the far end switch or terminal adapter which did not respond in the allotted time Possible cause...

Page 1751: ...onsult with the customer and or the network provider to determine the services that the customer has subscribed to for this trunk group 3892 Protocol detail may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN...

Page 1752: ...n 3906 Protocol detail may offer a clue if customer is having ISDN calls denied with an unexpected intercept tone If customer is complaining of unexpected intercept tones when accessing ISDN trunks or...

Page 1753: ...ntercept tone after accessing ISDN trunks or PRI endpoints Determine the trunk group from the circuit pack and port number in the aux data field and then check the BCC fields of the pertinent routing...

Page 1754: ...rcuit pack providing connectivity to the DS1 UDS1 circuit pack If there are problems with the ISDN PRI Signaling Link also investigate the DS1 UDS1 circuit pack DS1 BD UDS1 BD and the Processor Interf...

Page 1755: ...to y 4 FAIL There is a problem with the Processor Interface Link No DS1 ISDN Trunk B channel or wideband PRI Endpoint calls can be made until the problem is resolved 1 Display the Communication Interf...

Page 1756: ...terminal adapter The ISDN PRI Specification allows up to 2 minutes for a response Check the Error Log for ISDN SGR ISDN PRI Signaling Group errors of type 2305 for evidence of a Remote Layer 3 Query...

Page 1757: ...10 54 PRI Over PACON Remote Layer 3 Query Test 637 P a c k e t B u s T o fa r e n d s w it c h h a r d w a r e P r o c e s s o r T N 7 8 6 P a c k e t C o n t r o l C ir c u it P a c k T N 7 7 8 U D...

Page 1758: ...e of the ISDN Trunks or PRI Endpoint Ports associated with this signaling group Refer to ISDN TRK or PE BCHL for further details regarding service state definitions and transitions For systems not usi...

Page 1759: ...h no error code 1 Follow the recommendations for ABORT with no error code PASS A message was composed and sent to the Far end switch The ISDN PRI specification allows up to two minutes for a reply 1 C...

Page 1760: ...hich link is down find the one that matches the DS1 Interface circuit pack on which this ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port resides and then refer to the PI LINK Processor Interface Link Maintenance documen...

Page 1761: ...PI LINK Maintenance Object does not monitor the Layer 2 status of the ISDN PRI D channel when the D channel is connected to the Packet Control circuit pack for the ISDN PRI over PACCON feature The Lay...

Page 1762: ...ed correctly or if the Signaling Channel has been busied out Verify that the Secondary Signaling Channel D channel at the far end has been administered correctly Verify that the DS1 port used for the...

Page 1763: ...ling Group ISDN SGR to which it belongs For more details refer to the ISDN SGR and DS1 BD UDS1 BD Maintenance documentation NOTE If a Packet Control circuit pack is used instead of a Processor Interfa...

Page 1764: ...tes A warning alarm is logged against a DS1 ISDN B channel trunk when it is placed in the Maintenance Far End or Out Of Service Far End states during which the trunk is unusable for outgoing calls Whe...

Page 1765: ...DATA PORT 2 VOICE OR DATA ISDN LNK ISDN TRK ISDN TRK ISDN TRK PI LINK PROCESSOR TN773 PI CIRCUIT PACK TN765 DS1 UDS1 CIRCUIT PACK INTERFACE Packet Bus D Channel B Channels TDM Bus Processor TN786 Pac...

Page 1766: ...calls but on non US interfaces incoming calls will be accepted Out of Service Near end OOS NE This is the state of the trunk when a hardware failure exists on the link the NPE Crosstalk Test fails or...

Page 1767: ...INS The near end has sent a B channel maintenance message to the far end requesting that the B channel service state be transitioned to in service The far end has a certain amount of time to respond t...

Page 1768: ...Level 3 Query failed been down for at D channel has Maintenance Near End Maintenance Far End Pending In Service Maintenance Far End Craft release of B channel or clearing of near end problem with DS1...

Page 1769: ...sent and the switch is waiting up to 2 min for a reply from the far end Wait 2 minutes and check service state after the pending state has cleared maint NE None ISDN test call in progress test trunk...

Page 1770: ...ollow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test port PCSSpp sh r 1 1 a Any None test port PCSSpp sh r 1 15 b Any Audit and Update Test 36 18 0 busyout trunk grp mbr release trunk grp mbr 19 c 0 No...

Page 1771: ...pack or a TN767 series DS1 Interface circuit pack Two types of DS1 interfaces exist 1 24 DS0 channels on a 1 544 Mbps link or 2 31 DS0 channels 1 framing channel on a 2 048 Mbps link For additional ma...

Page 1772: ...following Aux Data values for Error Type 3585 represent the trunk s ISDN call state at the time the unexpected request to restart the channel was received from the remote switch This information can...

Page 1773: ...be retired automatically whenever an outgoing or incoming call that uses this trunk is answered by the called endpoint If problems persist then busy out the ISDN trunk to take it out of the hunt grou...

Page 1774: ...ces to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available The port may be in use on a valid call Use stat...

Page 1775: ...age 2 of the change trunk group form 1117 ABORT A service state audit message is outstanding 1 Wait two minutes and then try again 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the a...

Page 1776: ...uit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000...

Page 1777: ...ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times Any FAIL The NPE of the tested port did not conference the tone...

Page 1778: ...00 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute in...

Page 1779: ...n the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a transitional state 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 4 FAIL Th...

Page 1780: ...t for the 15 minute cycle but tries to recover immediately For interfaces not using country protocol 1 the Service State Audit executes only if the trunk is in the OOF FE state A message is sent to th...

Page 1781: ...this trunk 1 Consult the procedures for ISDN LNK ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port and PI LINK Processor Interface Link FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 t...

Page 1782: ...nnel ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port which is listed in the Error Log as ISDN LNK ISDN PLK the Error Type is 1 Table 10 362 TEST 257 Call State Audit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendatio...

Page 1783: ...lit yellow LED on the Maintenance Test circuit pack also indicates that a test call is running There are two methods available to place an outgoing ISDN PRI test call in G3iV1 1 286 and G3iV2 386 In t...

Page 1784: ...or HDB3 the default duration of the test call is 8 6 seconds Otherwise if the B channel is restricted ZCS the default duration of the test call is 9 4 seconds Once the test call completes the bit err...

Page 1785: ...nel used to stop the test call The measurements are not cleared until the next test call begins NOTE Only one trunk can be tested in a given port network until the test call is canceled or completes T...

Page 1786: ...annot send any messages on behalf of this trunk 1 Check the results of Test 255 Signaling Link State Check Test 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a transitional state 1 Retry the command at 1 minute...

Page 1787: ...Feature Access Code administration for this Facility Test 1 Check the Dial Plan and Feature Administration forms None 2012 2000 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a...

Page 1788: ...Make sure service is provisioned by the network 2 Check the administration of the far end test line extension on the trunk group administration form 3 Check the administration of the test call BCC Be...

Page 1789: ...low the recommendations for ABORT code 2035 2214 ABORT Call terminated by unexpected disconnect 1 Wait 1 minute and then try again 2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 ABORT Internal system error 1 Follow recomme...

Page 1790: ...hould include getting the bit and block error rates by invoking status isdn testcall PASS The call worked A test pattern was sent and received properly the communications path is OK if the synchronous...

Page 1791: ...rinter Link and PMS PRNT PMS Printer Link MO is the same both of these MOs are described in the PMS PRNT JNL PRNT Maintenance documentation MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full...

Page 1792: ...Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 555 233 123 10 1006 Issue 4 May 2002 LGATE AJ See BRI SET LGATE BD See BRI BD LGATE PT See BRI PT...

Page 1793: ...on of the switch software restore of translations and periodically After initialization a query is made to a software module called the License Server This module reads the license file compares a ser...

Page 1794: ...ration number only See MO NO LIC error type 257 c Error Type 513 This error indicates that the license has expired and the six day timer is started When the six day timer expires call processing is re...

Page 1795: ...enter features Offer Category and capacities Once installed or initialized every hour the system compares these parameters which determine the system status If everything matches the switch runs the d...

Page 1796: ...sage within prescribed limits The license file serial number matches If it is an upgrade the switch requires a new License File License Error License File serial number does not match the hardware Sys...

Page 1797: ...en Call Processing Will Be Blocked in Approximately xxx hours appears the system is telling you that The switch is in License Error Mode The 6 day countdown timer has started and you have xxx hours be...

Page 1798: ...s mode Installing a valid License File that is consistent with the switch No License Outgoing and incoming calls only to administered emergency numbers If you initially login to the SAT if you get a m...

Page 1799: ...em Logged in ACD Agents Type III includes the product ID license serial identification number release number and capacities Type III features cannot be changed by any login under any circumstances IP...

Page 1800: ...ore quickly identify the which of these TYPE II and TYPE III features is causing the error compare the Used field with the value of the field itself the License File value NOTE Before usage is checked...

Page 1801: ...and Test to Clear Values General Information about log svn Error Log Entries a The number 1 15 that appears in the error type field corresponds to the location the login in the internal login data st...

Page 1802: ...rt where the final invalid login attempt involving the alarmed login ID was detected Valid port values for G3i products include MGR1 Dedicated manager 1 or G3 management terminal connection NET n Netw...

Page 1803: ...mation can be useful in determining the source of the invalid attempts and analyzing why they occurred The list logins command provides status information about logins on the system If a login has bee...

Page 1804: ...9600 baud However the system software throttles the rate of data flow to the EPN Maintenance circuit pack for display on the terminal to about 1200 baud All system commands can be executed via the EP...

Page 1805: ...maintenance slot is hard wired into the backplane of carrier A whereas the serial link from slot 2B02 to the maintenance slot is a ribbon cable connecting the two slots The serial link from the EPN M...

Page 1806: ...d 2 Busyout the Standby Expansion Links by issuing the busyout board PCSS command where PCSS is the 4 character circuit pack address of the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the EPN on the Standby l...

Page 1807: ...t pack is defective d The serial link between the Expansion Link in the B carrier and the EPN Maintenance circuit pack is defective 3073 a 0 1 Network Control Circuit Pack DPR Test 104 MAJOR WARNING2...

Page 1808: ...ck back to a known state After the test sequence runs the Error Log should be examined for MAINT errors of type 1 and 3073 to determine if the Network Control Circuit Pack DPR Test and EPN Maintenance...

Page 1809: ...on 1000 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1030 ABORT Internal system error 2028 ABORT Internal system error 2029 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minu...

Page 1810: ...e allowable time period 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2046 ABORT The EPN Maintenance circuit pack reported an invalid cabinet type Not...

Page 1811: ...pack location for the Standby link 3 Run the Short Test Sequence against the EPN Maintenance circuit pack If Test 106 still fails replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and retest Otherwise follow t...

Page 1812: ...enance circuit pack and is meant to clarify that only the one dealing with the EPN terminal is being tested Figure 10 62 EPN Manager I G1 or G3MT Connection Table 10 371 TEST 228 MGR I Channel Local L...

Page 1813: ...est disabled via software patch FAIL Test failed which means the EPN Manager I G1 or G3MT terminal is not usable 1 Run the test three more times Replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack if the test co...

Page 1814: ...request was not received within the allowable time period 2033 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2034 ABORT Background EPN Maintenance circuit...

Page 1815: ...circuit pack is lost Losing the EPN Maintenance circuit pack connection means loss of the EPN Manager I G1 or G3MT and EPN Environment maintenance If an Expansion Links switch does occur the software...

Page 1816: ...ses if Part 1 is successful and Part 2 fails Table 10 373 TEST 303 EPN Maintenance CP Sanity Maze Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run thi...

Page 1817: ...P Reset Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 10...

Page 1818: ...To determine which is the Standby link enter the status system command from the Manager I G1 or G3MT terminal Switch links by entering the set expansion link command followed by the 4 character Expan...

Page 1819: ...the EPN Maintenance circuit pack 2 If the test fails replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack If the tests passes the problem is with the Expansion Interface circuit pack 3 If the test still fails...

Page 1820: ...till fails replace the EPN Maintenance circuit pack and retest Otherwise follow the error routines for any errors that are logged by this Short Test Sequence Single Expansion Interface Link Switch 1 R...

Page 1821: ...nning 1 Follow up on the test results of the EPN Maintenance Circuit Pack Sanity Handshake Test 105 2 When problems associated with this test are resolved rerun Test 337 1035 ABORT Internal system err...

Page 1822: ...k 2 Rerun the test If the test continues to fail replace the Standby EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack 3 Rerun the test If the test continues to fail and the Standby link is on the B carrier then r...

Page 1823: ...an 20 seconds also cause the MAPD s PC to reboot which takes several minutes to complete Switch demanded tests Switch demanded diagnostic tests on the TN802 do not run unless the Internet trunking app...

Page 1824: ...ression cycle makes ringback busy and voice detection Do not administer these features Call Coverage Redirected Off Net CCRON Certain wireless phone coverage Call Coverage Call Forwarding Call Transfe...

Page 1825: ...ordinate specific administration and between the IP trunk and Avaya DEFINITY Server for any DCS functionality Some limitations on routing flexibility may apply ISDN IP trunking has no signalling capab...

Page 1826: ...unk circuit pack Table 10 377 Backing up TN802 administration data Step Description Comments 1 Busyout circuit pack At the Avaya DEFINITY Server terminal type busyout board UUCSS the address of the TN...

Page 1827: ...of overheating the TN802 circuit pack should not be placed directly above or below another MAPD circuit pack UPS protection Because Windows NT is more vulnerable to damage from a power interruption t...

Page 1828: ...te Figure 10 64 TN802 faceplate Table 10 379 lists the TN802 LCD messages that you might see if installing or servicing an IP Trunk Figure Notes 1 LCD display see Table 10 379 on page 10 1043 2 Reset...

Page 1829: ...ies window choose the communication port to which you connected the cable in Step 1 5 Click on Details and configure the settings Table 10 380 Table 10 379 TN802 LCD messages for IP trunks Display Exp...

Page 1830: ...th a local mouse and keyboard connected to it for these devices to work 1 Connect the VGA monitor to the VGA connector of the TN802 external cable 2 Plug the monitor into an AC power receptacle and tu...

Page 1831: ...tes 32 time ms TTL If there is no reply a Escalate the problem or replace the circuit pack The problem is not with the external network but within the circuit pack 3 At the command prompt type ping nn...

Page 1832: ...en Command Prompt This starts a DOS command line session 2 At the command prompt type ping 127 0 0 1 the local host default address and press Enter If configured correctly the system displays Reply fr...

Page 1833: ...orrectly the system displays Reply from nnn nn nn nn bytes 32 time ms TTL If there is no reply Check that the internal cables on the TN802 circuit pack Notes 4 and 6 in Figure 10 67 on page 10 1049 ar...

Page 1834: ...rcuit pack with the two additional boards connected through the side plane Figure 10 66 TN802 board assembly Figure Notes 1 Main TN802 board 2 Texas Microsystems Inc TMI board 3 Analogic board 4 Side...

Page 1835: ...the thee boards and interconnecting cables that make up the TN802 Figure 10 67 TN802 board assembly and cables side view Figure Notes 1 Main TN802 board 2 Side plane 3 Analogic board 4 SCSA Signal Com...

Page 1836: ...ly and cables end view Figure Notes 1 Analogic board 2 Texas Microsystems Inc TMI board 3 SIMMs memory 1 4 SCSA Signal Computing System Architecture ribbon cable 1 If the board is seated and you hear...

Page 1837: ...nlatch the circuit pack and remove it from the carrier 3 Remove the hard drive Remove the 2 screws and lift the hard drive out of its mounting bracket 4 Replace the hard drive Position the new hard dr...

Page 1838: ...oop Test 52 MIN ON test board UUCSS l r 20 257 f Any None 513 g Any MIN WRN3 ON 514 h 46086 MIN WRN3 ON 769 i 46085 MIN WRN3 ON 770 j 46096 MIN WRN3 ON 1025 d 4363 NPE Audit Test 50 1281 Any Loss of S...

Page 1839: ...test board UUCSS r 6 3840 p Any None 3841 q 4358 3842 r 46097 3843 s 46081 3999 t Any None 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate te...

Page 1840: ...mpts to reset the board If the reset fails the board is probably bad 1 Replace the circuit pack c Error Type 18 the circuit pack has been busied out 1 Release the board release board UUCSS d Error Typ...

Page 1841: ...ansmit FIFO Underflow threshold is 3 errors within 10 minutes the circuit pack cannot find the end of frame bit when transmitting a frame to Packet Bus 1 Clear the alarm using the following command se...

Page 1842: ...ng the circuit pack l Error Type 1538 hyperactive circuit pack is out of service and may exhibit one or more of the following symptoms The common circuit pack tests for example Test 50 and or Test 52...

Page 1843: ...ack received a bad control channel message from the switch This error is not service affecting and requires no action The Aux Data describes the following error events q Error Type 3841 the circuit pa...

Page 1844: ...N Does not take the circuit pack out of service but the circuit pack has generated 50 of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive This may be normal during heavy traffic periods Table 10 38...

Page 1845: ...1 1 N No this test either passes or ABORTS with Error Code 2000 problem with NT Short Test Sequence LongTest Sequence Reset Board Sequence D ND2 2 D Destructive ND Nondestructive NPE Connection Audit...

Page 1846: ...times PASS The circuit pack s SCOTCH NPE chip has been updated with its translation 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translation...

Page 1847: ...described in Replacing SPE Circuit Packs in Chapter 5 PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be d...

Page 1848: ...ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry reset board at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1015 ABORT Port is not out of service 1 Busyout the circuit pack busyout...

Page 1849: ...lready administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If this is the case the board is shut down Reseating the board re initializes the board 3 If the board w...

Page 1850: ...ils the test results Table 10 389 Blue Alarm Inquiry Test 139 results Windows NT up on the TN802 Then Cause Y Test passes Y Test aborts with ABORT 2000 Error Code Windows NT is not communicating with...

Page 1851: ...0 394 on page 10 1065 details the test results NOTE The query for slips always returns a 0 count Table 10 392 Major Alarm Inquiry Test 142 results If Windows NT is up on the TN802 When the switch conf...

Page 1852: ...S command DS1 Link Length between two DS1 endpoints Synchronization Source Control All Zero Suppression Framing Mode Signaling Mode Time Slot Number of the 697 Hz tone Time Slot Number of the 700 Hz t...

Page 1853: ...r the MAPD interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactive If this is the case the board...

Page 1854: ...slot The reserve slots do not have any interaction with the switch No tests are associated with this MO Both test board and busy out board abort when either is attempted on a reserved slot An error me...

Page 1855: ...applies only to a TN802B MedPro running the Media Processor application The MedPro hardware combines an angel complex a Windows NT PC and a TAP802 DSP card in a 3 slot package When operating as an IP...

Page 1856: ...and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test board UUCSS 1 a 0 Circuit pack removed or SAKI Test 53 MIN WRN2 2 If ports are assigned to the circuit pack then a minor alarm is raised If no...

Page 1857: ...ck release board UUCSS c Error Type 23 The MedPro circuit pack is not completely administered To be fully administered a MedPro circuit pack must meet all of these 4 conditions 1 Have an entry in the...

Page 1858: ...n out of service due to hyperactivity If Error Type 1538 is not present then the circuit pack has not been taken out of service but it has generated 50 of the messages necessary to be considered hyper...

Page 1859: ...E Circuit Packs in Chapter 5 3 Retry the command a maximum of 5 times PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board...

Page 1860: ...Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation None ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1015 ABORT Po...

Page 1861: ...the system or b the system is booting up Otherwise there is some inconsistency between the physical configuration and the data kept in the system 1 Verify that the board is physically in the system 2...

Page 1862: ...ils it is an indication that an illegal change was made and the customer should be notified Also writing the IP address parameters to the registry requires NT to reboot If the IP addresses match there...

Page 1863: ...test It runs because of in line errors during periodic and schedule maintenance and on demand Table 10 402 TEST 1379 Ping Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 2 ABORT Internal Err...

Page 1864: ...test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times 2805 FAIL The number of pings received did not match the number sent normally one ping sent This means that no ping responses were r...

Page 1865: ...ts replace the circuit pack PASS The circuit pack initializes correctly 1 Run the Short Test Sequence 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to inc...

Page 1866: ...onnected and you cannot talk on the network PASS The Ethernet port is connected and you can talk on the network 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be...

Page 1867: ...r G 729 is administered the MEDPROPT can only service 22 channels The MEDPROPT is physically made up of 11 individual DSPs but is treated logically as one port If individual DSPs on the TN802B TN2302...

Page 1868: ...out of service OOS and a MINOR alarm is raised The Aux Data field contains the number of DSPs that are Out Of Service OOS f Error Type 1025 The port is out of service OOS because of a board level fail...

Page 1869: ...ls and reports the number of failed DSPs A failure of 3 or fewer DSPs does not result in an alarm A failure of more than 3 and up to 8 DSPs results in a warning alarm A failure of more than 8 DSPs res...

Page 1870: ...Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times 2100 ABORT Could not...

Page 1871: ...of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors may be out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors Even if there are no TTR LEV errors there may not be a Tone Detector available on the network that c...

Page 1872: ...edia processor board PASS The board is functioning properly 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Resolve either wrong board Error 125 or no board Error 131 issues if applicable 2 Check that...

Page 1873: ...y traffic conditions or it may have timeslots out of service due to TDM BUS errors 1 If system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum...

Page 1874: ...ice and available 0 NO BOARD No board was detected by the test 1 Resolve either wrong board Error 125 or no board Error 131 issues if applicable 2 Check that the board is properly translated and inser...

Page 1875: ...PACCON firmware This type of memory is not erased during circuit pack resets It can be reprogrammed only via upgrade software DRAM is used for software data storage and it changes constantly DRAM lose...

Page 1876: ...errors against both the Processor circuit pack and Memory This test is run only on the Standby SPE in a High or Critical Reliability system On other systems or on the Active SPE the test is run only v...

Page 1877: ...ystems or on the Active SPE the test is run only via a reset system 4 command or a reset system 5 command Table 10 411 MEM BD Memory Order of Investigation Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence L...

Page 1878: ...l provide service this indicates that the Processor circuit pack or Memory has a problem but can still function The error code 1 indicates that MEM BD 1 is failing the test 1 Replace the PROCR Process...

Page 1879: ...memory failures Table 10 413 TEST 86 Text Checksum Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE for a descript...

Page 1880: ...for the maintenance strategy Memory Board Check Test 631 This test always passes Table 10 414 TEST 332 Memory Functional Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resour...

Page 1881: ...ops sending ACD data to the MIS and a Warning alarm is raised When finished enter release mis This clears the Warning alarm and allows the switch to send ACD data to the MIS Error Log Entries and Test...

Page 1882: ...ffice Trunk ports to any digital port or Digital Line or Trunk ports to any analog port An example of a Data Module to Central Office Trunk connection using a Modem Pool conversion resource is shown i...

Page 1883: ...ulation PCM format but are converted into Data Communications Protocol DCP format before going to the Digital Line or trunk in the connection There are two primary types of Modem Pool conversion resou...

Page 1884: ...m Pool Switched Connection with Integrated Pooled Modem Analog Pooled Modem Conversion Resource Digital Line TN754 DCP DCP DCP Digital Line Port Analog Line Port Data Module TN758 Central Office Trunk...

Page 1885: ...Pool administration and customer Data Module option settings should be checked In addition if the Modem Pool is a Combined type option settings should be checked on the external Modem and Data Module...

Page 1886: ...on when interpreting the results of the execution of test modem pool on Combined Modem Pools Figure 10 70 Typical Modem Pool Switched Connection with Combined Modem Pool Combined Modem Pool DCP DCP DC...

Page 1887: ...ool conversion resources The standard Digital Line and or Analog Line port tests are run on the ports associated with the Combined Modem Pool The test descriptions for those maintenance objects MOs sh...

Page 1888: ...but is performed twice in order to test both NPEs in the Modem Pool Port Order of Investigation ShortTest Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Modem Pool NPE Crosstalk...

Page 1889: ...er to TONE PT Tone Generator Maintenance documentation 3 If neither condition exists retry the test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port has been seized by a user for a valid...

Page 1890: ...he conversion resource under test This action drops any existing calls on that circuit pack 5 If the test continues to abort replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest 6 If the test continues to...

Page 1891: ...s port should be investigated using other port tests and by examining station trunk or external wiring Table 10 416 TEST 97 Modem Pool Conference Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation...

Page 1892: ...the port is available for testing 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to a previously existing error on the specific port or because of...

Page 1893: ...t continues to abort replace the Pooled Modem circuit pack and retest 6 If the test continues to abort with this error code after circuit pack replacement escalate the problem 65515 ABORT System resou...

Page 1894: ...the Data Channel and Modem Pool Port go on hook within the proper time ANY FAIL The Network Processing Element NPE of the tested port did not conference the tones correctly This causes noisy and unrel...

Page 1895: ...ther hardware used during the test was in use 1 Wait one minute and attempt the test again 2 If it is absolutely necessary to test the conversion resource the call must be dropped by issuing a busyout...

Page 1896: ...is error occurs 1 Wait one minute and attempt the test again 2 If the same error persists after five attempts at one minute intervals escalate the problem 5002 ABORT The Network Control Channel alloca...

Page 1897: ...1 Follow the repair procedures for Error Code 5001 5009 ABORT The Network Control Channel allocated for this test did not handshake correctly 1 Attempt the test again 2 If the same error occurs test...

Page 1898: ...did not respond correctly to the setup message sent to it after the connection was established 1 Attempt the test again 2 If the same error occurs test the DATA CHL circuit pack using the test data m...

Page 1899: ...t able to allocate all the necessary resources to execute this test An ABORT simply indicates that the conversion resource was in use when the audit was performed No repair action is necessary unless...

Page 1900: ...process them Other resources on the MMI pack are 32 ports 4 digital signal processors that manage the 32 resources NOTE Refer to Troubleshooting MMCH in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures for M...

Page 1901: ...DEFINITY Server must have the ESM installed See the status esm command in Chapter 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble Clearing Aids Figure Notes Figure 10 72 Typical ESM connections CAUTION The TN2207...

Page 1902: ...Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 555 233 123 10 1116 Issue 4 May 2002 Figure 10 73 TN787 Multimedia Interface MMI Circuit Pack...

Page 1903: ...sient communication problems between the switch and this circuit pack Execute the test board PCSS command and refer to the repair procedures for the Control Channel Looparound Test 52 in the XXX BD se...

Page 1904: ...efer to Test 1123 for repair procedures g A failure of the time slot interchanger has been detected Reset the circuit pack using busyout board PCSS reset board PCSS and release board PCSS If the reset...

Page 1905: ...r to time slots reserved for other connections If the TSI is not working correctly one way and noisy connections may occur If the test passes then the TSI is able to communicate over the TDM bus This...

Page 1906: ...of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors in the Error Log 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors in the Error Log 3 If neither condition exists retry the test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2000 ABOR...

Page 1907: ...errors Refer to TDM BUS to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat the test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1003 AB...

Page 1908: ...zation signal unless an MMI circuit pack is either pulled out of the system or reset by using a technician command Test 1122 runs when the long option of the test board command is entered initiating t...

Page 1909: ...rcuit pack is idle reset the circuit pack using busyout board PCSS then reset board PCSS followed by release board PCSS 2 Rerun the test if the same result occurs again replace the MMI circuit pack 20...

Page 1910: ...ins a maximum of 32 ports If the number of in service MMI ports falls below the minimum port capacity value entered on the System Parameters Maintenance form under the Minimum Maintenance Threshold se...

Page 1911: ...ommand to verify the number of MMI ports 3 Compare this number with the value listed in the MMI field on the System Parameters Maintenance form number listed in step 1 a minimum thresholds number for...

Page 1912: ...tion The Multimedia Interface Circuit Pack provides a number of H 221 protocol terminations for bit streams received from the TDM bus The Multimedia Interface demultiplexes the H 221 bit stream audio...

Page 1913: ...s which manage the 32 resources These resources are directly mapped to DSPs All 8 resources that the circuit pack controls may be placed out of service by the failure of one of these DSPs Figure 10 74...

Page 1914: ...ror is received This error is logged for all 8 resources connected to this particular DSP If this DSP continues to fail sanity a Minor alarm is raised Replace the circuit pack e This error occurs when...

Page 1915: ...purposes only System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Resource Looparound Test 1111 This test is destructive This test checks the connectivity of the resource within MMI circuit...

Page 1916: ...ould not allocate a tone detector for the test The system is oversized for the number of tone detectors present or some tone detectors are out of service 1 Look for TTR LEV errors in the Error Log If...

Page 1917: ...times 0 1 2 FAIL This resource cannot guarantee data integrity and is out of service The following error codes indicate failure of a particular media loop 0 video 1 audio 2 low speed data 1 Replace th...

Page 1918: ...ternal clock and there should be no service disruption A loss of synchronization is usually the result of a circuit pack failure The maintenance strategy is to switch the master source away from the b...

Page 1919: ...restarts reboot through cold 2 MMI synchronization recovers during board insertion Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes There are no...

Page 1920: ...tely measure performance and health of analog trunks the TN771 should be replaced when a new circuit pack is available Figure 10 75 ATMS Tie Trunk Test Call MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Co...

Page 1921: ...k state on off hook of the Maintenance Test Analog Port This error is not service affecting and no action is required M T ANL Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off B...

Page 1922: ...basis If the NPE is not working correctly one way and or noisy connections may be observed This test is part of a port s long test sequence and takes approximately 10 to 20 seconds to complete Order...

Page 1923: ...one detectors present or some tone detectors may be out of service 1 Look for TTR LEV errors in the Error Log If present refer to TTR LEV Maintenance documentation 2 Look for TONE PT errors in the Err...

Page 1924: ...e test is done next for the primary information channel This test is the same as Conference Test 6 Only one value Pass Fail or Abort is generated as a result of the two tests If either fails or aborts...

Page 1925: ...fic conditions or it may have time slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors Refer to TDM BUS Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM BUS errors A system is considered under heavy traffic when the Cal...

Page 1926: ...E BD circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack See the section on Tone Generator circuit pack 3 If the Tone Clock and Tone Detector circuit packs are functioning properly and the test still fails rep...

Page 1927: ...the counter reaches some preset threshold and then not sent again until the counter is cleared This test is used to clear the counter so that if the port continues to fail during or after SPE demande...

Page 1928: ...it pack and repeat the test 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times Any FAIL Internal System Error 1 Retr...

Page 1929: ...equest was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed the test could not be completed...

Page 1930: ...t and M T PKT Maintenance Test Packet Bus Port Maintenance documentation for related digital port and Packet Bus port information respectively MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1...

Page 1931: ...entation for more information on ISDN PRI test calls The Maintenance Test Digital Port maintenance ensures that the digital trunk testing function is operating correctly The Maintenance Test Digital P...

Page 1932: ...555 233 123 10 1146 Issue 4 May 2002 Figure 10 76 ISDN PRI Outgoing Test Call DIGITAL MAINT TEST CIRCUIT PACK TN771B C PORT TN767 FAR END CIRCUIT PACK INTERFACE DS 1 ISDN PRI PI CIRCUIT PACK TN765 SPE...

Page 1933: ...d against Port 3 e This error indicates that the Maintenance Test Digital Port has been unable to successfully loop data from a tone generator to a tone detector f This error indicated that call proce...

Page 1934: ...controls port connectivity gain and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses...

Page 1935: ...ate the problem 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time s...

Page 1936: ...ete as indicated in the Start Time and Duration fields of the above display or abort the test call with clear isdn testcall tg mem where tg mem is determined from the B channel field of the above disp...

Page 1937: ...e test continues to abort and the port is not in use escalate the problem 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum...

Page 1938: ...the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the test at one minute interv...

Page 1939: ...ter so that if the port continues to fail during or after SPE demanded testing the Angel sends a message to indicate that fact This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance...

Page 1940: ...ynchronous mode b sending data from Port 3 to Port 2 in asynchronous mode c sending data from Port 2 to Port 3 in synchronous mode and d sending data from Port 3 to Port 2 in synchronous mode The test...

Page 1941: ...t at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid ISDN PRI Test Call Use the list isdn testcall command to determine which call is using the port from the M T Po...

Page 1942: ...tch was unable to communicate with the port circuitry used for digital trunk testing 100 FAIL Data was not sent from Port 2 to Port 3 successfully in asynchronous mode 101 FAIL Data was not sent from...

Page 1943: ...ute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort replace the circuit pack and repeat the test 2100 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the com...

Page 1944: ...rating correctly The Maintenance Test Packet Bus Port is alarmed if maintenance determines that the port s maintenance functions are operating incorrectly When Maintenance Test Packet Bus Port mainten...

Page 1945: ...g If the Maintenance Test Packet Bus Port reconfigures the Packet Bus 12 times within 15 minutes a Minor alarm is raised When the Minor alarm is raised this is an indication that the Packet Bus mainte...

Page 1946: ...all grp member command prior to replacing the circuit pack Ignore the Packet Bus error indication since the Maintenance Test circuit pack has been determined to be defective d This error indicates a f...

Page 1947: ...ail during or after SPE demanded testing the Angel sends a message to indicate that fact This test is only used to send a message to the Angel on the Maintenance Test circuit pack Therefore this test...

Page 1948: ...ce Test Packet Bus Port has reported a failure of the on board self test 2060 FAIL The Maintenance Test Packet Bus Port has reported an invalid state for the Packet Bus 2061 FAIL The SPE cannot commun...

Page 1949: ...stricted All call origination will be restricted to outgoing emergency numbers incoming calls will be restricted to a Administration Attendant Console number The license file is loaded onto a switch d...

Page 1950: ...of a duplicated G3si Call processing will be restricted to outgoing calls to emergency numbers and incoming calls to an Administration number c Error Type 513 This error indicates that the license ha...

Page 1951: ...s to an administration number h Error Type 1793 This error indicates a Software Version Mismatch has occurred Maintenance software will notify Call processing software to stop all new call origination...

Page 1952: ...resolution and escalation Two service states are specified in a DS1OPS Line maintenance They are out of service in which the line is in a deactivated state and cannot be used for either incoming or o...

Page 1953: ...alarm is raised against the OPS LINE port However there should be errors logged against the DS1 Interface circuit pack Look for DS1 BD errors in the Hardware Error Log and follow procedures provided...

Page 1954: ...The NPE controls port connectivity and gain and provides conferencing functions on a per port basis The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and nev...

Page 1955: ...nd at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have time slots out of servi...

Page 1956: ...ircuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error Error code 1793 indicates a problem with the DS1 interface board and any problems on the associated DS1 BD or UDS1 BD should be resolved...

Page 1957: ...ook for TONE BD and or TONE PT errors in the error log If present refer to the TONE BD Maintenance documentation and to the TONE PT Maintenance documentation 2 Retest when the faults from step 1 are c...

Page 1958: ...slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors The status health command may be used to determine whether the system is experiencing heavy traffic Refer to the TDM BUS TDM bus Maintenance documentation t...

Page 1959: ...log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error Error code 1793 indicates a problem with the DS1 interface board and any problems on t...

Page 1960: ...rd problem such as an incoming seizure or an off hook port seizure during the test Retest the board 3 If all of the ports fail check the CARR POW see note below 4 If several ports fail check the error...

Page 1961: ...If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on replace the pack PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections User reported troubles on this port should be investigated us...

Page 1962: ...to determine the station extension of the port Use the status station command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavail...

Page 1963: ...the associated DS1 BD or UDS1 BD If tests 138 through 145 on the associated DS1 BD or UDS1 BD are also aborting with error code 2000 hyperactivity on the board or facility is indicated In this case t...

Page 1964: ...lation has been updated successfully The current trunk states kept in the DS1 Interface circuit pack and switch software are consistent 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port...

Page 1965: ...ck while common channel signaling is specified 1006 ABORT The test was aborted because the station is out of service This condition may be accompanied by an error type 18 entry in the error log You ma...

Page 1966: ...ssociated DS1 BD or UDS1 BD are also aborting with error code 2000 hyperactivity on the board or facility is indicated In this case the hyperactivity problem should be dealt with first 3 If the test c...

Page 1967: ...the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Check to ensure that the board tr...

Page 1968: ...ion for example A B C D or E SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit pack is located for example 01 02 etc and pp is the 2 digit port number for example 01 Full Name of MO PDMOD...

Page 1969: ...ts two logical information channels and one signaling channel MPDMs and MTDMs use the primary information channel for data communications and the signaling channel for dialing and call supervision The...

Page 1970: ...this document where the service state of a data module is mentioned It is helpful to understand what is meant by the different service states that may exist An explanation of these service states fol...

Page 1971: ...20 None WARNING OFF 15 c Any None 18 d 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCSSpp 257 e 40971 None 5132 2 G3iV1 1 286 and G3iV2 386 only 0 Data Module Audits Test 17 WARNING j OFF test port...

Page 1972: ...ed an on board counter is incremented The user could experience a noisy port or link This is an off board problem detected by the port circuit Check for faulty wiring check for a faulty data module or...

Page 1973: ...ode NOTE Refer to the DEFINITY Communications System Generic 1 and Generic 3i Wiring 555 204 111 g An in line maintenance error has generated an off board warning due to some problem with the link to...

Page 1974: ...int may have been disconnected l This endpoint is part of processor link Link initialization has failed or demand test for 183 for PI links has failed and is indicating the associated PDM as the cause...

Page 1975: ...PCSSpp command to determine the station extension of the port Use the station status command to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the...

Page 1976: ...at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the extension of the data module port Use the status da...

Page 1977: ...cessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2500 ABORT Internal System Error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 tim...

Page 1978: ...Test is done next for the primary channel This test is the same as the Analog Line Terminal Port Conference Test 6 Only one value Pass Fail or Abort is generated as a result of four tests run If any t...

Page 1979: ...xists retry the command at one minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times 1004 ABORT The port was seized by a valid call during the test The test has been aborted Use the display port PCSSpp command to...

Page 1980: ...usable This could also disrupt other users 1 Run circuit pack tests to check the Tone Generator and the Tone Detector circuit packs using the test board UUCSS short command 2 Resolve any problems that...

Page 1981: ...g the test board UUCSS short command 2 Resolve any problems that are detected on the Tone Generator circuit pack or Tone Detector circuit pack 3 If the Tone Generator and Tone Detector circuit packs a...

Page 1982: ...rmation and health information back This information is checked and a pass fail result is provided Ringer Update This updates the data module s ringer state according to processor records Translation...

Page 1983: ...s to abort replace the Digital Line circuit pack and repeat the test 6 ABORT Data module translation update aborted 1 Verify the data module is connected to the PBX 2 Retry the command at one minute i...

Page 1984: ...circuit pack and to the SPE where it is checked for consistency This test aborts if no terminal or communications equipment is connected to the data module It also aborts if a number of local PBX res...

Page 1985: ...RT Extension number not valid 1032 ABORT Extension number not correct length 1 Verify that the data module extension is administered correctly 2 If the administration data is correct escalate the prob...

Page 1986: ...uit pack used by this test does not support baud rates greater than 9600 bps Verify that the baud rate of the data module is set to 9600 bps or less 1040 FAIL Data received from remote loop back does...

Page 1987: ...s test the Network Control Data Channel using the test data module command and a known working data module 3 Replace the Digital Line circuit pack and repeat the test 4 If the test continues to fail e...

Page 1988: ...r example ISDN video codecs but it retains provisions for non ISDN application equipment by using PRI terminal adapters In the same sense that a DEFINITY data module acts as a DCP or BRI terminal adap...

Page 1989: ...rvice state is negotiated with the far end terminal adapter and it changes over time Also the service state may have a far end or near end component and it is initialized to the Out Of Service Far End...

Page 1990: ...arry the signaling traffic If there is a problem with the ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port the PRI Endpoint Port is affected The ISDN PRI Signaling Link Port in turn depends on the PI LINK Processor Inter...

Page 1991: ...n Maintenance Far end MTC FE This state is reached when the far end terminal adapter does not respond to messages sent over the signaling link for a particular port after a certain amount of time This...

Page 1992: ...LINK LINK NO OR TRANSIENT STATE FOR CRAFT DEMANDED LONG TEST OF THE PORT CRAFT RELEASE OF SIGNALING LINK IF D CHANNEL CONTROLLING THE B CHANNEL IS UP SEND A MESSAGE REQUESTING TRANSITION TO IN SERVICE...

Page 1993: ...ed below the X NOTE Refer to Troubleshooting PRI Endpoint Problems in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures for a layered approach to the processing of PRI Endpoint problems Table 10 449 PRI Endpoi...

Page 1994: ...sent waiting for reply from far end terminal adapter 2 minutes X X Wait a couple minutes until Pending State not present check service state Processor Interface Link busied out by system technician C...

Page 1995: ...to messaging X Warn Alarm Periodically Maintenance will try to resend messages To speed process run system technician demanded test test port PCSSpp Test 256 Far end port busied out OOS FE Far end po...

Page 1996: ...d Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any...

Page 1997: ...ween this switch and the terminal adapter at the other end of the connection with regard to the ISDN service state of the PRI Endpoint Port This switch tries to recover by performing a service state a...

Page 1998: ...her such values can be ignored 10 A call in a stable talking state was cleared unexpectedly by the far end terminal adapter with an ISDN RESTART message This state is called the active state 4 7 8 260...

Page 1999: ...talks on the selected time slot and that it never crosses over to time slots that are reserved for other connections If the NPE is not working correctly one way and noisy connections may be observed T...

Page 2000: ...errors The status health command can be used to determine if the system is experiencing heavy traffic Refer to TDM Bus Maintenance to diagnose any active TDM Bus errors 1 If system has no TDM Bus err...

Page 2001: ...ding 1 Wait 2 minutes and then try again 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2020 A...

Page 2002: ...er to an already existing error on the specific port or to a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or against the circuit pack and attempt to diagno...

Page 2003: ...te the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times FAIL The test failed due to Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute inte...

Page 2004: ...om the circuit pack This is a normal abort when the rollabout video feature is enabled To complete the test on this port do one of the following 1 Re attach the disconnected PRI terminal adapter or 2...

Page 2005: ...ce state of this port does not affect the service state of other ports in the PRI Endpoint If an incoming call that uses this port is presented while in such a state a Service State Audit attempt is i...

Page 2006: ...otiation failed that is the far end terminal adapter twice failed to respond within the mandatory two minute window This switch automatically retries approximately every 15 minutes If the port was ini...

Page 2007: ...as ISDN LNK the Error Type is 1 Table 10 457 TEST 257 Call State Audit Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1019 ABORT An audit is already in progress 1 Wait two minutes and try agai...

Page 2008: ...Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times PASS This switch sent a call state auditing message to the far end terminal adapter to verify the state of the call active on this port...

Page 2009: ...essor Interface PI BD circuit pack then it alarms both the System Communication Interface and the Processor Interface circuit pack Processor Interface circuit pack maintenance is also used to test the...

Page 2010: ...sequence are run On the Active PI if there are no enabled Processor Interface links on the Communication Interface Links Form only the XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack tests execute Error Log Entries a...

Page 2011: ...circuit pack is located on an Active SPE complex If this is a Duplicated Option system verify that there is an equal number of Processor Interface circuit packs in each SPE complex If there is not an...

Page 2012: ...cuit pack is logically administered To resolve this problem either remove the wrong circuit pack and insert the logically administered circuit pack OR use the change circuit pack command to re adminis...

Page 2013: ...the table below when inspecting errors in the system By clearing error codes associated with the Standby Processor Interface Circuit Pack Test for example you may also clear errors generated from othe...

Page 2014: ...e if the reset interface PCS command is used If the checksum fails then the firmware is downloaded again from the tape Table 10 459 TEST 423 Standby PI Board Test Error Code Test Result Description Re...

Page 2015: ...and 3 If the problem still exists then refer to the TAPE Maintenance documentation for possible TAPE errors If there are no TAPE errors repeat the test command up to 5 times If problem still exists re...

Page 2016: ...IA port cannot be used in a High or Critical Reliability system The Processor Interface Link can be in three different states These states can be seen using the status link lnk no system technician co...

Page 2017: ...relevant field of the status screen is the channel status which can be in 1 of 7 different states see the following table State 6 is normal state for the processor channel for X 25 links and state 10...

Page 2018: ...SDN PRI link is currently down It is periodically restarted or can be forced to restart via busyout release link lnk no 10 ISDN PRI link is up This is the normal state of the channel The link is in da...

Page 2019: ...no 513 d Any none MAJOR WARNING2 OFF busyout release link lnk no 769 Any PI Loop Around Test 182 WARNING ON test link lnk no l r 2 1025 Any TDM Loop Around Test 183 WARNING OFF test link lnk no l r 2...

Page 2020: ...ink to restart it This is not a Processor Interface hardware problem Aux values of concern any others can be ignored 0 Processor Interface circuit pack indicates that the ISDN PRI link is down 1 An in...

Page 2021: ...e status trunk trk grp member or status data module ext If the destination is in service active then the commands are busyout trunk trk grp member and release trunk trk grp member on both sides of the...

Page 2022: ...the Feature Related System Parameters Form The time out is administered between 6 and 25 seconds No response was received from the remote destination Check the status of the remote destination This m...

Page 2023: ...blems with the data module or connection to the data module Other errors specific to the data module may also be logged if this is the case j TN765 PI BD determined that the ISDN link went down Check...

Page 2024: ...status is not in service then go to Step 2 If the link status is in service and for X 25 some of the processor channel pairs are incomplete remote channel not specified meaning that the processor chan...

Page 2025: ...rrect on the local and remote PBXs 7 Try to isolate the problem in the link if hardware is at fault Test the link via the test link lnk no long system technician command a If Test 182 fails three time...

Page 2026: ...e D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Processor Interface Loop Around Test 182 X D TDM Loop Around Test 183 X D ISDN Hardware Test 234 X ND Link Quality Test 233 X X ND Data Module Internal Loop A...

Page 2027: ...rcuit pack reports the failure It is a good check of most of the working hardware on the Processor Interface circuit pack Table 10 461 TEST 182 Processor Interface Loop Around Test Error Code Test Res...

Page 2028: ...since TDM Bus buffers could be at fault 13 ABORT The TN765 circuit pack has not been reset yet or is currently being reset 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If test con...

Page 2029: ...circuit pack should be replaced It is not run on ports administered as EIA Table 10 462 TEST 183 TDM Loop Around Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1 ABORT Link was not busied out...

Page 2030: ...m 16 80 84 85 93 94 102 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort then reset the PI BD via the test interface PCS long...

Page 2031: ...et 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If test continues to abort with error code 13 then check status of all BX 25 and or ISDN PRI links on this TN765 via the status link...

Page 2032: ...invalid frame errors and excessive Level 2 resets 1 See PI LINK Processor Interface Link Maintenance documentation for this maintenance object 16392 FAIL HDLC receive rate exceeded the threshold 1640...

Page 2033: ...cannot be brought up until DS1 maintenance changes the state to in service This is more of a status inquiry than a test Thus the only recovery procedure is to refer to DS1 BD DS1 Trunk Circuit Pack Ma...

Page 2034: ...ort due to alarm severities Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN only C is the carrier des...

Page 2035: ...tested then the active test sequence is run which is DESTRUCTIVE Refer to PI SCI System Communication Interface Maintenance documentation for details on these tests Only the Standby Processor Interfac...

Page 2036: ...mmon Port Circuit Pack for information about these tests Table 10 467 System Technician Demanded Tests PI PT Active Processor Interface Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D...

Page 2037: ...e on the Processor Interface circuit pack Table 10 468 TEST 404 Standby Processor Interface Port Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2 9 16 80 84 85 93 94 102 ABORT Internal system...

Page 2038: ...est If the test continues to fail try resetting the circuit pack via the reset interface PCS command 2 If test continues to fail replace the TN765 circuit pack Refer to Chapter 6 Reliability Systems A...

Page 2039: ...can be four Processor Interface circuit packs but only two on the same carrier are active at any one time If errors against the SCI can be related to the Processor Interface circuit pack then the circ...

Page 2040: ...The test interface long command resets the PI BD and causes all ISDN PRI and BX 25 links to come down 769 c Any none MAJOR WARNING3 3 Major alarms may be downgraded to Warning alarms based on the valu...

Page 2041: ...ption System follow procedures in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures for instructions on how to replace the Processor circuit pack TN786 or TN2404 TN790 Use the following steps for G3i 386 and l...

Page 2042: ...icating with TN765 circuit pack The software lost handshake with the Processor Interface circuit pack See Note b for recovery d Error while communicating with TN765 circuit pack See Note b for recover...

Page 2043: ...sh where PCS is an active Processor Interface circuit pack WARNING The test interface long command resets the PI BD and causes all ISDN PRI and BX 25 links to come down For information about testing t...

Page 2044: ...again from Processor circuit pack If it passes SCI Start completes and the associated BX 25 and ISDN links are started up If the checksum failure persists refer the footnote b of Hardware Error Table...

Page 2045: ...dure 3 In G3i 286 if the problem continues to exist after replacing the tape then replace the TN765 Processor Interface circuit pack Refer to Chapter 6 Reliability Systems A Maintenance Aid for instru...

Page 2046: ...Unassigned data link hardware failure 3 4002 CPU function test failed hardware failure 4 4003 Local Processor Interface RAM memory test failed hardware failure 5 4004 Local EPROM memory test failed h...

Page 2047: ...Packet Bus maintenance is always performed since the Packet Bus is enabled automatically at system boot Packet Bus testing is dependent on the following hardware components TN771 Maintenance Test circ...

Page 2048: ...I ADJ These interactions are discussed in the Circuit Packs That Use the Packet Bus section of the chapter referenced in the note above The following list summarizes some of the important points to co...

Page 2049: ...RES g Circuit pack and port in line errors that are not relevant to the Packet Bus or that indicate a circuit pack failure are acted upon in the normal fashion h Normal background maintenance periodic...

Page 2050: ...a problem with the Packet Bus itself Table 10 472 PKT BUS Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If...

Page 2051: ...If this is the only active error against the Packet Bus the Packet Bus is still in service Therefore due to the disruptive nature of the Packet Bus Fault Isolation and Correction procedures repairs s...

Page 2052: ...as been disabled due to more than one circuit pack reporting in line errors If this occurs more than three times in 15 minutes that is if maintenance is disabled due to errors and then re enabled beca...

Page 2053: ...rs in the system By clearing error codes associated with the Packet Circuit Pack Audit Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Packet Control Bus...

Page 2054: ...out this is indicated by an Error Type 18 logged against PKT CTRL If the pack is busied out release the pack by entering the release packet control command Then re enter the command 2 If the Packet C...

Page 2055: ...2 If the test continues to abort check for problems with the Packet Control look for PKT CTRL error in the Error and Alarm Logs 2100 ABORT Maintenance could not allocate all of the necessary system r...

Page 2056: ...ce Test circuit pack has been busied out and should be released or c there is no Maintenance Test circuit pack in this port network and one must be installed 2 In a system without Critical Reliability...

Page 2057: ...coded as follows 1xxx The Maintenance Test Packet Bus port has reconfigured the Packet Bus around the faulty leads This occurs only in high or critical reliability systems 2xxx The Maintenance Test Pa...

Page 2058: ...esult Description Recommendation 2500 ABORT An internal operation failed the test could not be completed 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1 FAIL One Packet circuit pack h...

Page 2059: ...Packet Control circuit pack and a packet endpoint which is connected to a Packet circuit pack An ASAI adjunct is an example of a packet endpoint and a TN556 is an example of a Packet circuit pack In G...

Page 2060: ...is raised against the PKT CTRL MO This alarm indicates that the Packet Control circuit pack is missing Refer to the Maintenance Related System Parameters Form section in Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance...

Page 2061: ...t Control circuit pack due to an in line error or certain test failures Once a threshold number of these errors occur maintenance places the Packet Control circuit pack into an out of service state an...

Page 2062: ...re testing escalates to the Reset Test 586 so that the health of the Packet Control circuit pack can be determined g This error occurs when a certain circuit pack level diagnostic test fails indicatin...

Page 2063: ...bles below By clearing error codes associated with the Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 10 477 Active...

Page 2064: ...rol circuit pack and waiting for the response to each of the read and clear commands from the circuit pack Table 10 479 TEST 583 Packet Control Error Counter Read Clear Test Error Code Test Result Des...

Page 2065: ...the recommended repair procedures for Test 586 If the reset command passes issue the release packet control C command if the Packet Control circuit pack is on the active SPE and reissue the original c...

Page 2066: ...alarmed PPN Packet Bus Table 10 480 TEST 584 Packet Control Parity Circuitry Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1024 ABORT The Packet Control circuit pack s parity circuitry is cu...

Page 2067: ...tive SPE issue the busyout packet control C command Issue the reset packet control C command If the reset command fails follow the recommended repair procedures for Test 586 If the reset command passe...

Page 2068: ...ntrol is providing service and only its ability to maintain the Packet Bus is affected by the fault If the Packet Control appears to be providing service packet endpoints are functioning and or the st...

Page 2069: ...hether the Packet Control circuit pack can send and receive data correctly The test performs the following major functions 1 Establishes an LAPD link from the Packet Control circuit pack to itself See...

Page 2070: ...2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus is alarmed 1 Try to retire the alar...

Page 2071: ...acket control C command If the reset command fails follow the recommended repair procedures for Test 586 If the reset command passes issue the release packet control C command if the Packet Control ci...

Page 2072: ...ompleted a busied out Packet Control should be released via the release packet control C command Table 10 482 TEST 586 Packet Control Reset Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1029...

Page 2073: ...ed that is the Packet Bus Activated field on the Maintenance Related System Parameters Form is set to y but the circuit pack isn t installed If the system is supposed to have a Packet Control circuit...

Page 2074: ...m command and refer to the TAPE Maintenance documentation for recommended repair procedures to retire the alarm if one exists otherwise go to the next step 5 If the test has failed consistently with t...

Page 2075: ...g option and with a repeat option of 3 If any of the tests fail or if there are any tape alarms refer to the TAPE Maintenance documentation and follow the recommended repair procedures If a tape probl...

Page 2076: ...following circuit packs TN464C TN2464 Universal DS1 circuit packs ISDN PRI service TN767E DS1 Interface circuit pack ISDN PRI service w o Packet Bus TN556B C TN2198 ISDN BRI Line circuit packs ISDN B...

Page 2077: ...DCS Audio Information Exchange AUDIX Call Management System CMS Outgoing Call Management OCM Adjunct Switch Application Interface ASAI b System links ISDN PRI D channel signaling links ISDN BRI D cha...

Page 2078: ...face connections Packet Interface Service Operations The following sections provide more background information about Packet Interface service operations Administration Packet Interface Replacement De...

Page 2079: ...e is in service A reset would disrupt service existing calls and links to adjuncts such as AUDIX The software that controls Packet Interface maintenance puts a Packet Interface in the out of service s...

Page 2080: ...nterface also is put in the out of service state if it has reported a fatal fault at system initialization time or if the Packet Interface has been reset by background maintenance four times within th...

Page 2081: ...ries Also issue the status packet interface command to determine the service state of the Packet Interfaces for example in service out of service and information about the total number of Packet Inter...

Page 2082: ...DS1 C LAN circuit packs and ports CLAN BD RSCL PT PPP PT ETH PT ASAI circuit packs and ports ASAI BD ASAI PT ASAI ADJ ASAI EPT LGATE BD LGATE PT LGATE AJ ATTE PT ATTE AJ MAPD BD Media Processor circui...

Page 2083: ...or 2 The carrier location is required only for duplicated SPEs 2 Indicates that an alarm was raised but an associated error was not entered into the hardware error log due to a momentary overload con...

Page 2084: ...processor resets 1 Check to see if Error Types 257 513 769 1025 1281 or 3841 are present in the hardware error log If one or more of those error codes are present refer to the information associated...

Page 2085: ...ious and when it occurs maintenance software immediately escalates testing to the destructive reset test 889 1 If the Packet Interface circuit has a MAJOR alarm reset the Packet Interface reset io pro...

Page 2086: ...tion refer to the repair procedures for Test 884 m Error 1793 indicates a FLASH Memory test failure The Packet Interface may still be operational if no other errors are reported However the TN2401 TN7...

Page 2087: ...aintenance software automatically runs the Maintenance Looparound Test 886 If that test fails maintenance software generates Error Types 3073 and 3072 and it requests a system WARM restart If after th...

Page 2088: ...been corrected bring the Packet Interface back into service reset packet interface 2 If Error Type 3585 has not been reported enter the reset packet interface command and follow the repair steps asso...

Page 2089: ...t Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1006 1137 ABORT Packet Interface is in the out of service state so normal maintenance tests will not run 1 Request a Packet Interface reset using th...

Page 2090: ...ctive SPE a failure of the DUPINT circuit pack or loss of power on the standby SPE The SPE Select Switch field on the status syst 1screen displays spe a or spe b if the SPE SELECT switches are in the...

Page 2091: ...b If the system is equipped with the High Reliability or Critical Reliability Configuration and if the Packet Interface is on the standby SPE replace the standby TN2401 TN794 NetPkt circuit pack c If...

Page 2092: ...least disruption of service The Packet Interface is still functional but should be replaced since it may not operate after a system reboot and it will enter a fatal fault state if it is reset for othe...

Page 2093: ...erefore it is expected that the repair procedures associated with Abort Code 1137 out of service would normally be followed when failures with the Level 2 and Level 3 tests occur Test 885 executes dif...

Page 2094: ...witches are in the a or b position respectively 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 3 times 2...

Page 2095: ...ace may still be operational 1 Retry the command 2 If the test continues to fail with the same error code a If the system is not equipped with the High Reliability or Critical Reliability Configuratio...

Page 2096: ...looparound failure error code 769 being reported against a Packet Interface that is currently on the standby SPE If that is the case and if all other Packet Interface tests associated with the test p...

Page 2097: ...ot allowed to execute on a Packet Interface on the standby SPE 1 If you wish to run this test on a standby Packet Interface you must first make it active with reset system interchange 1338 ABORT The t...

Page 2098: ...94 NetPkt circuit pack run the test packet P long command If any of the tests fail the fault may be on the Packet Bus Refer to the PKT BUS Packet Bus Maintenance documentation for recommended repair p...

Page 2099: ...RAM locations indicates bad locations that cannot be used For a Packet Interface on the active SPE information about the number of bad Translation location is sent to maintenance software as an in lin...

Page 2100: ...re of the DUPINT circuit pack or loss of power on the standby SPE The SPE Select Switch field on the status syst 1 screen will display spe a or spe b if the SPE SELECT switches are in the a or b posit...

Page 2101: ...s for those circuit packs in this manual to clear those errors first c If the system is not equipped with the High Reliability or Critical Reliability Configuration replace the TN2401 TN794 NetPkt cir...

Page 2102: ...e disruption 3 If error code 512 or 768 is reported for a Packet Interface on a standby SPE replace the standby TN2401 TN794 NetPkt circuit pack 1024 1096 FAIL The Packet Interface on the standby SPE...

Page 2103: ...est Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1006 1137 ABORT Packet Interface is in the out of service state so normal maintenance tests will not run on it 1 Reset the Packet Interface using...

Page 2104: ...lure of the DUPINT circuit pack or loss of power on the standby SPE The SPE SELECT SWITCH field on the status syst 1 screen displays spe a or spe b if the SPE SELECT switches are in the a or b positio...

Page 2105: ...splay the active alarms Verify that there are no alarms on the standby SPE components other than the PKT INT alarms for the Peer Link failure If there are other alarms for SPE components clear those a...

Page 2106: ...est to the Packet Interface on the active SPE for peer link setup between the active and standby Packet Interfaces 1 Retry the test command after a one minute delay 2 If the test continues to fail a U...

Page 2107: ...t 1screen indicates the state of the standby SPE Unavailability may be caused by a variety of reasons such as the setting the SPE SELECT switches on the DUPINT circuit packs to the position of the act...

Page 2108: ...clear this failure Any Other Than Those Listed Above FAIL The Packet Interface diagnostic tests failed If the system is equipped with the High Reliability or Critical Reliability Configuration the re...

Page 2109: ...Avaya DEFINITY Server and a PMS device The strategy includes a set of tests for periodic diagnosis detection of errors during normal operation actions for troubleshooting and raising alarms for seriou...

Page 2110: ...utions 4 Is a data channel on Network Control circuit pack in in service idle state Enter list data command and find out the extension numbers of data channels on Network Control circuit pack Enter st...

Page 2111: ...pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test pms sh r 1 18 a 0 busyout pms link WARNING OFF release pms link 257...

Page 2112: ...EFINITY Generic 1 or Generic 3iV2 and PMS for a period of time the time is specified in system hospitality administration The PMS Link is torn down To clear this error refer to the Procedures for Rest...

Page 2113: ...s successfully established this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log No alarm is raised against this error j The PMS Link has been busied out for system technician demanded maintenance via the...

Page 2114: ...t the PMS device Once the PMS Link is successfully established this error disappears from the Hardware Error Log See Note 20x The PMS violated the application protocol The start of a database exchange...

Page 2115: ...ust returns PASS All resources allocated for a PMS Link are released after this test Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Link Tear Dow...

Page 2116: ...ABORT Internal System Error 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 30 ABORT Internal System Error 1 Refer back to the Procedures for Restoring the PMS Link section for resol...

Page 2117: ...he system and a PMS device an external Journal Printer device The strategy includes a set of tests for periodic diagnosis detection of errors during normal operation actions for troubleshooting and ra...

Page 2118: ...XX BD Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation for resolutions 4 Is a data channel on Network Control circuit pack in the in service idle state Enter list data command and find out the exten...

Page 2119: ...er Link section for resolution Table 10 492 PMS PRNT JNL PRNT Link Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Tes...

Page 2120: ...ter device is in the in service idle state If the data extension is not available then refer to the Procedures for Restoring the PMS Printer Link section for resolution d Link idle timer link comes do...

Page 2121: ...493 TEST 213 Link Tear Down Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 40 ABORT Internal system error 50 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1minute intervals a maximum of...

Page 2122: ...Internal system error 20 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 30 ABORT Internal system error 1 Refer to the Procedures for Restoring the PMS Prin...

Page 2123: ...ier Port Power Unit for AC Powered Systems or POWER Battery Battery Charger for AC Powered Systems For a multicarrier cabinet system using an external DC power source refer to one or more of the follo...

Page 2124: ...ter being drained A fully charged battery pack should bridge two power failures without causing a low battery warning to occur Replacing the Battery and Battery Charger Use the procedure below to repl...

Page 2125: ...ppropriate port network number determined via the Port field from the Alarm or Error Log Battery Battery Charger Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to...

Page 2126: ...tation for a description of this test d Refer to CABINET Cabinet Sensors Maintenance documentation for a description of this test e Refer to EXT DEV External Alarm Maintenance documentation for a desc...

Page 2127: ...n this test are not available 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1005 ABORT The battery charger is not connected If the system has a UPS and no battery charger and batter...

Page 2128: ...s to ABORT with a 2000 error code check for and resolve all DUPINT Duplication Interface errors in a Duplicated Option PPN PR MAINT Maintenance Tape Processor errors in a standard PPN or MAINT EPN Mai...

Page 2129: ...ccur on the Maintenance Tape Processor Duplication Interface and EPN Maintenance circuit pack that ARE NOT be detected by the respective maintenance but that cause many if not all environment tests to...

Page 2130: ...h or Critical Reliability or the EPN MAINT Maintenance circuit pack in an EPN could be reporting this condition incorrectly There are failures that can occur on the Maintenance Tape Processor Duplicat...

Page 2131: ...ng the PR MAINT Maintenance Tape Processor in a multicarrier cabinet PPN system without High or Critical Reliability the DUPINT Duplication Interface circuit pack in a PPN for a High or Critical Relia...

Page 2132: ...re ok PWR OK and BOK on the rectifier modules and the BIU Battery Interface Unit make sure the BIU and the RM0850 rectifiers are seated properly plugged in If the BOK LED on the BIU is ok use the foll...

Page 2133: ...ected by the respective maintenance If many environment tests are failing replace the suspect circuit pack depending on system configuration PASS The Maintenance Tape Processor in a multicarrier cabin...

Page 2134: ...e the type of powering provided all POWER tests should always pass or abort Since the tests should never fail POWER alarms should not be raised Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values MO Name in Al...

Page 2135: ...environment P sh r 1 3840 a 1005 or 1028 Assoc Test Battery Battery Charger Query Test 5 ON 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate t...

Page 2136: ...powered system this test should never fail During this test the status LED on the battery charger is lit and extinguished if the status of the battery charger is reported as normal This event is a res...

Page 2137: ...eporting a problem with power If this test fails the problem is with the circuit pack and not with POWER 1 The suspect circuit pack depending on the system configuration should be replaced and the tes...

Page 2138: ...pack The PGATE or PI can be used with the CLAN to create an X 25 to TCP IP bridge for adjunct and DCS connectivity Control LAN Congestion Controls The switch activates congestion controls on CLAN whe...

Page 2139: ...m test port UUCSSpp long clear Table 10 498 PPP PT Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all test...

Page 2140: ...long clear e Error Type 1281 System software received an indication that the far end has requested a disconnect of a session on this link This is a log only error f Error Type 1537 1538 Some or all p...

Page 2141: ...scriptions and Error Codes Investigate errors in the order they appear in the table below TDM Looparound Test 1285 NOTE This test is destructive This test verifies whether the CLAN PPP port can send a...

Page 2142: ...causing all calls and links associated with the port to be torn down 1002 ABORT No TDM bus timeslots available for the test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Escalate if the pr...

Page 2143: ...hich will cause all calls and links using the port to be torn down 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Es...

Page 2144: ...vals up to 5 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists 1963 ABORT Firmware indicates that the port is in use or ppp link is connected 1 Determine when the port is available for testing status clan port...

Page 2145: ...esources to run test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 2 Escalate if the problem persists FAIL CLAN circuit pack detected test failure 1 If the problem persists reset the circuit...

Page 2146: ...dule 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 1125 ABORT PPP link not in service 1 Verify whether ppp link is in service status port UUCSSpp or status link n 2 If the ppp link is not in se...

Page 2147: ...problem persists re administer the PPP connection through a different PPP port if available 4 If the problem still persists or if there are no other available PPP ports replace the circuit pack 1007...

Page 2148: ...s link n 2 If the PPP link is not in service release the link release link n or release port UUCSSpp 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test r...

Page 2149: ...re down ALL DOWN 1 Test the port test port UUCSSpp to verify the SCOTCH Synchronous Looparound Test 1275 result 2 If test passes wait for system software to indicate ALL UP 3 If the test fails check t...

Page 2150: ...bled enable the link change data module 3 Repeat the test 4 Escalate if the problem persists 1125 ABORT PPP Link is not in service 1 Verify whether PPP link is in service status port UUCSSpp or status...

Page 2151: ...th e g DS1 trunks 4 If the destination and other components in the path are in service and the test still fails execute busyout port UUCSSpp and release port UCCSSpp and repeat the test 5 If the test...

Page 2152: ...m is the administered modem option the internal modem is disabled The TN2404 TN790 has a higher speed 9600 baud internal modem or can support an external modem connected to the DCE port Error Log Entr...

Page 2153: ...e FAIL section of each test that fails for further instructions 1537 f Any MTP SAT Loop Around Test 228 MIN ON test processor a b r 3 1793 g Any MTP Aux Loop Around Test 229 MIN ON test processor a b...

Page 2154: ...system 4 command or a reset system 5 command d This test only runs on the active SPE e This test aborts if an external modem is not administered Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Se...

Page 2155: ...Any current memory card access to terminate and also to tear down any remote access INADS connection Table 10 506 TEST 101 MTP Reset Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 100 ABORT Th...

Page 2156: ...2 If the test continues to fail replace the Processor circuit pack 1197 FAIL The Maintenance Processor was reset but it responded with a NOT PASS status indicating that it did not pass initialization...

Page 2157: ...n this test 2 Or if required Wait about ten minutes until the INADS session is terminated and then re enter the command 1000 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available 1...

Page 2158: ...this test should be disabled To disable the test issue change system parameters maintenance and change the Test Remote Access Port field to n 5 If the INADS trunk checks out okay but the test still fa...

Page 2159: ...pplied by the modem NOTE The test does not send any data onto the INADS trunk However to pass the test does require the trunk to be present Table 10 508 TEST 103 MTP Analog Loop Around Test Error Code...

Page 2160: ...m software resources required to run this test are not available 2000 ABORT MTP did not respond to the test request Repeat test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times If only the MTP Analog Loop A...

Page 2161: ...st be communicating between the MTP DUART hardware and the modem hardware c The MTP DUART or related circuitry on the processor circuit pack may have failed The circuit pack should be changed at your...

Page 2162: ...is error entry indicates that the MTP DPR Test failed and that the Processor circuit pack should be replaced NOTE If the test is being run from a terminal other than the PPN SAT for example EPN SAT re...

Page 2163: ...vironmental alarms communicate with the Standby SPE or reboot from tape if necessary 1 Retry at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail replace the Processor circuit pa...

Page 2164: ...est are not available 1 Retry at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE for a description of these error codes 2000 ABOR...

Page 2165: ...29 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE for a description of these error codes 2000 ABORT The response to the test request was not received within the allowable ti...

Page 2166: ...intenance documentation for a description of these error codes 1000 ABORT The system software resources required for this test are not available 1 Repeat the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of...

Page 2167: ...Loop Back Test The AUX port may not be sending any auxiliary data to the auxiliary collection device 1 Repeat the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If test continues to fail replace...

Page 2168: ...2 Or if required Wait about ten minutes until the INADS session is terminated and then re enter the command 1000 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available 2033 Internal...

Page 2169: ...03 passed a Check the RS 232 connections from the DCE terminal on the switch to the DTE terminal on the modem RTS and CTS signals are being communicated between the MTP DUART hardware and the modem ha...

Page 2170: ...e local Central Office for problems with the INADS trunk and verify that the INADS number is correct If an external modem is being used instead of the internal MTP modem modem settings may be wrong Ap...

Page 2171: ...ntains the hardware required for controlling the environmental conditions The Maintenance Tape Processor provides the serial interfaces for the administration terminal and CDR ports The Maintenance Ta...

Page 2172: ...Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value1 1 You must manually repeat the command with the long option the designated number of times from the administration terminal or from a remote administ...

Page 2173: ...tigation ShortTest Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Processor Software Initiated Interrupt Test 77 a X X ND Processor ROM Checksum Test 80 a X X ND Processor Non mas...

Page 2174: ...515 TEST 101 MTP Reset Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE Maintenance documentation for a description...

Page 2175: ...unctioning correctly The system should continue to function but it will not have the ability to save translation to tape or to read tape if the system needs to be rebooted Environmental monitoring is...

Page 2176: ...successfully executed before you proceed to Step 2 2 Rerun the test 1131 ABORT INADS port is busy because the system is reporting alarms to INADS or because INADS is dialed into the system 1 Wait abou...

Page 2177: ...r circuit pack at your earliest convenience PASS MTP detected a loop current on the remote access port 1 If the system cannot call INADS or INADS cannot contact the system check with the local Central...

Page 2178: ...4 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled via administration 1 To en...

Page 2179: ...is probably dialed into the switch 1 Wait until INADS session is terminated and then re enter the command 10311 ABORT Test 102 MTP Outpulse Relay Test failed 1 Refer to Error Code 10204 of the MTP Ou...

Page 2180: ...k in and examine the Error Log for an error against PR MAINT with Error Type 769 no Aux Data This error entry indicates that the MTPDPR Test failed and that the Processor circuit pack should be replac...

Page 2181: ...nce procedure refer to ABORT Error Code 1030 in STBY SPE Maintenance documentation 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2028 ABORT System software...

Page 2182: ...oss of keyboard input from the PPN Manager I Table 10 519 TEST 106 MTP Sanity Handshake Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 AB...

Page 2183: ...enance The EPN Manager I if available or remote access can still be used 1 Repeat the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail replace the Processor circuit...

Page 2184: ...2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes 1000 ABORT The system software resources required for this te...

Page 2185: ...o the auxiliary collection device 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If test continues to fail replace the Processor circuit pack PASS The Auxiliary channel passed the Lo...

Page 2186: ...DRAM is used for software data storage and it changes constantly Both types of memory are present on the Processor circuit pack The diagnostics run appropriate tests on both memories DRAM is replacea...

Page 2187: ...SIMM A 2 SIMM B 3 SIMM A SIMM B 4 SIMM C 5 SIMM A SIMM C 6 SIMM B SIMM C 7 SIMM A SIMM B SIMM C Table 10 522 Memory Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test...

Page 2188: ...ests in the testing sequence Notes a Refer to PROCR TN2404 TN790 RISC Processor Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence...

Page 2189: ...failure of this test indicates a DRAM failure in the Processor circuit pack DRAM is replaceable and installed in 3 Single Inline Memory Module SIMM sockets on this circuit pack Replacement of these SI...

Page 2190: ...command performs the same operation as the reset system 4 command but is much less service disruptive 1 7 FAIL If the system can still provide service this indicates that the Processor circuit pack ha...

Page 2191: ...etry the command 1 7 FAIL The system may or may not continue to operate correctly The system may fail later when some action requires access to the corrupted area of the Text 1 The Flash ROM should be...

Page 2192: ...RT The test did not complete within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE Maintenance documentation for a descrip...

Page 2193: ...unctional Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 100 ABORT The test did not complete within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command 1000 ABORT System resources required to run th...

Page 2194: ...allowable time period 1 Retry the command 1022 1335 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE Maintenance doc...

Page 2195: ...provided equipment Refer to DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server Administrator s Guide for details of the CDR feature CDR Link Maintenance provides a strategy for maintaining the link between the...

Page 2196: ...nterchanging processors because the CDR ports on each of the processor circuit packs are connected via WIRE OR CDR Link Maintenance does not cover the maintenance of the elements composing the CDR phy...

Page 2197: ...service idle state Enter list data command and find out the extension numbers of data channels on TN777 Network Control circuit pack Enter status data extension command and make sure that at least on...

Page 2198: ...error Refer to the preceding Procedures for Restoring the CDR Link for resolution Table 10 528 CDR Link Maintenance Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test...

Page 2199: ...ed during the interval of daily maintenance then the error can be ignored d This error indicates that the CDR output device is in an off line state for example paper jam or paper out for a printer dev...

Page 2200: ...Link Tear Down Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 40 ABORT Internal system error 50 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1010...

Page 2201: ...rnal system error Internal error in Maintenance Action Process MAP MAP returns an error back to maintenance script HMM Timer expires while waiting for the reply from MAP 1 Retry the command at 1 minut...

Page 2202: ...Certain errors are logged to the Hardware Error Log for information purposes only Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Notes a These errors indicate that a system recovery action has been taken...

Page 2203: ...the DEFINITY software This includes all of the call processing maintenance and administration functions The Processor circuit pack is the most critical component to proper operation of the system The...

Page 2204: ...t option on the TN773 circuit pack G3iV1 1 286 The repeat option is valid only on the TN786B circuit pack You must manually repeat the command with the long option the designated number of times from...

Page 2205: ...Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Processor Non maskable Interrupt Test 8...

Page 2206: ...ncorrect interrupt vector The system may or may not continue to operate correctly 1 Repeat the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to fail the Processor circuit...

Page 2207: ...tion 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes FAIL The computed checksum did not match the ROM ch...

Page 2208: ...ck slot that is in the slot immediately to the right of the TN786B circuit pack remove the blank before removing the circuit pack Otherwise the circuit pack and or the two connectors that are used to...

Page 2209: ...EST 83 Processor Sanity Timer Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System software resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute inter...

Page 2210: ...ntenance and administration functions The RISC Processor circuit pack is the most critical component to the correct operation of the system The PR MAINT MainTenance Processor for RISC systems is respo...

Page 2211: ...command clears this alarm but the sanity timer is only tested during initialization so the alarm occurs again and the system is not protected against insane software Table 10 537 RISC Processor Circui...

Page 2212: ...ing sequence Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Processor Cache Test 895 X ND Processor Cache Audit 896 X X ND Processor Bus Time out...

Page 2213: ...10 538 Test 80 Processor BOOTPROM Checksum Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 100 ABORT The test did not complete within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command 1029 2014 20...

Page 2214: ...5 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE for a description of these error codes 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command FAIL The interrupt was not detected or acted upon 1 Repeat the command at 1 m...

Page 2215: ...e Processor circuit pack must be replaced as soon as possible if they are detected Table 10 540 Test 895 Processor Cache Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 100 ABORT The test did n...

Page 2216: ...or or cache test error Table 10 541 Test 896 Processor Cache Audit Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 100 ABORT The test did not complete within the allowable time period 1 Retry the co...

Page 2217: ...escription Recommendation 100 ABORT The test did not complete within the allowable time period 1 Retry the command 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE Mainte...

Page 2218: ...XX BD Common Port Circuit Pack section Ringing Caused by Maintenance Testing Test 48 may cause some terminal equipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance If this ringing disturbs the customer or...

Page 2219: ...ngs If the terminal does not ring then replace it Otherwise issue the test port UUCSSpp command and follow the procedure for Test 48 Table 10 543 Analog Line Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Asso...

Page 2220: ...quipment to ring briefly during daily maintenance If this disturbs the customer or the terminal equipment disable it by setting the Tests field on the change station extension form to n On some softwa...

Page 2221: ...This result is also reported for the system s Music On Hold port when it is off hook which it usually is 1 Enter display port UUCSSpp to determine the station s extension Enter status station extensio...

Page 2222: ...RT This port is currently a TTI port and the test will not execute on it 1 Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command the display shows that the port is a TTI port or the...

Page 2223: ...tinues to fail determine whether the customer is experiencing problems on this line Replace the circuit pack only if the customer is experiencing problems PASS The port s battery feed chip is able to...

Page 2224: ...e port is in use wait until port is idle 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1005 ABORT The test was aborted due to a configuration problem This test may not be applicable o...

Page 2225: ...cause of this failure 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 8 FAIL This does not indicate a hardware problem There may be an internal software error The ringer update failed 1...

Page 2226: ...tem resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port UUCSSpp command to determine the station extension Use the status station command...

Page 2227: ...erator may be defective or is not wired correctly see errors for RING GEN If it does not occur on other ports then all four ring phases are in use 1018 ABORT The test has been disabled by administrati...

Page 2228: ...k all of the wiring between the station equipment and the switch Then run the test again 4 If the test still fails the set may be defective Check the set and replace it if necessary 5 Some terminal eq...

Page 2229: ...a separate maintenance object RDIG STA of this type Fault conditions discovered on one maintenance object may or may not indicate faults on other maintenance objects of the same type Maintenance testi...

Page 2230: ...r terminals for telemarketing applications c 302B1 and 302C1 attendant console Table 10 547 Remote Digital Line Station Service States Out of Service The port and thus the station have been removed fr...

Page 2231: ...ere are several different scenarios which causes a terminal to be downloaded These can occur as part of background maintenance activity or on demand from the System Access Terminal SAT or from a stati...

Page 2232: ...A downloadable terminal is automatically downloaded when translation changes associated with downloadable parameters are made as part of system administration As shown in the previous table these cha...

Page 2233: ...on will cause the terminal to be downloaded regardless of its previous download status 2 Feature Access Code A Refresh Terminal Parameters Feature Access Code can be used to request a terminal downloa...

Page 2234: ...nal Download State Complete The terminal successfully downloaded sometime in the past Pending The system is waiting to download the terminal This may require the execution of a background periodic tes...

Page 2235: ...in terms of feet of wire from the jack to the switch If the problem persists replace the circuit pack Once the problem has been resolved the alarm disappears after a predetermined amount of time b Err...

Page 2236: ...the switch in terms of feet of wiring between the jack and the switch If the problem persists replace the circuit pack Once the problem has been resolved the alarm disappears after a predetermined am...

Page 2237: ...the order presented in the table below By clearing error codes associated with the Digital Line Electronic Power Feed Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the test...

Page 2238: ...inute intervals a maximum of 5 times FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times PASS Electronic Power Feed Test passed The message to turn on the power t...

Page 2239: ...elease the port using the release station extension command and run the test again 2 Make sure that the terminal is connected 3 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 3 ABORT Sta...

Page 2240: ...y a TTI port and the test will not execute on it 1 Verify that the port is a TTI port using either the display port command the display shows that the port is a TTI port or the list config command the...

Page 2241: ...BORT Switchhook audit timed out 1 Make sure voice terminal is connected and repeat test 2 If test fails replace voice terminal and repeat test 2 ABORT ID request fails health bit returned from voice t...

Page 2242: ...sing either the display port command the display shows that the port is a TTI port or the list config command the display shows a t for the port 2 If either list config or display port indicate that t...

Page 2243: ...gged as many as 26 endpoints associated with that Remote Office and several H 323 signaling groups could be out of service MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universa...

Page 2244: ...or because there is no way to determine which entity has failed However the aux data associated with this error indicates whether the endpoint that failed to respond was a DCP Analog or Signaling Grou...

Page 2245: ...ational applications 25 Hz for international applications Each carrier contains its own Analog Ring Generator A ringing voltage generator failure means that no ringing occurs on analog phones however...

Page 2246: ...ER A H 631 DA 631 DB 631 DB CARRIER B F L O W S4 FILTER AC AC AC A FANS 3 FRONT 3 BACK F1 D S4 1 S2 S3 S1 631 DA AC F3 CARRIER C 631 A I R DB AC F2 631 DA 631 DA 631 DB 631 DB F4 CARRIER D CARRIER E I...

Page 2247: ...20A AC 20A AC 20A AC 20A AC 20A DC FUSE TIP FUSE RETAINER FUSES F1 F7 ARE ILLUSTRATED AT THE LEFT FUSES F8 F9 ARE SYMMETRICAL AND CAN BE MUST BE TAKEN TO INSTALL THEM FUSE TIP FIRST INSERTED EITHER WA...

Page 2248: ...e Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test environment UU 1 Analog Ring Generator Query Test 118 MAJOR ON test environment...

Page 2249: ...EMG XFER Emergency Transfer Maintenance documentation for a description of this test c Refer to EXT DEV External Alarm Maintenance documentation for a description of this test Analog Ring Generator In...

Page 2250: ...it pack unable to allocated the resources necessary to run the test or unable to send a down link message 1 Wait for the green LED on the active tone clock to go out use the status port network comman...

Page 2251: ...IL Ringing voltage is below acceptable levels PROCEDURE FOR A MULTI CARRIER CABINET SYSTEM 1 If this is a High or Critical Reliability system determine the active Tone Clock circuit pack by issuing a...

Page 2252: ...different carriers in the affected port network d If called stations ring the fault is cleared Proceed to Step f If no stations ring replace the Analog Ring Generator To replace the Analog Ring Genera...

Page 2253: ...e Clock circuit pack and rerun the test 3 If the test passes then the Analog Ring Generator is healthy and one of the analog circuit packs is defective Replace the analog circuit packs one at a time a...

Page 2254: ...documentation for related port information MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 for EPN C is the carrier designation for examp...

Page 2255: ...ice time slot The station set may be connected to the Speech Synthesis Port through either a line or trunk circuit When there is an incoming call to a port the listen network time slot is connected to...

Page 2256: ...e 18 0 busyout port PCSSpp WARNING OFF release port PCsspp 130 b None WARNING ON test port PCSSpp sh 257 Speech Synthesis PSS Handshake Test 168 MAJOR ON test port PCSSpp sh r 2 513 17922 Speech Synth...

Page 2257: ...her tests in the testing sequence NPE Crosstalk Test 6 One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface The NPE controls port connectivity and gain and provides conferencing funct...

Page 2258: ...me slots out of service due to TDM BUS errors Refer to TDM BUS TDM Bus Maintenance documentation to diagnose any Active TDM BUS errors 1 If system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traff...

Page 2259: ...xisting error on the specific port or a more general circuit pack error 1 Examine Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error...

Page 2260: ...at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and the port is not in use escalate the problem 1020 ABORT The test did not run due to an already existing error on the sp...

Page 2261: ...available for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle yellow LED if off before retesting 1 If the port is idle retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2000 ABORT Resp...

Page 2262: ...Result Description Recommendation ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources...

Page 2263: ...etry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1001 1002 1003 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of...

Page 2264: ...test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5...

Page 2265: ...command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1019 ABORT Test is already running on a different port possibly due to background maintenance activity Only one of these tests may be active on a c...

Page 2266: ...ailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle yellow LED if off before retesting 1 If the port is idle retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2000 ABORT Respon...

Page 2267: ...is test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle yellow LED if off before retesting 1 If the port is id...

Page 2268: ...imes 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call and therefore unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle yel...

Page 2269: ...o the Common Shadow Circuit on the Standby Duplication Interface circuit pack via the ICC which then executes the write to memory In this way the Standby SPE is kept up to date with the Active SPE and...

Page 2270: ...By clearing error codes associated with the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence Table 10 565...

Page 2271: ...Test 277 X X X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE A Loop Back Test 275 X X X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test 276 X X X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Adm...

Page 2272: ...contents of the FIFO bank and compares them with the value written to the maintenance address space The test is repeated with another address in the maintenance address space This test does not disab...

Page 2273: ...cuit pack is defective and the Duplication Interface circuit pack must be replaced 1 Follow the Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability section in Chapter 6 Reliability Systems A Maintenan...

Page 2274: ...t pack must be replaced 1 Follow the Repair Procedures for High and Critical Reliability in Chapter 6 Reliability Systems A Maintenance Aid and replace the Duplication Interface circuit pack 2 Rerun t...

Page 2275: ...there were any M BUS time outs the test fails Table 10 569 TEST 285 Common Shadow Circuit M BUS Time Out Query Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1029 1030 2011 2012 2014 2015 2016...

Page 2276: ...by SPE with the DUPINT circuit pack that was removed in the previous step 4 Rerun the test 5 Test the Standby SPE with the test spe standby short command and address all Duplication Interface circuit...

Page 2277: ...ty Systems A Maintenance Aid and replace the Memory circuit pack 5 Rerun the test 6 Test the Standby SPE with the test spe standby short command and address all Duplication Interface circuit pack Comm...

Page 2278: ...on Shadow Circuit fiber cable is missing or connected improperly or the Active Standby DUPINT circuit pack is defective 1 Verify that the Common Shadow Circuit fiber cable on the Standby Active SPE DU...

Page 2279: ...on Interface circuit pack B 1 Refer to NO BOARD for a description of the Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Status Query Test 315 in DUPINT Maintenance documentation PASS Part of the Common Shadow Cir...

Page 2280: ...ack then writes the data to Standby SPE Memory This logical connection between Active SPE Memory and Standby SPE Memory is known as the SHDW LNK Memory Shadowing Link Although most of the components c...

Page 2281: ...ocessor Interface circuit pack ICC A ICC B ICC C SCC only MBUS MBUS Packet Bus Packet Bus TDM Bus A TDM Bus A Pkt ctrl Pkt ctrl B carrier A carrier DUP A to MTP B DUP A to MTP B SPE select lead SPE se...

Page 2282: ...tests the Memory Shadowing Link Table 10 571 Standby SPE Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If al...

Page 2283: ...d and an alarm is raised against the STBY SPE Standby SPE This is because the failure of the Shadow Link Test implies that Standby SPE Memory may not be an up to date reflection of Active SPE Memory a...

Page 2284: ...r PR MAINT to release the Standby SPE processor PROCR for the Standby SPE Processor to clear a magic area in Standby SPE Memory Requests the Standby SPE Maintenance Tape Processor to hold the Standby...

Page 2285: ...tivity on the Standby SPE other than system technician demanded maintenance Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode please try later This message line error is displayed when test...

Page 2286: ...r connected improperly or the Active Standby DUPINT circuit pack is defective 1 Verify that the Common Shadow Circuit fiber cable on the Standby Active SPE DUPINT circuit pack is present and connected...

Page 2287: ...to PROCR 80286 Processor Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures 2 Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms Refer to MEM BD Memory Maintenance documentation a...

Page 2288: ...y circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 5 6 and 7 If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack is on replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapte...

Page 2289: ...blem exists with one or more components that make up the Memory Shadowing Link such that Active SPE Memory was not accurately shadowed to Standby SPE Memory 1 Check for both Active SPE and Standby SPE...

Page 2290: ...uplication Interface circuit pack If the red LED on the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has not been replaced yet replace the Standby SPE Processor...

Page 2291: ...ur red LEDs are on AND if this is the third attempt to clear the problem that is the Standby SPE Processor and Standby SPE Memory circuit packs have already been replaced replace the Standby SPE Dupli...

Page 2292: ...to be issued multiple times If the refresh spe standby command successfully completes 5 times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled standby on the status system form wait 20 minutes This does not...

Page 2293: ...ng inspect the Inter Carrier Cable for cuts or broken leads If so follow the repair procedures for reconnecting the Inter Carrier Cable described in Chapter 6 4 If all problems found in Steps 1 2 or 3...

Page 2294: ...it pack is on and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack has been replaced replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 and proceed with Steps 9 10 and 11 If the red LED on th...

Page 2295: ...0 and 11 If none of the four red LEDs are lit AND if this is the third attempt to clear the problem that is the Standby SPE Processor and Standby SPE Memory circuit packs have already been replaced re...

Page 2296: ...Mode This command may have to be issued multiple times If the refresh spe standby command successfully completes 5 times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled standby on the status system form wait...

Page 2297: ...e to be issued multiple times If the refresh spe standby command successfully completes 5 times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled standby on the status system form wait 20 minutes This does not...

Page 2298: ...osition a Warning alarm is raised If both switches are out of the AUTO position for six hours a Major alarm is raised Duplication Interface circuit pack B reports the state of the SPE SELEC Switch B t...

Page 2299: ...iated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the rec...

Page 2300: ...terface Circuit Pack SPE B Loop Back Test 276 X X X X ND Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Administration Terminal Loop Back Test 274 a X X X X ND Inter Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Loop Back T...

Page 2301: ...he Duplication Interface circuit pack is not present or not functioning 1 Resolve all alarms logged against the Duplication Interface circuit pack DUPINT 2 Rerun the test PASS The Duplication Interfac...

Page 2302: ...hen all alarms associated with the SREPN are downgraded to WARNING alarms These include the EXP INTF in the SRP the EXP LINK between the SRP and the SREPN and all maintenance components in the SREPN 2...

Page 2303: ...standby mode Verify the results by using the status system 1 command The Standby SPE is always in one of three modes Standby Maintenance or Down Usually the Standby SPE is in Standby Mode In this mod...

Page 2304: ...is not as readily available to assume the role of the Active SPE but it may do so depending upon the severity of the Active SPE fault s Whenever the Standby SPE is returned to Standby Mode from Maint...

Page 2305: ...r circuit pack the Duplication Interface circuit pack in the A carrier and the Standby SPE Processor circuit pack Additionally the Inter Carrier Cable ICC and the backplane affect the ability of the A...

Page 2306: ...Bus TDM Bus A TDM Bus A Pkt ctrl Pkt ctrl B carrier A carrier DUP A to MTP B DUP A to MTP B SPE select lead SPE select lead Tone Clock select lead Tone Clock select lead 1 2 2 T O N E C L O C K TDM B...

Page 2307: ...Handshake Loss With Carrier A Dupint test duplication interface a sh test duplication interface b sh See note n 81 e Any Handshake Loss With Standby SPE Processor test duplication interface a sh test...

Page 2308: ...ommunication with Standby SPE during reboot following upgrade MAJOR ON upgrade software 805 s any No software mem card inserted in active SPE MAJOR OFF upgrade software 806 t any Checksum on new Stand...

Page 2309: ...communicate with the Standby SPE The ability to communicate with the Standby SPE should be checked by issuing the test processor a b short command where a b indicates the carrier that contains the St...

Page 2310: ...Active SPE and the Standby SPE may be functional However to restore the communication path look for the presence of Error Types 58 81 82 98 99 and 106 and use the recommended commands to clear these...

Page 2311: ...s that writes made to the Standby SPE Memory are not being acknowledged This implies that the shadowing mechanism is not functioning The presence of time outs when shadowing to the Standby SPE Memory...

Page 2312: ...types until it is resolved This error type indicates an incompatibility between the two Processor circuit packs in a High or Critical Reliability system For a High or Critical Reliability system to wo...

Page 2313: ...2014 2015 2017 2021 2024 and 2051 for Error Type 257 are described in the System Technician Demanded Tests Test Result Error Codes The Aux Data values 2048 2049 and 2050 for Error Type 257 are describ...

Page 2314: ...h to the Standby SPE and of Memory Shadowing To restore the function all error types that may affect the function must be investigated and resolved by following the recommended commands or procedures...

Page 2315: ...SPE in time The software card mem should be inserted into the Active SPE at the appropriate time so as to allow the upgrade software command to be re executed t Error Type 806 is logged when the upgr...

Page 2316: ...WARNING OFF circuit pack STBY SPE alarm is raised and the Fault Severity Level FSL of the new standby SPE is raised to its highest possible value to prevent an SPE interchange back to the original ac...

Page 2317: ...or whether it is in Maintenance Mode Whenever this command is issued any Standby SPE maintenance activity currently in progress except for entering maintenance mode is preempted the Standby SPE Proces...

Page 2318: ...e standby command was used within the time frame that scheduled maintenance with a translation save was to have been conducted the save translation command should be issued to ensure that the current...

Page 2319: ...ing held on the active SPE artificially This prevents a SPE interchange back to the original active SPE This STBY SPE warning alarm lasts for one hour After this time passes system switches to the SPE...

Page 2320: ...t long For this command there is a single test for the Standby SPE Processor Interface circuit pack s and a single test for each Processor Interface Port on a Processor Interface circuit pack These te...

Page 2321: ...Duplication Interface SPE B Loop Back Test DUPINT X X 280 Inter Duplication Interface Loop Back Test DUPINT X X 271 Duplication Interface Background Test Query DUPINT X X 277 Duplication Interface Sa...

Page 2322: ...MAINT X X 229 MTP Auxiliary Channel Loop Around Test PR MAINT X X 101 MTP Reset Test PR MAINT X 104 MTP Dual Port RAM Test PR MAINT X The following Memory Card tests are executed 695 Cartridge Insert...

Page 2323: ...he first test in the sequence is the Memory Functional Test 332 which takes from 30 seconds to two minutes After the Memory Functional Test 332 is run the same delays described in Item 1 of this list...

Page 2324: ...each additional test command issued on a Standby SPE component 6 The test memory 0 1 a b long command is an exception to Item 5 Because of the nature of the Memory Functional Test 332 the same delays...

Page 2325: ...e tests in the sequence for the component will be attempted and a message will appear on the terminal message line describing why the command was rejected The following is a list of these text strings...

Page 2326: ...use status system This message line error which corresponds to Error Code 2018 is displayed if a test command on a Standby SPE component is attempted while the Active SPE is performing some Maintenan...

Page 2327: ...to check for STBY SPE errors or Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode please try later Issue the refresh spe standby command once more If the Standby SPE is not labeled standby...

Page 2328: ...tion Interface circuit pack errors and alarms Refer to DUPINT Duplication Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation and follow the prescribed procedures 3 If the B carrier contains the Active S...

Page 2329: ...the problem 7 Issue refresh spe standby to put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode This command may have to be issued multiple times If refresh spe standby successfully completes 5 times without the St...

Page 2330: ...mponent resides on the Active SPE 1030 cont d ABORT 3 Move the SPE Select switches to make the SPE with the problem the current Active SPE This action prevents software from switching to the other SPE...

Page 2331: ...est be made to the Standby SPE however the request cannot be made because the Standby SPE is busy processing a previous maintenance activity request 1 Issue refresh spe standby to force the Standby SP...

Page 2332: ...started with a Cold 1 or a reboot issue test spe standby long to thoroughly test all Standby SPE components 2021 ABORT An attempt to refresh Standby SPE memory from Active SPE memory encountered a pro...

Page 2333: ...ective The communication path between the Active SPE and the Standby SPE Maintenance Tape Processor may have failed or the Standby SPE Maintenance Tape Processor may have failed or the Standby SPE Pro...

Page 2334: ...r Type 80 is logged against STBY SPE If so the problem is the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack Replace the carrier A Duplication Interface circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 Reliabilit...

Page 2335: ...been replaced replace the Standby SPE Memory circuit pack as described in Chapter 6 Reliability Systems A Maintenance Aid and proceed with Steps 11 12 and 13 If the red LED on the Standby SPE Memory...

Page 2336: ...e LEDs is on AND if this is the fifth attempt to clear the problem escalate the problem 2024 cont d ABORT 11 Issue refresh spe standby to put the Standby SPE into Standby Mode This command may have to...

Page 2337: ...larms Refer to SHDW CIR Common Shadow Circuit and follow the procedures 2 Check for Standby SPE Memory errors and alarms Refer to MEM BD Memory circuit pack and follow the procedures 3 Check for Stand...

Page 2338: ...ck as described in Chapter 6 Reliability Systems A Maintenance Aid and proceed with Steps 10 11 and 12 9 Issue display errors and check to see if Error Type 58 is logged against STBY SPE If Error Type...

Page 2339: ...iability Systems A Maintenance Aid and proceed with Steps 10 11 and 12 If none of the three red LEDs is on AND if this is the second attempt to clear the problem that is the Standby SPE Processor circ...

Page 2340: ...ommand may have to be issued multiple times If refresh spe standby successfully completes 5 times without the Standby SPE becoming labeled standby on the status system form wait 20 minutes This does n...

Page 2341: ...ribed in Chapter 6 Reliability Systems A Maintenance Aid 4 If all problems found in Steps 1 2 and 3 have now been repaired proceed with Step 8 If no problems were found in Steps 1 2 and 3 proceed with...

Page 2342: ...the repair steps for STBY SPE error 139 note k 2068 ABORT When attempting to refresh Standby SPE memory from Active SPE memory a problem was encountered when refreshing Packet Control circuit pack mem...

Page 2343: ...t in that port network However for reliability it is recommended that the clock be connected to the PPN The only operation that software can perform is a query of the alarm leads The only recovery act...

Page 2344: ...m 3 Clock Hardware Configuration NOTE When looking in the Stratum 3 cabinet A card is on the left and B card is on the right TN767 or TN722 TN767 or TN722 TN780 TN780 Timing output Timing output Alarm...

Page 2345: ...the card Replace the card 2 Timing Output Cards TOC Provides cable length compensation multiple output ports selection of the ST3 and CI outputs This type of card has two red failure LEDs one indicate...

Page 2346: ...s of input reference A or CI A failed REF B Red Loss of input reference B or CI A failed ST A Red Failed Stratum 3 clock A ST B Red Failed Stratum 3 clock B PWR A Green 48VDC A present PWR B Green 48V...

Page 2347: ...nnection between the Stratum 3 clock and the TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack may be faulty or 3 the TN780 Tone Clock circuit pack may be defective Stratum 3 Clock Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data A...

Page 2348: ...is major Check connections between the Stratum 3 clock and the PBX If there are no loose connections using the Stratum 3 Wiring Guide check that the wiring installation is correct After reconnecting...

Page 2349: ...e g This error indicates that the Stratum 3 clock has either reference B or CI card B failed Please refer to the error code 8 in the test description of the Test 649 for the repair procedure h This er...

Page 2350: ...failed or CI card B failed 3 One power supply failed 4 All power supplies failed 5 One clock unit failed 6 All clock unit s failed This test queries the Stratum 3 clock for its alarm status through th...

Page 2351: ...for DS1 BD DS1 Interface Circuit Pack errors using the display error command Refer to the DS1 BD Maintenance documentation for recommended strategy to resolve any DS1 BD errors found 2 If there are n...

Page 2352: ...e power supply failed This error only occurs when the Stratum 3 clock has two power supplies and one of them has failed However the clock can function with one power supply 1 Locate the failed power s...

Page 2353: ...If after replacing the CI card the red LED on the new CI card lights also proceed to Step 3 2 Otherwise issue the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm If any test repetitions fail follo...

Page 2354: ...k at the Stratum 3 cabinet for red LEDs on circuit cards marked ST3 Replace the card s 2 Determine if the alarm still exists by issuing the test synchronization r 4 command to clear the alarm If any t...

Page 2355: ...y the following circuit pack types are allowed in the slot Call Classifier TN744 Integrated Announcement TN750 Maintenance Test TN771C Speech Synthesizer TN725B Tone Detector TN748C A MINOR alarm is g...

Page 2356: ...egrated Announcement TN750 Maintenance Test TN771C Speech Synthesizer TN725B Tone Detector TN748C The code of the invalid circuit pack can be displayed by using the list configuration board UUCSS comm...

Page 2357: ...N2401 TN794 inserted into the NETCON slot and the Net Pak Backplane Connection TN4200 inserted into the PACCON slot Upgrades involving new control carriers use the TN2401 TN794 only Duplicated R8si sy...

Page 2358: ...er to the appropriate test description and follow the recommended procedures 0 Any Any Any test network control a b sh r 1 1 Any Control Channel Test 94 MAJOR ON test network control a b r 3 2 a Contr...

Page 2359: ...the procedures needed to diagnose Tone Clock circuit pack troubles e This error indicates a loss of handshake between SW CTL and the system software Look for and resolve all other SW CTL errors In the...

Page 2360: ...The 1793 errors are in line errors that indicate a possible problem with the interface between the Switch Control and the processor The receipt of these errors causes Switch Control maintenance to run...

Page 2361: ...it Pack Maintenance documentation for a description of these tests Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Switch Control Reset Test 93 X...

Page 2362: ...cation through the same interface Table 10 582 TEST 92 Control Channel Interface Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2013 2100 none ABORT Could not...

Page 2363: ...Test 94 also fails if the system timing signals are lost If Test 94 passes do not suspect the loss of timing signals 2 Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure that this failure is occur...

Page 2364: ...of these error codes 2000 or None FAIL The Switch Control could not be successfully reset If this is a standard system the customer probably cannot make or receive calls 1 This failure could be due to...

Page 2365: ...ectable Table 10 584 TEST 94 Control Channel Transmission Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 0 ABORT The port circuit packs necessary for this test are not available 1 Retry the co...

Page 2366: ...or several seconds 2 If there are no TDM Bus alarms against the Standby TDM Bus switch the control channel from its current bus to the Standby bus If this test passes on the new bus investigate the po...

Page 2367: ...um of 5 times 2 If the test aborts 5 times wait until the system is less heavily used and rerun the test at that time 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE for...

Page 2368: ...way High or Critical Reliability system PASS The Time of Day clock on the Switch Control circuit pack is operating correctly Table 10 586 TEST 324 Switch Control EPN Maintenance Board Interface Test E...

Page 2369: ...out and were not verified 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of five retries 2 If the test continues to abort and SW CTL Test 325 passes there is not a problem but if SW CTL Test 325...

Page 2370: ...e 1 Run the Short Test Sequence several times to make sure the error is occurring consistently run the Long Test Sequence to reset the Switch Control Sometimes running the Long Test Sequence may clear...

Page 2371: ...maximum of 5 times 1029 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2020 2022 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to STBY SPE for a description of these error codes 32515 FAIL This failure indicates that communications with the...

Page 2372: ...igured with primary and secondary synchronization references DS1 interface circuit packs when using Stratum 4 synchronization Both references are optional since the local oscillator can be used and th...

Page 2373: ...Interface link to the Expansion Interface circuit packs in the two EPNs The EPN Expansion Interface circuit pack uses the received data stream to generate a timing signal The Tone Clock circuit pack i...

Page 2374: ...e stable than Type II and provides some switching capability at the hardware level Stratum 4 Type II operation is the only synchronization strata provided by Generic 1 It is important to note that Str...

Page 2375: ...it packs The EPN Expansion Interface circuit packs use the received data stream to generate a timing signal which is used by the Tone Clock circuit packs in the EPNs to provide timing for all circuit...

Page 2376: ...is executed only after synchronization has been disabled and is used to manually switch to a specific synchronization reference This command is useful to diagnose synchronization problems by forcing...

Page 2377: ...lows 1 Yellow LED is on 2 7 seconds and off 0 3 seconds This light pattern indicates that an external timing source is being used as a synchronization reference and the circuit pack is in Active mode...

Page 2378: ...ated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 01 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If all tests pass run the Long Test Sequence Refer to the appropriate test description and follow the reco...

Page 2379: ...hrough 32 refer to TDM CLK to resolve the problem If not continue with the following steps 5 Execute the disable synchronization switch and the enable synchronization switch commands These two command...

Page 2380: ...th the following steps 3 High or Critical Reliability system Switch Tone Clock circuit packs on the master port network via the set tone clock PC command Standard system Replace the primary and second...

Page 2381: ...terface Links back to the previous configuration via the set expansion link PCSS Then switch the Tone Clock circuit packs in the master port network If the problem still persists switch the Tone Clock...

Page 2382: ...follow SLIP ANALYSIS 5 Standard system Error 2305 Replace the Expansion Interface circuit pack in this port network and the Expansion Interface circuit pack in the PPN that is connected to this port n...

Page 2383: ...ia this test This test will either pass or abort Table 10 589 TEST 417 Test Synchronization Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1...

Page 2384: ...ised immediately Other alarming conditions which do not cause the link to go down also get a WARNING alarm Identifying a System Link In order to trace problems associated with a system link it is nece...

Page 2385: ...h do not involve a link that is down is the current hardware path If the link is down faulted hardware path is the focus of attention The command status sys link location will present the state of bot...

Page 2386: ...e board have been lost The link is reset on first occurrence hence Error 1025 will also be logged The system link is alarmed if 2 or more errors of this type are detected within 10 minutes To correct...

Page 2387: ...Manifest effect of this error is that the end point location may experience slower throughput rate and the Packet Interface may experience backup or congestion The system link is alarmed if 4 or more...

Page 2388: ...tive test queries the switch for the status of the system link and verifies that all switch components have the same view of the link state Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequenc...

Page 2389: ...second attempt set up attempts are only made by the application software that is the 15 minute timer fires and jobs are printed unless an immediate job was entered After two unsuccessful attempts to e...

Page 2390: ...er Link has been busied out issue the release sp link command If the link is down proceed to Step 2 2 Issue the display system feature command to determine the destination of the System Printer Link I...

Page 2391: ...y that there are less than three active logins to the system If this condition exists a login session must be terminated before the System Printer Link can be established NOTE It is recommended that t...

Page 2392: ...t Most likely due to problem with physical link or printer status 4 internal system error Most likely temporary sporadic failure 5 the data module the printer is trying to use is busy with another cal...

Page 2393: ...l resources allocated for a System Printer Link are released after this test Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive Link Tear Down Test 2...

Page 2394: ...Description Recommendation 10 20 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 2 times 30 ABORT Internal system error 1 Refer to the Procedures for Restoring the...

Page 2395: ...ftware call and the following examples in no way exhaust the possibilities Often two errors are logged at the same time for each problem MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 SYST...

Page 2396: ...error appears when patching and subsequently applying the patch by a craft requested reset system 1 f A Restart Level 2 occurred due to a power loss g A Restart Level 2 occurred due to a tone clock l...

Page 2397: ...n command that can be used to initiate maintenance tests on the Tape Unit one for Standard systems and one for High and Critical Reliability systems In a Standard system the command line entry to test...

Page 2398: ...g Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board Test to Clear Value 0 a 0 Any Any Any test tape 1 b Any Tape Status Test 69 MINOR OFF test tape r 2 257 c Any Tape Status Test 69...

Page 2399: ...artridge should be replaced first If the problem persists the tape unit should be replaced When this error is first detected follow Error Type 1 Repair Procedure Error Type 1 Repair Procedure 1 Replac...

Page 2400: ...y several attempts at rereading or rewriting the block on the tape This type of error is most likely the result of one or more hard errors on the tape for example a scratch or a hole in the tape that...

Page 2401: ...lock error during a read or write operation on the tape A correctable tape error is one in which a block error is detected but corrected during a read or write to the tape This type of error may be ca...

Page 2402: ...his alarm Error Type 3329 Repair Procedure Standard System 1 Look in the Hardware Error Log for Error Type 1793 If this error exists replace the tape cartridge with a backup cartridge that has valid s...

Page 2403: ...ranslations its tape was alarmed as well Error Type 3329 Repair Procedure 1 High or Critical Reliability System 1 Issue the status system command to determine which SPE A or B is the Active SPE It is...

Page 2404: ...t the major TAPE alarm is downgraded to a minor TAPE alarm Error Type 3329 Repair Procedure 2 High or Critical Reliability System 1 The tape against which Error Type 3329 has been logged should reside...

Page 2405: ...a result of a hardware problem rather than a tape problem To clear Error Type 3843 follow the procedures given in the footnotes for Error Type 3842 m G1 1 and earlier Translations were not saved on th...

Page 2406: ...sistency Maintenance documentation for the description of this test Tape Read Write Test 65 The purpose of this test is to exercise the hardware read write circuitry and the basic functionality of the...

Page 2407: ...cription Recommendation 1029 to 1030 and 2011 to 2051 ABORT Refer to the STBY SPE Standby SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes 9000 s ABORT or FAIL Refer to Table A in...

Page 2408: ...s that the tape drive is in good working order Table 10 598 TEST 67 Tape Reset Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1029 to 2051 ABORT Refer to the STBY SPE Standby SPE Maintenance d...

Page 2409: ...Table A in Tape Unit Aux Data Error Codes Tables and follow the recommended repair strategy for specific Aux Data Any Others FAIL Refer to Table B in Tape Unit Aux Data Error Codes Tables and follow...

Page 2410: ...fails swap tape unit use original tape and retest 23008 FAIL MTP indicates a test failure 1 Follow the instructions provided in the Tape Maintenance and Repair Procedures section 23009 to 23017 FAIL...

Page 2411: ...es section 2 Issue the test tape long command If the test passes issue the save translations command to verify condition is clear 3 If the test fails make sure tape is fully inserted 4 If the test con...

Page 2412: ...only a single sector of the tape An uncorrectable tape error is one in which a block error persists during a read or write operation to the tape Errors of this type are unable to be corrected by sever...

Page 2413: ...rrectable block errors detected by the test 0 5 Look for Error Types 1793 1828 2049 and 2084 in the Hardware Error Log and resolve these errors by following the procedures provided in the Hardware Err...

Page 2414: ...already in use 1 If the Tape Unit is in use that is the yellow LED on the tape drive is on and there is tape cartridge motion wait until the first request is complete If there does not appear to be ta...

Page 2415: ...ape head 3 If still fail check tape insertion swap tape if necessary and retest 4 Replace tape unit as a last resort 9026 Hardware error detected 1 Do the steps below following the directions in the T...

Page 2416: ...ld not read or write at least one block of data from the tape 9030 Internal system error 1 Follow the steps provided in the Tape Maintenance and Repair Procedures section 9032 Inability to read a sign...

Page 2417: ...ere is no alarm ignore this error 1 1xxxx If the aux data is 10000 the error is non fatal Ignore the 10000 case Each of the last four digits of the Aux Data 1xxxx is a non zero value Follow the steps...

Page 2418: ...AT T Preventive Maintenance Log sheet Refer to Chapter 5 Routine Maintenance Procedures New tapes leave more abrasive particles on the tape head Therefore if a new tape is used issue the test tape lon...

Page 2419: ...the tape cartridge CAUTION The tape drive head should be cleaned by using only Freon TF and polyurethane swabs These products are usually available in VCR head cleaning kits sold in video stores 4 Wet...

Page 2420: ...and CARR POW Maintenance documentation sections If no power errors exist check the tape drive for power as follows If there is a problem with the 12V supplied to the tape drive its yellow LED will be...

Page 2421: ...r 2084 is present in which case 48 hours must elapse The problem was a defective main tape Mark the defective tape and follow the standard disposal procedures If any of the tests failed proceed to Ste...

Page 2422: ...the tape drive WARNING Vintage 6 and Vintage 8 of the TN773 Processor circuit pack in a Medium Cabinet use 12V DC power supplied from the Tape Drive circuit pack and thus may cause severe service disr...

Page 2423: ...hardware errors against the TAPE MO issue the display errors command Enter a in the Interval field and tape in the Category field If the alarm persists the cause of the problem is either the Maintena...

Page 2424: ...Step 8 8 With the tape that has the customer s translations set aside replace the TN770 Memory circuit pack CAUTION Make sure that you are using the customer s existing tape drive and tape and not th...

Page 2425: ...a defective Memory circuit pack and a defective Processor circuit pack If any test still fails escalate the problem For High or Critical Reliability Systems NOTE Before performing the following repair...

Page 2426: ...y test failed proceed to Step 13 13 Replace the TN770 Memory circuit pack on the STANDBY control carrier Use both the new Memory circuit pack and the new Processor circuit pack Replace the Memory circ...

Page 2427: ...Tape Consistency Test is run on system technician command and once a week as part of daily Standby SPE maintenance Tape Consistency does not apply and does not exist in Standard systems Error Log Entr...

Page 2428: ...system Tape Data Consistency Check Test 421 The software vintage number translation time stamps announcement time stamps and update file time stamps and identifiers are read off both tapes and compar...

Page 2429: ...2021 2022 2023 2024 2025 2051 ABORT Refer to the STBY SPE Standby SPE Maintenance documentation for a description of these error codes 9005 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute...

Page 2430: ...AIL The load vintages and translations are different in both SPEs The Active SPE has the most current translations 6 FAIL The load vintages and translations are different in both SPEs The Standby SPE...

Page 2431: ...intages and announcements are different in both SPEs The Active SPE has the most current announcements 13 FAIL The translations announcements and load vintages are different in both SPEs The Active SP...

Page 2432: ...translations and announcements 1 Follow the procedures for Error Code 4 Be sure to issue the save announcements command 32 FAIL The update files are different in both SPEs The update file on the Activ...

Page 2433: ...has the most current update file and announcements 1 Issue the save announcements command to save announcements on both SPEs 2 Have INADS issue the copy update file command to copy the update file fro...

Page 2434: ...fter running test tape long check for Error Code 32 or 64 Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code 48 FAIL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs The Active...

Page 2435: ...iles are different in both SPEs The update file on the standby SPE is most current 1 If you are on site with the switch interchange the Active SPE tape with the Standby SPE tape If you are not on site...

Page 2436: ...he update files and announcements are different in both SPEs The Standby SPE has the most current update file and the Active SPE has the most current announcements 1 Issue the save announcements comma...

Page 2437: ...e long command check for Error Code 32 or 64 Follow the recovery procedure under the applicable error code 80 FAIL The update files and announcements are different in both SPEs The Standby SPE has the...

Page 2438: ...le and announcements 86 FAIL The update files load vintages translations and announcements are different in both SPEs The Standby SPE has the most current update file translations and announcements 1...

Page 2439: ...hway to the Network Control Element NCE and then to the TDM bus The circuit switched connections have a Mu law or A law option for voice and operate as 64Kb s clear data channels The packet switched c...

Page 2440: ...d Trunk Side BRI ISDN Interface Reference Points CO NT 2 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 4 Wire 4 Wire 4 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 4 Wire PBX PBX LT TE TE TE cydfisdn RPY 072397 NT2 LT LT NT2 NT2 Terminal Adapter...

Page 2441: ...rotocol handling and multiplexing for Layers 2 and 3 T 4 wire Basic Rate interface to a Network Termination 2 2 Network Termination 1 NT1 that terminates Layer 1 and monitors maintenance performance t...

Page 2442: ...ocedures for the Control Channel Loop Around Test 52 1025 e 4363 NPE NCE Audit Test 50 None ON 1291 f 4359 Clear Error Counters 270 MINOR ON 1294 g 46088 to 46096 SAKI Sanity Test 53 MINOR ON See h 15...

Page 2443: ...AM that stores the board s translation information and downloadable application firmware Maintenance software resets the circuit pack g Unable to write LAN Translation RAM Error internal memory access...

Page 2444: ...ink messages from the board When the board is alarmed due to this error the switch software periodically puts the board back in service and tells the Archangel to process up link messages from the boa...

Page 2445: ...lead to other types of errors against this circuit pack System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes When inspecting errors in the system always investigate tests in the order listed...

Page 2446: ...h another circuit pack on the bus Use this test to verify the repair Table 10 609 TEST 595 LAN Receive Parity Error Counter Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response t...

Page 2447: ...ded repair procedures 3 If the Packet Bus test passes check the validity of the circuit pack Execute a test that involves data transmission onto the Packet Bus For example the test port PCSSpp command...

Page 2448: ...gle physical channel which is then routed via the concentration highway to the Network Control Element NCE and then to the TDM bus The circuit switched connections have a Mu law or A law option for vo...

Page 2449: ...ed Trunk Side BRI ISDN Interface Reference points CO NT 2 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 4 Wire 4 Wire 4 Wire NT 2 Wire NT 4 Wire PBX PBX LT TE TE TE cydfisdn RPY 072397 NT2 LT LT NT2 NT2 Terminal Adapte...

Page 2450: ...tionality including protocol handling and multiplexing for Layers 2 and 3 T 4 wire Basic Rate interface to a Network Termination 2 2 Network Termination 1 NT1 that terminates Layer 1 and monitors main...

Page 2451: ...MINOR OFF 3073 m Slip Query Test 1244 MINOR OFF 3585 n Receive FIFO Overflow TDM D Channel Log Only ON 3586 o 3587 p 3588 q 46223 3589 r 3590 s 46211 3591 t 3592 u 3841 to 3942 v 1 Run the Short Test...

Page 2452: ...14 Transmit FIFO Overflow This error indicates that the circuit pack is having problems transmitting data to the TDM D Channel This error only occurs only a system that switches the packet implementat...

Page 2453: ...Around Test 619 failed Run the Long Test Sequence paying particular attention to the results of the BRI TDM Port Loop Test 619 k Error Type 2049 The Layer 2 Link Query failed The test is repeated eve...

Page 2454: ...ce paying particular attention to the results of the Receive FIFO Overflow Test 625 r Error Type 3589 The BRI Port Local LAN Loop Around Test 618 failed Run the Long Test Sequence and pay particular a...

Page 2455: ...ch problems Network failure 50 subscription Requested facility not subscribed 52 admin Outgoing calls barred 54 admin Incoming calls barred 62 subscription Service not authorized 63 admin sub Service...

Page 2456: ...ftware is able to successfully send the downlink messages the test aborts otherwise Order of Investigation Short Test Sequence Long Test Sequence D ND1 1 D Destructive ND Nondestructive BRI Local LAN...

Page 2457: ...required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call Use the display port PCSSpp command to determine the station extension or trunk group member number of the port Use t...

Page 2458: ...d back by the switch The test passes if the packet connection can be established and the transmitted data is received unaltered The test aborts if the Packet Bus is alarmed in the Processor Port Netwo...

Page 2459: ...l calls associated with the BRI port to be torn down 1139 ABORT The Packet Bus in the port network is out of service 1 Follow the repair procedures for the Packet Bus 2 Run test port long PCSSpp and v...

Page 2460: ...bove order If one fails the remaining tests in the sequence are not executed and maintenance software returns an error code 2012 2100 ABORT Internal system error Could not allocate the necessary syste...

Page 2461: ...system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system...

Page 2462: ...em could not make the conference connection for the test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1 2 FAIL The TDM Looparound failed on one of the channels Error Code 1 TDM Loop...

Page 2463: ...error is cleared If the counter is non zero the test fails and the value of the counter is displayed in the Error Code field Table 10 616 TEST 623 CRC Error Counter Test Error Code Test Result Descrip...

Page 2464: ...Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Response to the test was not received from the circuit pack within the allowable time period 1 If...

Page 2465: ...L1 Deactivated State below for more details The Pending Activation state indicates a problem with the channels the wiring or the TBRI BD circuit pack When in this state the Level 1 interface is eithe...

Page 2466: ...e test again NOTE When you release a port you release all ports associated with it If certain ports still need to be busied out use the release port PCSSpp command to busy them out 2 Make sure the ter...

Page 2467: ...repair procedures for the NT1 Then execute the test port PCSSpp command and review the results of the Level 1 Status Inquiry Test to verify repair 2 FAIL Received a status of Level 1 Pending Activatio...

Page 2468: ...executing the test port long PCSSpp command review the results of all the tests Follow the repair procedures for any tests that fail Verify repair of the problem by executing the test port PCSSpp comm...

Page 2469: ...626 which is executed with the command If this test aborts or fails follow the repair procedure for the Signaling Link Status Test 3 Escalate problem if BRI Layer 3 Query Test continues to abort 1139...

Page 2470: ...or type is present for TBRI PT then release the port with the release port PCSSpp command and run the test again b If the error is present for both TBRI BD and TBRI PT then release the circuit pack wi...

Page 2471: ...t 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times 1 to 88 FAIL The circuit pack and the remote endpoint are not synchronized to the same clock rate which has generated the Slip alarm The error code equals...

Page 2472: ...itched channels support the LAPD protocol and conform with the CCITT Q 920 Recommendations for D channel signaling LEDs The three LEDs on the circuit pack s faceplate indicate board status When illumi...

Page 2473: ...ice state of the port The test passes if the signaling link D Channel is connected and operating normally The test fails if the board is not installed the signaling link is disconnected or if the port...

Page 2474: ...a certain amount of time The test aborts if the signaling link is disconnected if a message is already outstanding or if the necessary resources could not be allocated To investigate the service stat...

Page 2475: ...le maintenance by entering y in the Maintenance Tests field on page 2 of the change trunk group form 1113 ABORT The signaling link has failed so the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this t...

Page 2476: ...st is already active or if the B Channel is in an Out Of Service state 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum...

Page 2477: ...ABORT The signaling link has failed so the system cannot send any messages on behalf of this trunk 1 Check the results of Test 1251 Signaling Link State Check 1114 ABORT The signaling link is in a tr...

Page 2478: ...n the system 2 The test call connection is established over the TDM Bus of the transmit and receive sides of the ISDN Trunk side BRI trunk to a digital trunk testing port on the Maintenance Test circu...

Page 2479: ...BORT Bad Configuration that is no Maintenance Test circuit pack Issue the test trunk trunk Group trunk member command and make sure there is a DATA CHL NETCON channel administered 1018 ABORT Test call...

Page 2480: ...force it to be dropped by using the busyout trunk command 1120 ABORT The ISDN Trunk side BRI trunk is in the ISDN out of service far end state 1 Try to change the service state via Test 256 Service St...

Page 2481: ...mmand at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2067 ABORT The call has timed out perhaps because of a lack of system resources 1 Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2035 2074 ABORT Bit and Blo...

Page 2482: ...de 2100 2208 ABORT Internal system error 1 Follow the recommendations for ABORT code 2012 2209 2210 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Follow the recommendation...

Page 2483: ...hould be taken out of service and the quality of the ISDN Trunk side BRI line should be investigated The investigation should include an in depth analysis of the facility including the transmission fa...

Page 2484: ...n Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run Full Name of MO TDMODULE1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for example A B C D or E SS is t...

Page 2485: ...er to a TDM Bus Terminology Control Channel Bus The TDM Bus control channel is on Non Control Channel Bus The TDM Bus control channel is NOT on Tone Bus The TDM Bus dedicated tone time slots are on No...

Page 2486: ...s problem appeared then those hints should be investigated before performing this procedure For this procedure make sure at least one Tone Detector circuit pack is in the same Port Network in which th...

Page 2487: ...failures that are causing TDM Bus faults Also the circuit pack itself may not be the cause of the problem but the backplane pins may have been bent when the circuit pack was inserted 1 Remove port cir...

Page 2488: ...r any other processor complex circuit packs In a System Without High or Critical Reliability To perform this procedure for the Network Control circuit pack this circuit pack must be replaced The syste...

Page 2489: ...is the Tone Clock circuit pack make sure it is in standby mode via the status system command or its LED state The SYSTEM CLOCKS and SYSTEM TONES fields of the status system form should read standby or...

Page 2490: ...system technician command If any of the TDM Bus tests fail perform Procedure 2 and or Procedure 3 for only the circuit packs in those carriers connected to the shortened TDM Bus Procedure 2 is perform...

Page 2491: ...or when this circuit pack is powered up again To force the system to send a restart message to all circuit packs on a network try one of the following methods depending on the circumstances NOTE A ci...

Page 2492: ...o the EPN via the busyout board PCSS command and then release them via the release board PCSS command WARNING The reset system command disrupts all calls in the system Resetting the EPN only disrupts...

Page 2493: ...aux data value of 0 indicates the last reported TDM Bus corruption was on the Control channel bus Table 10 625 TDM Bus Error Log Entries Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On Off Board T...

Page 2494: ...as been fixed c This error indicates the TDM Bus was switched to the other bus due to TDM Bus corruption The aux data value is not meaningful and no action is required d This error indicates that some...

Page 2495: ...slots and if it detects any noise on a time slot it returns a failure At the end of the test any out of service time slots are retested to see if they are still noisy and restored to service if they a...

Page 2496: ...er FAIL The error code indicates the number of bad time slots that were detected The cause of this failure is most likely due to a bad port circuit pack and not the TDM Bus itself 1 Execute the comman...

Page 2497: ...n through the Control Channel is not working The problem is not necessarily the TDM Bus itself 1 Display the hardware error and alarm log for the Tone Clock circuit pack Refer to TONE BD Tone Clock Ci...

Page 2498: ...ntrol channel bus This is a valid response Use the status system command to verify which bus is the control channel bus 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable ti...

Page 2499: ...XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation for descriptions of these tests b Refer to TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit Pack documentation for a description of this test c Refer to Dual Tone M...

Page 2500: ...t pack must be a TN780 code with firmware revision 2 or above or be a TN2182 e Test 149 is not run on a TN2182 Table 10 629 System Technician Demanded Tests TDM BUS Order of Investigation ShortTest Se...

Page 2501: ...1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times ANY FAIL This error represents the number of timing slips detected on the incoming synchronization source since the last slip inquiry was sent to the Tone Clock...

Page 2502: ...t synchronization PC Retry the command If the error is still present replace this Tone Clock circuit pack c the Tone Clock circuit pack under test is in Standby mode make it active via set tone clock...

Page 2503: ...it pack is expected to be the synchronization source If not correct the synchronization information and re execute the test ANY FAIL This error represents the number of PPM errors detected on the exte...

Page 2504: ...under test is in the Active mode but is not providing the current system synchronization reference switch the synchronization reference to the Tone Clock circuit pack under test using the set synchro...

Page 2505: ...eter Update Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error FAIL Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times PASS The Tone C...

Page 2506: ...ization source and retry the test 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Try the command again at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times 0 FAIL If the Tone Clock circuit pack is in the PPN the external synchron...

Page 2507: ...secondary references and from Stratum 3 Clock STRAT 3 facilities Only the TN780 tone clock supports a Stratum 3 clock Moreover the Tone Clock circuit pack aids in monitoring and selecting synchroniza...

Page 2508: ...R Stratum 3 Clock Source A Source B Local oscillator DS1 Primary and Secondary DS1 Primary DS1 Secondary DS1 Primary Only DS1 Primary None No External Source None None SLAVE PNC Duplication Active EI...

Page 2509: ...been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack d The Tone Clock circuit pack in the PPN is not a TN780 while a Stratum 3 synchronizati...

Page 2510: ...a call origination to abort or a user not to get dial tone when going off hook 3 If all tests pass and the alarm does not resolve retest with test tone UUCSS long clear 4 If the test passes terminate...

Page 2511: ...ss of timing signal from the system synchronization reference The Tone Clock circuit pack has switched synchronization references 1 Resolve any errors logged against the SYNC or STRAT 13 maintenance o...

Page 2512: ...repair procedures for EXP INTF error log entries 257 769 or 770 or any errors logged against SNI BD SNC BD or FIBER LK 3 If the 2305 errors persist a For Port Networks with more than one Tone Clock c...

Page 2513: ...to XXX BD for descriptions of these tests b Refer to TONE BD for a description of this test c Refer to TONE PT for descriptions of these tests Order of Investigation ShortTest Sequence Long Test Seque...

Page 2514: ...un this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1 FAIL This error means the Tone Clock circuit pack framing verification firmware reports an error in the...

Page 2515: ...M CLK Error Log entries one or more of 1025 1281 1537 2049 and 2305 1 Resolve the errors indicated No separate corrective action is required 65 FAIL The tone clock is currently not able to lock on to...

Page 2516: ...calls in progress but could cause a call origination to abort or a user will not get dial tone when going off hook 2 If the test passes and the alarm does not resolve retest test tone UUCSS long clea...

Page 2517: ...it is providing the system clocking signals 4 An EXP INTF circuit pack if the port network on which the test was executed does not contain the current system synchronization reference The error code i...

Page 2518: ...the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times Any FAIL The error code represents the rate in Parts Per Million or PPM at which clock slip errors have been detected on the incoming synchroniz...

Page 2519: ...t the number of slips to trigger loss of signal currently 30 per 5 millisecond period Enable the on board synchronization switching algorithm see above Enable holdover operation TN2182 only This is no...

Page 2520: ...Error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times ANY FAIL Stratum 3 Clock Synchronization is administered for the carrier in which this Tone Clock circuit pack resides but the Tone...

Page 2521: ...his test requires an external synchronization source to be administered DS1 primary DS1 primary and secondary or Stratum 3 Clock 1 Administer the external synchronization source and retry the test 250...

Page 2522: ...K Tie Trunk MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for example A B C D or E and SS is t...

Page 2523: ...ded tests and alarm escalation and resolution Three different trunk service states are specified in the DS1 tie trunk maintenance They are out of service in which the trunk is in a deactivated state a...

Page 2524: ...18 c 0 busyout trunk grp mbr WARNING OFF release trunk grp mbr 19 d 0 None 130 e None WARNING ON test trunk grp mbr 257 f 57473 57474 513 g 57392 DS1 Tie Trunk Seizure Test 136 MIN MAJ2 769 h 57393 DS...

Page 2525: ...rcuit pack has been removed or has been insane for more than 11 minutes To clear the error reinsert or replace the circuit pack 2562 k 16665 2817 l 52992 3840 m Any Port Audit and Update Test 36 1 Run...

Page 2526: ...ror can be ignored i Error Type 1793 The DS1 Interface circuit pack is out of service See the appropriate DS1 BD UDS1 BD DS1 UDS1 Interface Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation for details j Error T...

Page 2527: ...rrors generated from other tests in the testing sequence NPE Crosstalk Test 6 One or more NPEs reside on each circuit pack with a TDM Bus interface The NPE controls port connectivity and gain and prov...

Page 2528: ...f 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate time slots...

Page 2529: ...error 1 Examine the Error Log for existing errors against this port or the circuit pack and attempt to diagnose the already existing error 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received with...

Page 2530: ...test when the faults from steps 1 2 and 3 are cleared Replace the board only if the test fails PASS The port is correctly using its allocated time slots User reported troubles on this port should be i...

Page 2531: ...isplay port UUCSSpp to determine the trunk group member number of the port Use status trunk to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the p...

Page 2532: ...ate indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is idle before retesting 1 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute in...

Page 2533: ...pack with a TN767C V3 or later The error log may have error type 1281 entries 2 Test all administered trunks on the board If one fails this could be an off board problem such as an incoming seizure or...

Page 2534: ...tenance documentation If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on replace the pack PASS The port can correctly conference multiple connections User reported troubles on this port shou...

Page 2535: ...ort Use status trunk to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests You must wait until the port is id...

Page 2536: ...trunk back into in service 3 Retry the test command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inserted an incor...

Page 2537: ...on a trunk if one of the following cases is true 1 The trunk direction is administered as an incoming only trunk 2 The trunk is the 24th port on a DS1 Interface circuit pack which is administered usi...

Page 2538: ...trunk outgoing type either automatic or immediate start c Is trunk the 24th port of the DS1 Interface circuit pack while common control channel signaling is specified 2 If the trunk has been administe...

Page 2539: ...The far end trunk did not respond to the seizure of the near end trunk within the allowable time period This test could have associated in line errors in the error log 1 1 Enter list configuration boa...

Page 2540: ...t pack Maintenance documentation 4 Retry the test at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times PASS The trunk can be seized for an outgoing call 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID...

Page 2541: ...each tie trunk has a 4 wire audio connection and may have two signaling leads E and M Each tie trunk for the TN439 and TN497 circuit packs has 2 wire audio connection signal leads A and B In G3iV1 1 2...

Page 2542: ...ence capabilities of all ports This test may fail due to noise induced by adjacent electric power lines Customers having this problem should resolve it with their local power company To temporarily al...

Page 2543: ...f the Tie Trunk Except for the TN497 circuit pack these updates include Immediate automatic wink start or delay dial and for the TN2140 G3iV2 386 continuous seize ack For the TN2140 G3iV2 386 continuo...

Page 2544: ...None2 WARNING4 ON4 test trunk grp mbr 4 257 i 57473 None WARNING OFF 257 j 57474 None WARNING OFF 257 k 57475 None WARNING OFF 5134 Any4 EPF M and E Lead 74 4 MAJ MIN WRN1 4 OFF4 test port PCSSpp sh r...

Page 2545: ...slation match at both ends d On hook before wink This occurs when the far end goes on hook before a wink Check the far end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends 2305 m 3 574243 Tie Trunk Dial...

Page 2546: ...k is still seized with an incoming call The far end PBX is not releasing the trunk after the call is dropped A Minor alarm is generated every four minutes until the far end PBX releases the trunk Chec...

Page 2547: ...a per port basis The NPE Crosstalk Test verifies that this port s NPE channel talks on the selected time slot and never crosses over to time slots reserved for other connections If the NPE is not work...

Page 2548: ...this error and required actions The port may be locked up 2 If the port status is idle retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this te...

Page 2549: ...command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times Any FAIL This test can fail due to on board or off board problems Off board problems of concern include EXP INTF faults TDM BUS faults and faults ass...

Page 2550: ...rt tests and examining station trunk or external wiring 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board 1 Check to ensure that the board translations are correct Translate th...

Page 2551: ...unavailable for certain tests Refer to the Status Commands section in Chapter 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble Clearing Aids for a full description of all possible states You must wait until the po...

Page 2552: ...tate indicates that the port is in use the port is unavailable for certain tests Refer to the Status Commands section in Chapter 8 Maintenance Commands and Trouble Clearing Aids for a full description...

Page 2553: ...d as follows unless power or tone problems are suspected see notes on the next page 1 To make sure the problem is on board disconnect the port from the CO and retry the test Coordinate this with the C...

Page 2554: ...carrier port power unit for DC powered systems Maintenance documentation If a red LED on TN736 or TN752 power unit circuit pack is on replace the pack If the test fails on more than 1 port check for...

Page 2555: ...cuit pack The port translation data for the TN439 circuit pack includes the following Immediate or wink start trunk rotary or DTMF senderization in or out disconnect timing from 10 to 2550ms in 10ms i...

Page 2556: ...aling troubles are reported verify translation information for this port Non TN439 and non TN497 circuit packs only If the trunk is busied out the test does not run but it does return PASS To verify t...

Page 2557: ...Log for Error Type 1025 see Error Log table for description of this error and required actions The port may be locked up The far end PBX may not be releasing 2 If the port status is idle then retry t...

Page 2558: ...st issue change trunk group x where x equals the number of the trunk group to be tested Then change the entry in the Maintenance Tests field on the form to y 1040 ABORT Non TN497 circuit packs only Th...

Page 2559: ...If the test continues to fail check the far end PBX to ensure a translation match at both ends 3 Check the facility PASS The relevant seizure test passes This port is functioning properly 1 If users...

Page 2560: ...Type 1025 see Error Log table for description of this error and required actions The port may be locked up The far end PBX may not be releasing 2 If the port status is idle then retry the command at...

Page 2561: ...should abort 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run the test This could be due t...

Page 2562: ...ade and compared to administered thresholds Errors are generated when results fall outside of marginal or unacceptable thresholds Detail and summary measurement reports are obtainable via the list tes...

Page 2563: ...inute intervals for a maximum of 5 retries 1002 ABORT The system could not allocate timeslots for the test The system may be under heavy traffic conditions or it may have timeslots out of service due...

Page 2564: ...end 1 See actions for error code 1905 1913 ABORT Audible Ring detected from far end 1 See actions for error code 1905 1914 ABORT Unidentified interrupted tone detected from far end 1 See actions for...

Page 2565: ...ith the far end system a technician at the far end should test the test line TN771 or ADFTC 1941 ABORT High frequency singing return loss self check failed 1942 ABORT Echo return loss self check faile...

Page 2566: ...n page 4 of the trunk group form Besides the facility test failures can be caused by faulty test lines or switch paths If the measurements point to a facility problem report the results to the trunk v...

Page 2567: ...des on the TN1648 SYSAM circuit pack and has a backup battery to save the time of day during power failures If the TN1648 SYSAM circuit pack is physically removed from the carrier the contents of the...

Page 2568: ...t been retired continue with Step 3 3 Test the active TN1648 SYSAM circuit pack using test maintenance a b sh If any tests fail refer to the repair procedures for the SYSAM circuit pack before further...

Page 2569: ...available on the TN768 or TN780 The TN2182 contains 8 ports used for all purpose tone detection These ports are called Enhanced Tone Receiver ports ETR PT and are described in the documentation for ET...

Page 2570: ...es the same as other clock boards with one being active and one being standby But the tone detector ports ETR PTs of the TN2182 are always considered available and in service regardless of the active...

Page 2571: ...uit pack in the same carrier as the active SPE it will become active regardless of its health If the Tone Clock circuit pack in the selected SPE was in the busyout state see item 1 above it will autom...

Page 2572: ...in two ways 1 A scheduled Tone Clock circuit pack interchange occurs according to the parameters set by the change system parameters maintenance command This can be disabled or set to run weekly but t...

Page 2573: ...specific country needs These changes are made via the change system parameters country options form The TN2182 allows the same International changes as the TN780 but allows the customization of up to...

Page 2574: ...ector may be used anywhere a TN768 or TN780 is used with the exception of configurations requiring Stratum 3 Clock The TN2182 may be used in all country configurations Port Networks with a Single Tone...

Page 2575: ...ork In the PPN restart the system via the reset system 2 command In an EPN restart the EPN by resetting its Expansion Interface circuit pack via the reset board command using the board address 1a01 fo...

Page 2576: ...ization reference 1 1 For a Tone Clock in the master port network the external source is the primary or secondary DS1 source or a Stratum 3 clock For a Tone Clzteock in a slave port network the extern...

Page 2577: ...functioning properly If the Tone Clock circuit pack is being replaced due to loss of clocks the Clock Health Inquiry 46 will still report a failure proceed with the next step 7 To verify that the new...

Page 2578: ...G OFF release tone clock PC 23 c 0 None WARNING OFF 125 d None MINOR ON 126 e None MINOR ON 257 65535 Control Channel Test 52 MINOR ON test tone clock PC r 20 257 f Any None 513 g Any None 769 h 4358...

Page 2579: ...Otherwise only the EPN in question is affected When this happens both circuit packs are faulty and must be replaced See the preceding section How to Replace a Tone Clock Circuit Pack If a successful...

Page 2580: ...receding section How to Replace a Tone Clock Circuit Pack h Error Type 769 This error can be ignored but look for other errors on this circuit pack i Error Type 1025 This error is not service affectin...

Page 2581: ...ack on carrier A For an EPN the t c selector is the active EXP INTF circuit pack that is connected to the PPN This is EXP INTF 2A01 or 2B02 for EPN1 and 3A01 or 3B02 for EPN2 The t c selector circuit...

Page 2582: ...blem sources proceed with the following steps 2 Determine which circuit pack was controlling the choice of Tone Clock at the time the error occurred For a PPN the t c selector is the DUPINT circuit pa...

Page 2583: ...ne Clocks with the set tone clock PC command If the Tone Clock interchange failed for both t c selectors Replace the standby Tone Clock circuit pack which could not be interchanged into and return to...

Page 2584: ...e Clock circuit pack had a loss of Data Clocks This error will impact mainly users on station connected to Digital circuit packs These users could be with out service If error 2049 is also logged see...

Page 2585: ...d Long Test Sequences according to the Tone Clock Circuit Pack Code For a system with a TN756 Tone Clock Circuit Pack a Refer to XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack documentation for descriptions of these...

Page 2586: ...ates this Tone Clock circuit pack had a loss of any of these clocks the inquiry reports FAIL In addition if TDM CLK error 1 is at threshold this test will FAIL TDM CLK error 1 indicates a suspect cloc...

Page 2587: ...test fails the only way to make it pass and to retire the associated alarm is to repair the problem and to execute set tone clock PC override against the indicated Tone Clock circuit pack NOTE If pow...

Page 2588: ...cuit pack resides The system will be able to process certain type of calls that is internal calls will succeed while outgoing calls will not The Tone Clock circuit pack also provides the clocks for th...

Page 2589: ...ce the circuit pack d The tone generation facility is having problems verifying that tones have been connected as requested e The tone generation facility may or may not be able to generate tones Tone...

Page 2590: ...on Set on page 1 or the custom tones beginning on page 2 of the system parameters country options form may have values not supported by the existing tone clock This error 1281 indicates that the syste...

Page 2591: ...Circuit Pack Notes a Refer to XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation for descriptions of these tests b Refer to TONE BD Tone Clock Circuit Pack Maintenance documentation for descri...

Page 2592: ...pack High or Critical Reliability Option The circuit pack must be a TN780 code with firmware revision 2 or above or a TN2182 Order of Investigation ShortTest Sequence LongTest Sequence D ND1 1 D Dest...

Page 2593: ...e detector These tones are 440 Hz 2225 Hz Digital Count The tone generator is then told to generate a sequence of test tones whose output levels are measured by a tone detector These tones are 404 Hz...

Page 2594: ...he TDM Bus via test tdm port network PN Refer to TDM BUS section for details 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort follow normal escalation pr...

Page 2595: ...rvals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort follow normal escalation procedures 2100 ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at 1 minute int...

Page 2596: ...attempt to move the tone generation function to the alternate Tone Clock circuit pack if one is present in the affected Port Network Users may or may not hear any noisy tones This type of failure affe...

Page 2597: ...itself A check is also made between the type of tone clock being tested and the type of tone clock needed based on system administration The administration on the system parameters country options for...

Page 2598: ...ration beginning on page 2 2 Replace existing tone clock circuit packs with TN2182s PASS The tone generation facility has been successfully refreshed with its time slot translation and system administ...

Page 2599: ...US via test tdm port network PN Refer to TDM BUS section for details 2000 ABORT Response to the test request was not received within the allowable time period 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessa...

Page 2600: ...information about changing the grace period see Changing the grace period interval Clearing the alarm Use the reset system 3 command with the translation card that matches the processor s in place to...

Page 2601: ...ment procedure Step Description Command Procedure 1 Suppress alarms change system parameters maintenance Change the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers field to neither Screen 1816 Press Enter to effect...

Page 2602: ...to Steps 3 through 8 this time performing the steps on the A side Table 10 660 Processor circuit pack replacement procedure Continued Step Description Command Procedure Continued on next page change s...

Page 2603: ...the command change system parameters security See Screen 1818 2 Go to page 2 Scroll to page 2 of the form 3 Change the field value Set the Translation ID Number Mismatch Interval field to a number be...

Page 2604: ...ection of a translation ID mismatch change system parameters security SECURITY RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS SECURITY VIOLATION NOTIFICATION PARAMETERS SVN Station Security Code Violation Notification Ena...

Page 2605: ...nly either incoming or outgoing not only at the DEFINITY switch but also at the CO switch This is necessary to avoid collisions i e glare and other highly undesirable conditions The TN797 Analog Trunk...

Page 2606: ...ADM TSC serves as the logical channel function in a DCS network A Non Call Associated Temporary Signaling Connection NCATSC is a virtual connection established within a D channel The NCATSC connection...

Page 2607: ...rdware Error Log Entries and Test to Clear Values Notes a There is no Test to Clear Value for error types 3840 3967 The error types provides the following additional data that may prove useful when tr...

Page 2608: ...error conditions do not log an error but switched services may take some type of recovery action in certain instances This test sends a USER INFORMATION TSC heartbeat message inquiry across an Admini...

Page 2609: ...to y 3 If the congestion still does not clear check other nodes in the network If congestion persists then escalate the problem 1146 ABORT The congestion just occurred in the network 1 Issue the stat...

Page 2610: ...ABORT The ADMTSC is enabled but inactive near end 1 Disable and enable the ADMTSC 2 Reissue the test tsc administered command 3 If the ADMTSC is still inactive check the other nodes in the network 114...

Page 2611: ...dministered Change the Enable field to n To enable the ADMTSC change the Enable field to y 3 Reissue the test tsc administered command 4 If the test fails check the ADMTSC node on the other side of th...

Page 2612: ...s connected and ready to receive digits For example if there are 20 TTRs in the system being used simultaneously by 20 users at a given time then the 21st user would not receive dial tone until a TTR...

Page 2613: ...Dual Tone Multifrequency Receiver Ports DTMR PTs have been taken out of service for a Tone Detector circuit pack that is the ports have been either busied out by system technician or maintenance has...

Page 2614: ...s and or Call Classifier circuit packs or 2 reducing the threshold the TTR Level alarm is still present then proceed to Step 3 3 Execute the display error command Look for a GPTD PT DTMR PT or CLSFY P...

Page 2615: ...clear the alarm refer to the repair procedure described above c Error code 3 does not indicate a current error condition It indicates that the number of GPTD ports in service was below the administer...

Page 2616: ...l states when the ports are being brought into service f The total number of Call Classifier ports currently in service is below the administered threshold To clear the alarm refer to the repair proce...

Page 2617: ...e an Integrated Channel Service Unit ICSU is not supported on this circuit pack tests associated with an ICSU are not executed Tests associated with new functionality available with the video enabled...

Page 2618: ...s in Japan The upgrade procedure requires removing the JRC Japan Radio Corporation external converter in Figure 9 37 Figure 10 98 Japanese TTC public network connections Figure Notes 1 DEFINITY Releas...

Page 2619: ...UUCSS 2 Remove the TN464 administration change circuit pack change ds1 and change trunk group n 3 Remove the UDS1 BD circuit packs 4 Remove the JRC Japan Radio Corporation external converter and cabl...

Page 2620: ...group administration parameters that are required for this interface to operate successfully in Japan Table 10 664 H600 513 cable assembly pinout TN2242 TDM 50 pin connection pin number Color Lead De...

Page 2621: ...ing Disconnect 100 Incoming Glare Guard 800ms or higher Incoming Dial Guard 10 Incoming Incomplete Dial Alarm 25 or higher Incoming Partial Dial 18 PPS 10 or 20 Make for PPS 10 35 Break for PPS 10 65...

Page 2622: ...pack sends DS1 link status information to the synchronization reference switching algorithm This algorithm determines whether timing references should be switched due to failure or restore conditions...

Page 2623: ...64BP UDS1 circuit packs feature an integrated echo canceller Echo cancellation is a Software Right To Use feature that can be turned as needed Echo cancellation supports channels carrying voice and is...

Page 2624: ...N2464BP is selectable per channel even though it is administrable on a trunk group basis For example if all but two ports on a TN464GP TN2464BP need to have echo cancellation applied those two ports m...

Page 2625: ...free communication Refer to SYNC Synchronization in this MO for details Each trunk line or endpoint has its own maintenance strategy but all depend on the health of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack Ref...

Page 2626: ...nd the CSU Module between the Integrated CSU and the optional Customer Premises Loopback Jack or between the Integrated CSU and remote CSU These loopback tests are explained in detail later in this UD...

Page 2627: ...otocol 1 Near End CSU Type is set to other for no CSU installed or for an external CSU such as an Avaya ESF T1 CSU or set to integrated for the 120A1 CSU Module or the 401A T1 Sync Splitter Answering...

Page 2628: ...10 103 on page 10 1843 shows how to configure the circuit pack for 24 channel or 32 channel DS1 The channel selection must match the parameters administered on the corresponding DS1 Circuit Pack Form...

Page 2629: ...e is copied onto a source C LAN board using FTP The image is then copied to the target boards Flash over the TDM bus The transfer of the download image from the source board to the target board is don...

Page 2630: ...iry Test 138 MIN WRN3 OFF test board UUCSS 1300 j Any Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test 138 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1301 k Any Loss Of Signal Alarm Inquiry Test 138 WARNING OFF test board UUCSS 1...

Page 2631: ...N WRN4 OFF test board UUCSS 1795 Any Blue Alarm Inquiry Test 139 MAJ MIN WNG4 OFF test board UUCSS 2049 Any Red Alarm Inquiry Test 140 MIN WRN3 OFF test board UUCSS 2305 Any Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test...

Page 2632: ...rrect slot or 3843 ab 46081 3900 ac Any CPE Loopback Jack Test 1212 3901 ad Any Far CSU Loopback Test 1213 3902 ae Any One Way Span Test 1214 3999 af Any None 1 Run the Short Test Sequence first If al...

Page 2633: ...st circuit packs in that inserting the circuit pack into the switch is not enough to make the board usable It must also be administered with the add ds1 command d Error Type 125 No Aux Data An incorre...

Page 2634: ...slation RAM locations for the call connection attempt An alarm is raised if this error occurs two times within 10 minutes Clear the alarm using the following commands busyout board UUCSS reset board U...

Page 2635: ...ck of the port carrier but the E1 Sync Splitter field on the add ds1 form has not been administered as y If the 402A or 403A E1 Synchronization Splitter is to be used use the change ds1 command to cha...

Page 2636: ...is also executed as part of the command test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback tests Attempt to clear the alarm using the commands busyout board UUCSS test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback tests release...

Page 2637: ...r 1400 Echo canceller function failed The Echo Canceller Function Test which is executed by firmware failed Error 1401 Echo canceller memory failed The Echo Canceller Memory Test which is executed by...

Page 2638: ...not restored to normal operation or the error recurs after the board was restored to normal operation escalate the problem v Error Types 3073 to 3160 For later releases of G3V4 and beyond only Error...

Page 2639: ...ected but the call continues by using another translation location ab Error Type 3843 LAN Receive Parity Error This error occurs when the circuit pack detects an error in a received frame from the Pac...

Page 2640: ...vice but it has generated 50 of the messages necessary to be considered hyperactive This may be completely normal during heavy traffic periods However if this error type is logged when the circuit pac...

Page 2641: ...rm Inquiry Test 140 X X ND Yellow Alarm Inquiry Test 141 X X ND Major Alarm Inquiry Test 142 X X ND Minor Alarm Inquiry Test 143 X X ND Slip Alarm Inquiry Test 144 X X ND Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test 1...

Page 2642: ...ircuit pack s SCOTCH NPE chip has been updated with its translation 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is in...

Page 2643: ...Chapter 5 3 Retry the command a few times a maximum of 5 times PASS Communication with this circuit pack is successful 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This co...

Page 2644: ...ation to run this test This error applies only to DS1 Interface circuit packs It means the DS1 Interface circuit pack is providing timing for the system and therefore it cannot be reset without major...

Page 2645: ...If the problem persists replace the circuit pack PASS The circuit pack initializes correctly 1 Run the Short Test Sequence 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board Thi...

Page 2646: ...system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not allocate a tone receiver for the test The system m...

Page 2647: ...or 1 Retry the reset board command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 1 Retry the reset board command at 1 minute...

Page 2648: ...evice Obtain the error seconds measurement on the terminating device if possible Refer to the line side terminating device operating manual for information 5 Check the physical connection of the UDS1...

Page 2649: ...PASS All administered trunks or ports of the UDS1 Interface circuit pack pass the Internal Looparound Test The bit pattern consistency test is executed successfully over the path that covers a DS1 po...

Page 2650: ...tion also queries the UDS1 board to confirm the I CSU Sync Splitter error A Minor or Warning alarm is raised depending on the severity of the I CSU Sync Splitter error The trunks on the board may be t...

Page 2651: ...lowing symptoms may be exhibited 1 The UDS1 BD tests such as Test 138 and Test 139 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result 3...

Page 2652: ...CSU Module s Sync Splitter s NETWORK jack 2 If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack connects to a T1 facility call the vendor of the T1 carrier to diagnose the remote DS1 endpoint If the UDS1 Interface cir...

Page 2653: ...connector panel on back of the carrier Otherwise change the Near End CSU Type field using the change ds1 form to other 2 Run the test again The E1 Sync Splitter is missing The E1 Sync Splitter field...

Page 2654: ...hronization Splitter is physically connected to the UDS1 board on the back of the port carrier but the E1 Sync Splitter field on the add ds1 form has not been administered as y 1 If the 402A or 403A E...

Page 2655: ...hange the Near End CSU Type field to other The DS1 circuit pack Suffix is incorrect for E1 Sync Splitter administration The E1 Sync Splitter field on the add ds1 form has been administered as y but th...

Page 2656: ...er and running the test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback tests command again 3 If the ELB test continues to fail then replace the UDS1 board and run the test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopback tests comma...

Page 2657: ...ode replace the UDS1 BD circuit pack and run the test again 3 If the test continues to fail with this error code then the problem could be in the I O cable between the backplane and the CSU module Syn...

Page 2658: ...er 1323 FAIL A service affecting CSU Module Sync Splitter audit failure was detected by the UDS1 circuit pack All administered ports on the UDS1 circuit pack are affected and maintenance software will...

Page 2659: ...s inserted an incorrect board is inserted or an insane board is inserted 1 Ensure that the board translations are correct Execute the add ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is no...

Page 2660: ...ervice state before the Blue alarm occurs Line Loopback Alarm The Line Loopback LLB is used by the remote DS1 endpoint to put the ICSU or DS1 board into a loopback mode When the ICSU or DS1 board is i...

Page 2661: ...ows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the ou...

Page 2662: ...RI terminal adapter call the vendor of the terminating device to diagnose the equipment 1795 FAIL The UDS1 Interface circuit pack detects a Payload Loopback Alarm PLB If the UDS1 Interface circuit pac...

Page 2663: ...ds1 UUCSS command to administer the UDS1 interface if it is not already administered 2 If the board was already administered correctly check the error log to determine whether the board is hyperactiv...

Page 2664: ...runks or ports of the circuit pack into the out of service state The inquiry test runs every 10 minutes until the Red alarm is cleared When the Red alarm is cleared the UDS1 Interface circuit pack sto...

Page 2665: ...a release has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from t...

Page 2666: ...UDS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line sid...

Page 2667: ...e 4 Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Verify that the switc...

Page 2668: ...low alarm is cleared the maintenance software restores all trunks or ports on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack back to their previous service state before the Yellow alarm was raised PASS No Red alarm...

Page 2669: ...the remote DS1 endpoint is in a Loss of Multiframe Alarm condition while the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is administered using the DMI BOS common channel signaling The RMA is handled as a Yellow alarm...

Page 2670: ...or a release has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from...

Page 2671: ...he UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using the same...

Page 2672: ...test If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using...

Page 2673: ...eat the test If the UDS1 connects to a line side terminating device such as a PRI terminal adapter 1 Verify that the switch DS1 and the line side terminating device are administered using the same sig...

Page 2674: ...on the circuit pack in the out of service state if the Major alarm persists for more than 20 minutes PASS Neither a Yellow alarm nor a Remote Multiframe Alarm nor a F5 state alarm is being received f...

Page 2675: ...A busyout or a release has no affect on the test results 4 A list config command shows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is iso...

Page 2676: ...RI terminal adapter do the following 1 The performance of the DS1 link between the UDS1 interface circuit pack and the line side terminating device is very poor Enter the list measurement ds1 log UUCS...

Page 2677: ...rm the Minor alarm All trunks or ports on the circuit pack are kept in the in service state after the Minor alarm is confirmed The Minor Alarm Inquiry Test runs every 10 minutes until the Minor alarm...

Page 2678: ...ows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into t...

Page 2679: ...e terminating device for example a PRI terminal adapter do the following 1 The performance of the DS1 link between the UDS1 interface circuit pack and the line side terminating device is very poor Ent...

Page 2680: ...e state If the UDS1 Interface circuit pack is used to supply the system synchronization source the MINOR alarm will initiate a synchronization source switch See TDM BUS and SYNC Synchronization for de...

Page 2681: ...ws that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into th...

Page 2682: ...cuit pack is a TN464C enter the list measurement ds1 log UUCSS command to read the error seconds measurement 3 Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are administered using the same signaling mode...

Page 2683: ...ction failures 7 Replace the local UDS1 interface circuit pack and repeat the test PASS No Slip alarm is detected on the UDS1 Interface circuit pack 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal I...

Page 2684: ...eshold i e 17 a MISFRAME COUNT message is automatically sent to the switch maintenance software After the maintenance software receives the MISFRAME COUNT message the Misframe Alarm Inquiry Test is in...

Page 2685: ...hows that the circuit pack and the ports are properly installed NOTE When hyperactivity occurs the circuit pack is isolated from the system and all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into...

Page 2686: ...of 5 times 2 If the DS1 interface circuit pack is a TN464C enter the list measurement ds1 log UUCSS command to read the error seconds measurement 3 Verify that both endpoints of the DS1 link are admin...

Page 2687: ...aming mode and line coding 4 Investigate the maintenance status of the line side terminating device Refer to the Line Side Terminating Device Operating Manual for information 5 Contact the vendor of t...

Page 2688: ...nslation for the CSU Module T1 Sync Splitter includes the following data Transmit LBO Receive ALBO Supply CPE Loopback Jack Power etc PASS No Misframe alarm is detected on the UDS1 Interface circuit p...

Page 2689: ...the UDS1 Interface circuit pack translation PASS Translation data has been downloaded to the UDS1 Interface circuit pack successfully 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port...

Page 2690: ...oard Loopback Test cannot be executed in the current configuration To run this the TN464F or later suffix UDS1 must be administered for 24 channel operation The Bit Rate field on the DS1 circuit pack...

Page 2691: ...138 and Test 139 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning a no board result 3 A busyout or a release command has no affect on the test results...

Page 2692: ...t executed successfully The test pattern was transmitted and received successfully up to the DS1 board edge 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due...

Page 2693: ...oard command is entered Table 10 683 TEST 1210 CSU Equipment Loopback Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the test ds1 loop UUCSS ds1 csu loopbac...

Page 2694: ...k mode Line loopback or Payload loopback The hardware error log will indicate whether a Customer Loopback Jack Test Far CSU Loopback Test or the One Way Span Test is executing or if the board is in li...

Page 2695: ...of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 inte...

Page 2696: ...was transmitted and received successfully over the connection from the DS1 board to the near edge of the 120A1 CSU Module or the 401A T1 Sync Splitter 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal...

Page 2697: ...p the RLB loopback transmits a test pattern and verifies that the pattern is received unaltered through the loopback If the transmitted and received pattern is different the test fails When the test i...

Page 2698: ...and 1950 ABORT Another loopback span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode Line loopback or Payload loopback The hardware error log will indic...

Page 2699: ...n 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation All of the trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pack are then returned to the i...

Page 2700: ...he connection from the UDS1 board to the far edge of the 120A1 CSU Module or the 401A T1 Sync Splitter 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to in...

Page 2701: ...ry low The command will also display the type of Loopback Span test executing Test field the type of pattern generated for the Loopback Span test Pattern field and whether the pattern i e 3 in 24 Patt...

Page 2702: ...on switch command 1950 ABORT Another loopback span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode Line loopback or Payload loopback The hardware error...

Page 2703: ...all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 i...

Page 2704: ...iated with the test that fails 3 FAIL The CPE Loopback Jack Test was not set up properly The framed 3 in 24 test pattern generated by the UDS1 Interface circuit pack and looped back through the CPE Lo...

Page 2705: ...t will continue to run until the system technician enters the test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test command or the release board UUCSS command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID...

Page 2706: ...of Loopback Span test executing Test field the type of pattern generated for the type of Loopback Span test Pattern field and whether the pattern i e 3 in 24 Pattern is synchronized Synchronized field...

Page 2707: ...on switch command 1950 ABORT Another loopback span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode Line loopback or Payload loopback The hardware error...

Page 2708: ...all of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1...

Page 2709: ...est was not set up properly The framed 3 in 24 test pattern generated by the UDS1 Interface circuit pack and looped back through the far end CSU could not be detected properly by the UDS1 circuit pack...

Page 2710: ...end loopback span test command or the release board UUCSS command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is inse...

Page 2711: ...ulating the test duration and number of bit errors The command will also display the Loopback Span test executing Test field the type of pattern generated for the Loopback Span test Pattern field and...

Page 2712: ...tion switch command 1950 ABORT Another loopback span test is already executing on the DS1 board or the board is in a network requested loopback mode Line loopback or Payload loopback The hardware erro...

Page 2713: ...l of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 int...

Page 2714: ...un until the system technician enters the test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test command or the release board UUCSS command 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no boar...

Page 2715: ...le 10 688 TEST 1215 Inject Single Bit Error Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the test ds1 loop UUCSS inject single bit error command at 1 minu...

Page 2716: ...of the trunks for this circuit pack are placed into the out of service state The system will try to restore the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 inte...

Page 2717: ...sied out using the system technician busyout board command before running this End Loopback Span Test PASS A single bit error has been successfully injected into an active framed 3 in 24 test pattern...

Page 2718: ...system error 1 Retry the test ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1005 ABORT End Loopback Span Test cannot be executed in the current configuration...

Page 2719: ...store the circuit pack within 15 minutes When no faults are detected for 15 minutes the UDS1 interface circuit pack is restored to normal operation All of the trunks for the UDS1 interface circuit pac...

Page 2720: ...st ds1 loop UUCSS end loopback span test command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times PASS The active long duration loopback or span test on the UDS1 BD circuit pack was successfully termina...

Page 2721: ...the current configuration The test applies only to TN464F or later UDS1 circuit packs administered for 24 channel operation 1 544 bit rate 1 If the circuit pack is a TN464F or later suffix UDS1 circui...

Page 2722: ...ave differently the board should be replaced at the customer s convenience 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no boar...

Page 2723: ...or more of the following symptoms may be exhibited 1 The UDS1 BD tests such as Test 138 and Test 139 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are returning...

Page 2724: ...em resources to run this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times 2500 ABORT Internal system error 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals for a maximum of 5 times Tab...

Page 2725: ...nged out PASS The Echo Cancellation feature is functioning properly 0 NO BOARD The test could not relate the internal ID to the port no board This could be due to incorrect translations no board is in...

Page 2726: ...controls The switch activates congestion controls on VAL when it detects buffers exceeding the threshold The switch releases the congestion controls when the VAL reports that its buffer level has ret...

Page 2727: ...2 MINOR ON test board UUCSS l r 20 257 d 513 e 4352 4357 MINOR ON 769 f 4358 1281 1290 to 1295 g Any MINOR ON reset board UUCSS 1537 1796 h Any MINOR ON 1794 i MINOR ON 1798 j 2049 k Packet Interface...

Page 2728: ...nication problem between switch and circuit pack does not affect service and can be ignored 1 Ignore this error unless the Control Channel Loop Test 52 fails 2 If Test 52 fails replace the circuit pac...

Page 2729: ...t bus transmit buffers have overflowed 1 Attempt to clear the alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If the error recurs within 15 minutes replace the circuit pack j Error Type 1798 Unable to write translation RAM...

Page 2730: ...ket Interface Test 598 fails consult repair procedure for the packet bus m Error Type 2561 2668 System software received an indication that the socket was closed due to an error Errors are reported as...

Page 2731: ...to clear the alarm reset board UUCSS 2 If alarm persists replace circuit pack q Error Type 3586 and 3999 Switch removed hyperactive circuit pack that reported threshold number of errors One or more o...

Page 2732: ...k received bad control channel message from switch Aux Data If Error Type 3999 And traffic volume is Then Does not accompany Error Type 3586 Heavy Circuit pack is in service but sent at least half hyp...

Page 2733: ...ror By themselves these errors do not affect service w Error Type 3846 Main interprocessor error By themselves these errors do not affect service x Error Type 3848 Main internal channel error By thems...

Page 2734: ...IC Receive Parity Error Counter Test 595 X ND Receive FIFO Overflow Error Counter Test 596 X ND Packet Interface Test 598 X X ND Congestion Query Test 600 X X ND Link Status Test 601 X X ND Table 10 6...

Page 2735: ...e intervals up to 5 times If the problem persists escalate the problem 1015 ABORT Port is not out of service Busyout the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS Retry the command at 1 minute intervals up to...

Page 2736: ...uit pack test response within the allowable time period Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS If the problem persists repla...

Page 2737: ...allowable time period Retry command at 1 minute intervals up to 5 times If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS If the problem persists replace the circuit pack 2100 ABORT Co...

Page 2738: ...an indicate a circuit pack problem packet bus problem problem with another circuit pack on the bus Table 10 697 TEST 597 Invalid LAPD Frame Error Counter Test Error Code Test Result Description Recomm...

Page 2739: ...for Test 598 PASS Circuit pack detects no errors Table 10 698 TEST 598 Packet Interface Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 2000 ABORT Did not receive circuit pack test response wi...

Page 2740: ...tinues to fail replace the circuit pack PASS The Packet Interface Test 598 passed If Then Used buffers are or are nearly exhausted The test fails The test fails The switch alarms and announcements can...

Page 2741: ...ongested indicates circuit pack failure If the problem persists reset the circuit pack reset board UUCSS If congestion recurs replace the circuit pack High processor occupancy indicates the VAL is con...

Page 2742: ...frame is successfully transmitted A failure can indicate a problem with this circuit pack the packet bus the packet interface circuit pack Table 10 700 TEST 601 Link Status Test Error Code Test Resul...

Page 2743: ...is in the circuit pack If the Packet Interface Test 598 fails refer to Packet Interface Test repair procedures If the Packet Interface Test 598 passes refer to Packet Control Circuit Pack and Packet...

Page 2744: ...ccess terminal SAT 3 Switch 4 Phone for recording announcements 5 TN799C C LAN is required when using IP SAT or VAL Manager 6 Your LAN See LAN cable 7 computer or remote recording studio for recording...

Page 2745: ...ure shows the 9 LEDs on the TN2051AP faceplate Descriptions of each LED are in Table 10 701 Figure 10 105 TN2501AP faceplate LEDs The following table lists the TN2501AP faceplate LEDs the type of beha...

Page 2746: ...edure again Amber Fast flash 100ms on 100ms off Occurs during circuit pack insertion or circuit pack reset which the announcement files are being copied from FLASH to RAM If you reset the circuit pack...

Page 2747: ...cement circuit pack slot LAN cable that attaches to the Backplane Adapter Backplane Adapter The following figure shows the Backplane Adapter label reads IP Media Processor Figure 10 106 Backplane Adap...

Page 2748: ...etting it reset board release board Resume activity on the circuit pack after busying out the VAL circuit pack or ports on it busyout board or busyout port busyout port Isolate a specific port usually...

Page 2749: ...k enable filesystem Begin an FTP session into a specific TN2501AP circuit pack disable filesystem End an FTP session into a specific TN2501AP circuit pack set ethernet options Manually or automaticall...

Page 2750: ...ongestion controls when the VAL reports that its buffer level has returned to normal levels MO Name in Alarm Log Alarm Level Initial Command to Run1 1 UU is the universal cabinet number 1 for PPN 2 3...

Page 2751: ...to verify repair 3 Clear the alarm test port UUCSSpp long clear c Error Type 3585 TDM Port Looparound Test 1285 failed 1 Test the port test port UUCsspp long 2 Refer to TDM Looparound Test 1285 repair...

Page 2752: ...tone receiver receive tones on another timeslot The tones are looped through the record playback port Test failure indicates failure of one or more of the following components VAL TN2501 circuit pack...

Page 2753: ...cuit pack test response within the allowable time period If this problem persists reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS Repeat the test If the problem pe...

Page 2754: ...try the command when the port is idle You can force the port to the idle state with the busyout port UUCSS command This command is destructive tearing down all calls and links using the port 1002 ABOR...

Page 2755: ...calate if the problem persists FAIL VAL circuit pack detected test failure If the problem persists reset the circuit pack busyout board UUCSS reset board UUCSS and release board UUCSS If the problem p...

Page 2756: ...mmand to Run1 1 Where P is the port network number 1 for PPN and 2 or 3 for EPN C is the carrier designation for example A B C or D and SS is the address of the slot in the carrier where the circuit p...

Page 2757: ...Pack VC BD is not Vintage 2 or later it must be replaced b This circuit pack is busied out by the busyout board PCSS command c Transient communication problems exist between the switch and this circui...

Page 2758: ...rd PCSS followed by release board PCSS If test 53 passes the on board circuitry is healthy Use test board PCSS long clear to retire the alarm If test 53 fails replace the circuit pack h The circuit pa...

Page 2759: ...edure described in the XXX BD Common Port Circuit Pack maintenance documentation for a description of this test Control Channel Loop Around Test 52 Refer to the repair procedure described in the XXX B...

Page 2760: ...it pack is located for example 01 02 Full Name of MO VC DSPPT MAJOR test port PCSSpp l r Voice Conditioner DSP Port VC DSPPT MINOR test port PCSSpp l r Voice Conditioner DSP Port VC DSPPT WARNING test...

Page 2761: ...d Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below By clearing error codes associated with the DSP NPE Crosstalk Test for example you may also clea...

Page 2762: ...3 VC DSP Port NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 1001 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1...

Page 2763: ...VC DSPPT Issue 4 May 2002 10 1977 555 233 123 Figure 10 107 VC Circuit Pack DSP Port Local TDM Loopback Test...

Page 2764: ...for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors are out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the test at 1 minute in...

Page 2765: ...ntervals a maximum of 5 times 0 3 FAIL The TDM Loop Around Test failed 1 Replace circuit pack 4 7 FAIL The Conference Circuit Test failed 1 Replace circuit pack PASS The VC DSP Port Local TDM Loop Aro...

Page 2766: ...s test is destructive This test verifies the connectivity of a VC DSPPT across the TDM bus It aborts if calls associated with the port are in progress Failure of this test indicates an on board fault...

Page 2767: ...is oversized for the number of Tone Detectors present or some Tone Detectors are out of service 1 Resolve any TTR LEV errors 2 Resolve any TONE PT errors 3 If neither condition exists retry the test...

Page 2768: ...imes 0 1 FAIL The VC DSPPT DSP Loopback Test failed 1 Replace the circuit pack PASS The VC DSPPT DSP Loopback Test passed Table 10 712 TEST 1106 VC Port Reset DSP Test Error Code Test Result Descripti...

Page 2769: ...resources for this test 1 Retry the command at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times FAIL The reset of the VC DSPPT was unsuccessful 1 Replace circuit pack PASS The VC DSPPT was successfully reset...

Page 2770: ...contains 16 physical ports 8 ports are reserved for VC DSPPT ports and the remaining 8 ports are designated as VC SUMPT ports The 8 DSP ports are made up of 4 encoder and 4 decoder resources that enc...

Page 2771: ...ble for service to be equal to or more than the calculated port capacity value entered in the VCs field To determine how many VC circuit packs are needed for MMCH 1 Display the System Parameters Maint...

Page 2772: ...vice problem by following the procedures below 1 See VC DSPPT and VC BD and resolve any associated alarms 2 If a VC LEV error alarm exist and none has been raised against VC BD or VC DSPPT maintenance...

Page 2773: ...arrier where the circuit pack is located for example 01 02 and pp is the two digit port number 01 02 03 Full Name of MO VC SUMPT MAJ test port PCSS l r Voice Conditioner Summer Port VC SUMPT MIN test...

Page 2774: ...error codes associated with the Voice and Control Channel Local Loop Around Test for example you may also clear errors generated from other tests in the testing sequence NPE Crosstalk Test 6 This test...

Page 2775: ...0 715 TEST 6 NPE Crosstalk Test Error Code Test Result Description Recommendation 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be busy with a valid call 1 Retry...

Page 2776: ...Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 555 233 123 10 1990 Issue 4 May 2002 Figure 10 109 VC Circuit Pack Summer Port Loopback Test...

Page 2777: ...nose any active TDM Bus errors 1 If the system has no TDM BUS errors and is not handling heavy traffic repeat the test at 1 minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1003 ABORT The system could not alloca...

Page 2778: ...occurs again replace the circuit pack 2012 ABORT Internal system error 2100 ABORT Could not allocate the necessary system resources to run this test 2103 ABORT The system could not make the conference...

Page 2779: ...Endpoints on one line side UDS1 circuit pack TN464C facility are separate and distinct within the facility and the endpoint application equipment must be administered to send and receive the correct...

Page 2780: ...rt maintenance These states include out of service where the port is in a deactivated state and cannot be used for calls and in service where the port is in an activated state and can be used for call...

Page 2781: ...Update Test 36 failed due to an internal system error Enter the status access endpoint extension command and verify the status of the port If the wideband access endpoint is out of service enter the r...

Page 2782: ...ailable 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are not available The port may be in use on a valid call Use the status a...

Page 2783: ...command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test continues to abort and if the port is not in use escalate the problem 1020 ABORT The test did not run due either to a previously exis...

Page 2784: ...ecommendation ABORT System resources required for this test are not available 1 Retry the command at one minute intervals a maximum of 5 times 1000 ABORT System resources required to run this test are...

Page 2785: ...ones correctly This causes noisy and unreliable connections Although wideband calls do not use the conferencing feature on the NPE this failure indicates problems with the circuit pack hardware 1 Repl...

Page 2786: ...service If the port is busied out 1 Issue release access endpoint extension command to put the port back into in service 2 Retry the test command If the port is not busied out 1 Check the error and a...

Page 2787: ...circuit packs approximately 21 minutes elapse before an alarm is logged When a circuit pack that has been removed is alarmed the alarm type is minor and is classified as an on board alarm The time del...

Page 2788: ...vice TN436B Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN437 Tie Trunk Port TN438B Central Office Trunk Port TN439 Tie Trunk Port TN447 Central Office Trunk Port TN457 Speech Synthesizer Service TN458 Tie Trunk...

Page 2789: ...756 Tone Detector Service TN758 Pooled Modem Port TN760B C D Tie Trunk Port TN762B Hybrid Line Port TN763B C D Auxiliary Trunk Port TN765 Processor Interface Control TN767B C D E DS1 Interface T1 24 C...

Page 2790: ...ort TN2140 B Tie Trunk Port TN2144 Analog Line Port TN2146 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Port TN2147 C Central Office Trunk Port TN2149 Analog Line Port TN2180 Analog Line Port TN2181 Digital Line 2 wir...

Page 2791: ...rd PCSS sh r 1 1 a 0 Circuit pack removed or SAKI Sanity Test 53 MINOR ON 18 b 0 busyout board PCSS WARNING OFF release board PCSS 23 c 0 None WARNING OFF 36 d 4368 none 125 e None MINOR ON 2172 f 2 G...

Page 2792: ...test does not clear error 23 then execute reset board PCSS and run the long test again 3 If the reset test does not clear error 23 replace the circuit pack d This error applies only to the Maintenanc...

Page 2793: ...t one or more of the following symptoms 1 The common circuit pack level tests such as Test 51 and or Test 220 are aborting with error code 2000 2 The tests run on the ports of this circuit pack are re...

Page 2794: ...it System Technician Demanded Tests Descriptions and Error Codes Always investigate tests in the order presented in the table below when inspecting errors in the system By clearing error codes associa...

Page 2795: ...TN771B or TN771C the Tone Detector circuit pack TN748B TN748C or TN748D and the Call Classifier TN744 The Maintenance Test circuit pack allows only one circuit pack per port network The Tone Detector...

Page 2796: ...ard reset board and release busy board commands and then retest 3 If the test still aborts dispatch with the circuit pack 4 Check the off board wiring and the terminal and if there are no problems fou...

Page 2797: ...b If there are no RING GEN errors and the test continues to abort issue the test board PCSS command on other TN742 TN769 or TN746 Analog circuit packs If an ABORT with error code 1008 occurs for this...

Page 2798: ...rcuit pack does not support the Ringing Application Circuit Test Analog Line circuit packs that DO NOT support Test 51 include TN712 Vintage 13 and earlier and TN742 Vintage 3 and earlier any NO BOARD...

Page 2799: ...circuit pack code or vintage 1 Retry the command for a maximum of 5 times 2 If the test still fails issue the busyout board reset board and release busy board commands and then retest 3 If the proble...

Page 2800: ...gain Refer to SYNC Synchronization Maintenance documentation 1015 ABORT Port is not out of service 1 Busy out the circuit pack 2 Execute command again 2100 ABORT System resources required for this tes...

Page 2801: ...extension Use status station to determine the service state of the port If the service state indicates that the port is in use then the port is unavailable for certain tests Refer to the Status Comman...

Page 2802: ...with neon The field Message Waiting Indicator must be set to neon for at least one of the administered ports If this field is not administered to neon the test continues to abort This is acceptable be...

Page 2803: ...ace the TN755 or TN752 power unit circuit pack 2 Retry the command again 3 If the test continues to fail replace the circuit pack 4 Retry the command again PASS This circuit pack is a TN746 or TN769 A...

Page 2804: ...Maintenance Object Repair Procedures 555 233 123 10 2018 Issue 4 May 2002...

Page 2805: ...at for the extension is incorrect the following error message is displayed Extension invalid If the EPN on which the access endpoint resides is not accessible the following message appears EPN is not...

Page 2806: ...en resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later busyout board This command will busyout...

Page 2807: ...is as follows login id command has a command conflict If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message appears C...

Page 2808: ...nsion Error Messages If the length or format of the extension is incorrect the following error message appears Extension invalid If the specified extension is not administered then the following messa...

Page 2809: ...ng object command word choices appears pms log wakeup log If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command then a message appears showing the login id of the conflicting...

Page 2810: ...all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later busyout mis This will busyout a specified management...

Page 2811: ...ember range then the following message appears Boards not assigned If the specific group or member are not administered then the following message appears Group not assigned or group assigned but with...

Page 2812: ...f the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later busyout pms link Help Messages If the system technician pre...

Page 2813: ...sage appears Cannot busyout release part of SCI link If the port is translated within a Wideband Access Endpoint the following error message appears Port within wideband access endpt Use busyout acces...

Page 2814: ...PRI endpoint the following message appears Extension assigned to object other than pri endpoint If the board that contains the PRI endpoint is not inserted in the system the following message appears...

Page 2815: ...resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later busyout spe standby Help Messages If the s...

Page 2816: ...ing message appears EPN is not available If the station port resides on a board that is not inserted in the system the following message appears Board not assigned If the station port resides on a boa...

Page 2817: ...ng user and the conflicting command The message is as follows login id command has a command conflict If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart t...

Page 2818: ...not available If the tone clock is active and the specified action is busyout the following message appears Illegal Command for active object use set to switch to standby If the command entered is in...

Page 2819: ...rs Cannot busyout release part of SCI link If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command then a message appears showing the login id of the conflicting user and the co...

Page 2820: ...lp Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering change circuit packs the following message appears Enter number between 1 3 Error Messages If the command entered is in conflict with a...

Page 2821: ...ing repairs To deactivate alarm origination 1 Make a note of the current entries in the Alarm Origination and CPE Alarm fields so you can restore them later 2 Change the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbe...

Page 2822: ...rom the National Customer Support Center NCSC or the TSC and are not allowed in the telephone number Abbrev Alarm Report Enables the Abbreviated Alarm Report feature for the first OSS yes change syste...

Page 2823: ...The switch originates calls to the OSS and sends an alarm resolution message once all previously reported Major and Minor alarms are resolved Activate Alarm Origination to enable Cleared Alarm Notific...

Page 2824: ...t customer login ID access to system administration and maintenance interface control set this field to no Avaya services has sole access to this field Repeat Dial Interval MMS Number of minutes that...

Page 2825: ...locks for its native port network Then the system interchanges to the originally active Tone Clock circuit pack SPE Interchange This field indicates the days SPE interchanges execute during scheduled...

Page 2826: ...TN756 TN2182 and TN744 suffix C or later each have 8 CPTRs To alarm the first occurrence of a CPTR being taken out of service set this field to the total number of CPTRs in the switch Call Classifier...

Page 2827: ...16 physical ports 8 ports are reserved for VC DSPPT ports and the remaining 8 ports are designated as VC SUMPT ports The 8 DSP ports are made up of 4 encoder and 4 decoder resources that encode and de...

Page 2828: ...between the far end and the system ISDN BRI Service SPID This field shows if the link associates with the Service SPID If the link is associated with the Service SPID This number is the test SPID 0 99...

Page 2829: ...ridge and Inter Board Link Timeslots fields display Default is n Packet Intf3 This field identifies the presence of Packet Interface 3 Unavailable in the si and csi models It is changeable in the r mo...

Page 2830: ...r space Modem Connection Valid entries are internal default or external Modem Name This field is 20 characters long and will permit alpha numeric characters to provide a unique qualifier for a given m...

Page 2831: ...s the last initialization parameters to be sent to the external modem This field is 20 characters long and is case in sensitive Auto Answer Ring Count This field controls the number of rings required...

Page 2832: ...ry is not required No Answer Time Out Most off the shelf external modems provide a timer that abandons any outbound data call after a predetermined interval Some modems provide for this timer to be di...

Page 2833: ...e following message appears Enter location cabinet 1 carrier A B pos 1 2 Error Messages If the specified carrier is not the active PE the following message appears Command must be executed from active...

Page 2834: ...ion is incorrect this message displays Format invalid If the specified trunk group or member range is invalid this message displays Trunk or trunk group invalid If a trunk group and member is not spec...

Page 2835: ...t complete request clear link Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering clear link the following message appears Enter 1 character link number Error Messages If the link ident...

Page 2836: ...onflict could occur if another user was executing an enable disable or clear message sequence trace command at the same time The message is as follows login id command has a command conflict clear pkt...

Page 2837: ...es busy try again later copy update file Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering copy update file on a duplex SPE system the following message appears override Error Message...

Page 2838: ...le administered connection Help Messages If the user presses HELP after entering disable administered connection the following message appears Enter assigned administered connection number 1 128 or al...

Page 2839: ...le mst Help Messages If the user presses HELP after entering disable mst the following message displays Entry is not required Error Messages If the command entered is in conflict with another currentl...

Page 2840: ...later disable test number Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering disable test number the following message appears Enter test number Error Messages If the test number ente...

Page 2841: ...maintenance resources busy try again later Field Help Following are the help messages that the system technician will see upon tabbing to the specified field and pressing the HELP key Active n o y es...

Page 2842: ...jrnl procr quick st s syn stabd stacrk stations sys prnt tape tdm tone trkbd trkcrk trunk wideband For a table describing the category entries in greater detail see the display errors command Extensi...

Page 2843: ...he following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later Field Help Following are the help messages that the system technician will see upon tabbing to the specified field and press...

Page 2844: ...tegory Maintenance Objects adm conn ADM CONN announce ANN PT ANN BD bri asai BRI BD BRI PORT ABRI PORT BRI SET ASAI ADJ card mem CARD MEM CAP MEM FL DATA cdr CDR LNK data mod PDMODULE TDMODULE DT LN B...

Page 2845: ..._PACKET MO_EPN_SANITY MO_PROCESSOR MO_MEMORY MO_SYSAM MO_ ARCHA MO_MSSNET MO_TAPE MO_DISK MO_SYSTEM MO_TTR_LEV MO_SYS_CONFIG MO_CTONE_BD MO_PNI_BD MO_PACCON MO_EAA MO_LINK s syn S SYN PT S SYN BD stab...

Page 2846: ...Enter assigned extension Trunk group Enter group number between 1 99 Trunk member Enter group member between 1 99 or blank Interval x is an invalid entry please press HELP key Error Type Entry must be...

Page 2847: ...usy try again later display memory configuration Help Messages If the system technician presses help after entering display memory configuration the following message appears Enter long print or sched...

Page 2848: ...cation invalid If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to cl...

Page 2849: ...restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the follow...

Page 2850: ...ored The total number of subpatches listed in the header of the update file did not match the number of subpatches received by the switch Received wrong number of subpatches for update file RECOVERY P...

Page 2851: ...diately 4 The LMM reports a hard error The symptoms of this is an entry in the hardware error log for the processor memory board if you re lucky or extremely odd switch behavior followed by SPE down m...

Page 2852: ...tem restart indicated in the accompanying documentation 2 If one processor has a copy of the update file and the other doesn t neither has been patched the file can be copied using the command copy up...

Page 2853: ...cting user and the conflicting command The message is as follows login id command has a command conflict If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restar...

Page 2854: ...d then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later enable test number Help Messages If...

Page 2855: ...esources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later li...

Page 2856: ...es If the software data cannot be sent to the SAT the following message appears Error encountered can t complete request If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires th...

Page 2857: ...inet 1 3 carrier A E slot 00 20 print or schedule Error Messages If the user enters an invalid format for a board location when entering a list measurements ds1 log or list measurements ds1 summary co...

Page 2858: ...occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are...

Page 2859: ...administered port location is entered the following message appears identifier Identifier invalid If the user entered trunk group number or the trunk group member number is not within a valid range th...

Page 2860: ...mand If the system technician presses HELP after entering command monitor bcms split or monitor bcms skill the following message appears Enter a measured split or skill number 1 99 print Or press CANC...

Page 2861: ...tem technician presses HELP after entering monitor security violations the following message appears print Error Messages If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires t...

Page 2862: ...e then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later monitor traffic Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering monitor traffic the following obj...

Page 2863: ...currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later recycle carrier Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering recycle carrier o...

Page 2864: ...e appears showing the login id of the conflicting user and the conflicting command The message is as follows login id command has a command conflict refresh spe standby Help Messages If the system tec...

Page 2865: ...xecuting command then a message appears showing the login id of the conflicting user and the conflicting command The message is as follows login id command has a command conflict If during the executi...

Page 2866: ...board in the service slot the following message appears Board invalid If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command then a message appears showing the login id of the...

Page 2867: ...t If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later release data module Help Messages If the system t...

Page 2868: ...enance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later release journal printer Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP afte...

Page 2869: ...he message is as follows login id command has a command conflict If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message...

Page 2870: ...between 1 5 Or press CANCEL to cancel the command Error Messages If the release modem pool command is entered from a login for which the command is not valid then the following message appears releas...

Page 2871: ...nance resources busy try again later release packet control Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering release packet control the following message appears Enter Packet Control...

Page 2872: ...restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use the following m...

Page 2873: ...the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If...

Page 2874: ...lowing message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintena...

Page 2875: ...presses HELP after entering release station the following message appears Enter extension for an assigned station Error Messages If the format of the extension is incorrect the following error messag...

Page 2876: ...esubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later release tdm Help Messages If the system tec...

Page 2877: ...nance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later release tone clock Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after ente...

Page 2878: ...icting user and the conflicting command The message is as follows login id command has a command conflict If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to resta...

Page 2879: ...message is as follows login id command has a command conflict If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message a...

Page 2880: ...lows login id command has a command conflict If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message appears Command res...

Page 2881: ...t If the standby is entering maintenance mode when this command is executed then the following message appears Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode please try later If the stan...

Page 2882: ...et 0 2 0 3 carrier A Error Messages If the cabinet entered is non numeric or not within a valid range the following message appears Cabinet number out of range Enter 2 3 If the length of the user ente...

Page 2883: ...tem on a simplex SPE system the following message appears Enter system recovery level 1 WARM 2 COLDII 3 COLDI 4 REBOOT or 5 EXT REBOOT If the system technician presses HELP after entering reset system...

Page 2884: ...le Error Messages If the announcement data module cannot be accessed upload download port is active the following message appears Announcement data module not available If the announcement data module...

Page 2885: ...r Messages If there is no test hardware group command to be resumed i e no test hardware group command was previously canceled or some system recovery had occurred and no test hardware group command h...

Page 2886: ...service the following message appears Announcement data module out of service If one or more of the announcement ports are in use the following message appears Announcement port in use please try lat...

Page 2887: ...the following message appears Cannot access the standby SPE at this time If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command then a message appears showing the login id of...

Page 2888: ...following message appears Port Board invalid If the link associated with the entered EI location is already active the following message appears EXP INTF is already on active link If the specified ex...

Page 2889: ...ELP after entering set options the following message appears Entry is not required Error Messages If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing command then a message appears...

Page 2890: ...or y then the following message appears X is an invalid entry please press HELP key All of the fields on page 2 allow the same values If the value in one of these fields is not numeric the following m...

Page 2891: ...system technician presses HELP after entering set synchronization the following message appears Enter DS1 board location or Tone Clock location cabinet 1 3 carrier A E Error Messages If the command en...

Page 2892: ...the following message appears Identifier invalid If the technician enters a Port Network number that is not administered the following message appears Port Network number not assigned If the command...

Page 2893: ...resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later Field Help Following are the help messages that the system technician will see upon tab...

Page 2894: ...ng message appears Identifier invalid If the carrier entered is invalid the following message appears Invalid carrier specified If the cabinet entered is not within the valid range of cabinets or the...

Page 2895: ...ailable maintenance resources are currently in use the following message displays All maintenance resources busy try again later set vector Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after en...

Page 2896: ...on WARM and COLDII restarts a hex value of F causes memory dumps to be taken on WARM COLDII COLDI and REBOOT restarts etc Error Messages If the format of the condition dump vector value is invalid the...

Page 2897: ...t resides is not accessible the following message appears EPN is not available If during the execution of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the fol...

Page 2898: ...n the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All...

Page 2899: ...ppears cumulative peak hour Error Messages If the print option is specified and there is no printer attached to the terminal or if the printer is off line then the following message appears Printer fa...

Page 2900: ...roblem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resour...

Page 2901: ...this command is executed then the following message appears Standby SPE memory not refreshed use the refresh spe standby command If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected...

Page 2902: ...data module Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering status data module the following message appears Enter assigned extension print Error Messages If the format of the exte...

Page 2903: ...essages If the system technician presses HELP after entering status hardware group the following message appears print status health Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering...

Page 2904: ...arrier the following message appears Invalid carrier specified If the technician entered carrier is not active the following error message will be entered Board invalid If the specified carrier positi...

Page 2905: ...assigned or group assigned but with no member If the specified trunk group member is not administered the following message appears Group member not assigned If a test call is currently not in progre...

Page 2906: ...s All maintenance resources busy try again later status link Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering status link the following message appears Enter 1 character link number...

Page 2907: ...ater status mst Help Messages If you press HELP after entering status mst the following message displays Entry is not required Error Messages If the command entered is in conflict with another current...

Page 2908: ...ppears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources bu...

Page 2909: ...ge appears All maintenance resources busy try again later status pri endpoint Help Messages If the user presses HELP after entering status pri endpoint the following message appears Enter assigned ext...

Page 2910: ...es If the system technician presses HELP after entering status processor channel the following message appears Enter a processor channel number 1 64 print Error Messages If the technician entered chan...

Page 2911: ...wing message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenanc...

Page 2912: ...ith the extension is not a station or an attendant console the following message appears Extension exists but assigned to a different object Error Messages If during the execution of a command a resou...

Page 2913: ...vailable maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later status system Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP...

Page 2914: ...ion of a command a resource problem occurs that requires the user to restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the...

Page 2915: ...res the user to restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use...

Page 2916: ...nsion is not an access endpoint the following message appears Extension assigned to object other than access endpoint If the board that contains the access endpoint is not inserted in the system the f...

Page 2917: ...ommand then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message a...

Page 2918: ...t pkt_ctrl quick st pms jrnl procr s syn stabd stacrk stations sys prnt tape tdm tone trkbd trkcrk trunks and wideband For a table describing the category entries in greater detail see the display err...

Page 2919: ...l or supervision or no selftest or no return loss or no st or rl repeat 1 100 schedule If the system technician presses HELP after entering test analog testcall board the following message appears Ent...

Page 2920: ...ed but with no member If the trunk group member is not administered the following message displays Group member not assigned If no tests can be found for the associated MO the following message appear...

Page 2921: ...ils the following message appears No MO in this board If no tests can be found for the associated MO the following message displays No tests for this MO If the specified board is a Switch Node Interfa...

Page 2922: ...be executed from active SPE If the carrier entered is invalid the following message appears entered value is an invalid identifier press RETURN to execute modified command If the NETCON board is not T...

Page 2923: ...he following message appears Enter primary or secondary If the system technician presses HELP after entering test cdr link primary or test cdr link secondary the following message appears Enter long o...

Page 2924: ...1 carrier A B long or short repeat 1 100 or clear schedule For cabinet 2 3 enter cabinet 2 3 long or short repeat 1 100 or clear schedule Error Messages If the location identifier entered is not vali...

Page 2925: ...her currently executing command then a message appears showing the login id of the conflicting user and the conflicting command The message is as follows login id command has a command conflict If dur...

Page 2926: ...uires the user to restart the command then the following message appears Command resources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in u...

Page 2927: ...e mode when this command is executed then the following message appears Cannot interrupt Standby SPE while entering maintenance mode please try later If the standby SPE is not refreshed when this comm...

Page 2928: ...error message appears Identifier invalid If the indicated EPN is not available the following message appears EPN is not available If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing...

Page 2929: ...ecause of the test hardware group command with the all ports option the request to add station will fail and the following message appears Object in use please try later If an invalid physical locatio...

Page 2930: ...er between 1 99 Auto page n o y es Background n o y es Failures n o y es All ports n o y es SPE interchange n o y es Test sequence x is an invalid entry please press HELP Test Repetition x is an inval...

Page 2931: ...sources busy Press CANCEL to clear and then resubmit If all of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again late...

Page 2932: ...en this command is executed then the following message appears Standby SPE memory not refreshed use the refresh spe standby command If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selec...

Page 2933: ...fy group member pair If the specified trunk group is not administered or has no members administered the following message appears Group not assigned or group assigned but with no member If the specif...

Page 2934: ...echnician presses HELP after entering test journal printer the following object command word choices appears pms log wakeup log Error Messages If the link is not administered the following error messa...

Page 2935: ...gin id command has a command conflict test link Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering test link the following message appears Enter link number 1 8 long or short repeat 1...

Page 2936: ...message appears Enter cabinet 2 3 carrier A long or short repeat 1 100 or clear schedule Error Messages For any system if the entered value is invalid the following message appears Identifier invalid...

Page 2937: ...B for SPE duplex and anything other than the a carrier for SPE simplex the following message appears Carrier out of range Enter a if SPE simplex a or b if SPE duplex If the standby SPE was specified...

Page 2938: ...member numbers entered are not digits then the following message appears Identifier invalid If the group number or member number entered is not within the valid range of groups or members the followin...

Page 2939: ...appears Enter cabinet 1 carrier A B long or short repeat 1 100 or clear schedule Error Messages If the SPE is not active the following message appears Command must be executed from active SPE If the...

Page 2940: ...and is executed then the following message appears Standby SPE memory not refreshed use the refresh spe standby command If the standby SPE is not refreshed and the active SPE is hard selected via the...

Page 2941: ...system technician presses HELP after entering test pkt the following message appears Enter port network port network number 1 3 long or short repeat 1 100 or clear schedule Error Messages If the tech...

Page 2942: ...ain later test pms link Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering test pms link the following message appears Enter long or short repeat 1 100 or clear schedule Error Messages...

Page 2943: ...message appears Port not assigned If there are no tests found for this maintenance object the following message appears No tests for this MO If the command entered is in conflict with another currentl...

Page 2944: ...nsion is not a PRI endpoint the following message appears Extension assigned to object other than pri endpoint If the board that contains the PRI endpoint is not inserted in the system the following m...

Page 2945: ...eeds three 3 the following message appears Entry invalid On any system if any cabinet other than 1 or 01 is specified the following message appears Only cabinet 1 may be specified for this command If...

Page 2946: ...mmand then a message appears showing the login id of the conflicting user and the conflicting command The message is as follows login id command has a command conflict If the standby is entering maint...

Page 2947: ...age appears Signaling group invalid If the specified group identifier is not administered the following message appears No signaling group assigned If no tests can be found for the associated MO the f...

Page 2948: ...ll of the available maintenance resources are currently in use then the following message appears All maintenance resources busy try again later test spe standby Help Messages If the system technician...

Page 2949: ...the standby SPE is not available when this command is executed then the following message appears Standby SPE not available for information use status system 1 test station Help Messages If the syste...

Page 2950: ...later test synchronization This command updates all the boards involved with synchronization Help Messages If the system technician presses HELP after entering test synchronization the following messa...

Page 2951: ...d If the port network on which the desired TDM bus resides is unavailable the following message appears EPN is not available If the command entered is in conflict with another currently executing comm...

Page 2952: ...one of the following messages appears Board not inserted Board not assigned If the specified cabinet carrier location is that of a switch node the following message appears Switch Node carrier specifi...

Page 2953: ...ppears Group not assigned or group assigned but with no member If the trunk group member is not administered the following message appears Group member not assigned If there are no tests found for thi...

Page 2954: ...signaling group has no TSC assigned or the specified TSC is unadministered the following message appears No TSC assigned If the specified TSC number is out of range the following message appears Tsc...

Page 2955: ...The output form lists Hops traversed from source to destination IP addresses of the hop points and the final destination Observed round trip delay from the source to each hop point If no reply is rece...

Page 2956: ...e traceroute command is issued Time ms Time from the board to each intermediate destination in milliseconds If an error occurs at a node the entry is repeated with an error code immediately following...

Page 2957: ...m on the software card mem is bad the following message appears Bad checksum on software card mem try another card mem If the software upgrade failed in the standby SPE the following message appears N...

Page 2958: ...completed initialization the following message appears Standby SPE memory not refreshed Use refresh spe standby If the active SPE cannot communicate with the standby SPE after the standby SPE is prope...

Page 2959: ...ements recorded 5 20 ANSI 1 18 application protocols 1 16 to 1 23 Asynchronous Data Unit proprietary signal 1 12 ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode B channel 10 214 circuit emulation service CES 10 214 D...

Page 2960: ...DCE 1 9 D channel protocol 1 9 DCP 1 11 DEC VT220 terminals 3 25 delay echo path 1 23 demand tests 1 8 diagnostic tests 4 2 DIG IP STN 10 551 Digital IP Station 10 551 Digital Multiplexed Interface 1...

Page 2961: ...nse analog to analog 1 19 analog to digital 1 19 G Global AC MCC J58890CH 10 1345 H H 323 B Channel 10 870 H 323 IP Station 10 880 H323 BCH 10 870 hardware configurations 2 1 power 2 1 holdover batter...

Page 2962: ...ystems 10 377 CLSFY BD Call Classifier Circuit Pack 10 411 CLSFY PT Call Classifier Port 10 412 CO BD Central Office Trunk Circuit Pack 10 418 CO DS1 DS1 CO Trunk 10 419 CONFIG System Configuration 10...

Page 2963: ...8 maintenance objects MOs 9 5 maintenance software 9 9 TDM bus 9 8 Packet Interface 10 1290 Password Expiration screen 3 6 PBX standard RS 464A 1 18 pcANYWHERE 10 1043 PCM encoded analog signal 1 12...

Page 2964: ...e 4 8 SPE interchange 4 7 SRP EPN 10 1516 standard reliability systems 3 2 standards electromagnetic compatibility 3 standby SPE 4 7 station to CO trunk frequency response 1 19 station to digital inte...

Page 2965: ...580 10 731 10 1453 tests and audits continued 161 Loop Around Test 10 82 10 275 10 1671 17 Station Digital Audits Test 10 582 10 1455 205 Channel Administration Memory Array CAMA Test 10 158 206 Play...

Page 2966: ...TN2501AP integrated announcements faceplate LEDs interpretation 10 1960 TN2793B 10 111 TN464 circuit packs DS1 interface 10 611 10 919 10 1037 10 1069 10 1831 option jumpers 10 1841 trunks 10 1839 TN4...

Page 2967: ...37 10 1069 10 1831 10 1841 V V 35 1 11 Voice Announcements over LAN VAL backplane adapter Comcode 10 1958 backplane adapter installing 10 1961 equipment configuration 10 1957 maintenance objects 10 19...

Page 2968: ...Index 555 233 123 IN 10 Issue 4 May 2002...

Reviews:

No comments